JP7706411B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player by executing a variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information.

Among pachinko gaming machines, which are representative of gaming machines, there are some that perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (decorative patterns) in response to the variable display of specific identification information (special patterns) (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines are capable of executing a step-up effect in which the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device is changed in stages, in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device is likened to glass, and after displaying a crack (a glass plate as an image that foreshadows cracking) on the display screen, multiple images of broken pieces are displayed as if the display screen had been broken (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2017-86392 A JP 2020-127593 A

There was room for improving the marketability of gaming machines with the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

The present invention was conceived in light of this situation, and its purpose is to provide an amusement machine with improved marketability.

(A) A gaming machine that can variably display identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A predetermined effect that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state can be executed.
The predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image after displaying the crack precursor image,
A special background image can be displayed as a background image before the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance,
As a background image after the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance, any one of a plurality of background images including a first predetermined background image and a second predetermined background image which is different from the special background image and suggests that there is a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first predetermined background image can be displayed;
When the special background image is displayed before the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance, the object image in any one of a plurality of object images can be displayed;
According to a state of the object image, it is possible to suggest which of the plurality of background images will be displayed after the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance,
The object image of the same type as the object image displayed before the fragment image is displayed can be displayed after the predetermined effect is executed,
In one rendering mode, a plurality of types of specific background images including a first specific background image and a second specific background image can be switched and displayed;
When the specific background image is switched from the first specific background image to the second specific background image, a background fade-out display is executed by gradually increasing the transparency of the first specific background image, and a background fade-in display is executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second specific background image,
When starting the variable display of the identification information, a fade-out display of the identification information can be executed by gradually increasing the transparency of the identification information,
When the variable display of the identification information is terminated, a fade-in display of the identification information can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the identification information,
The identification information fade-out display and the background fade-out display can be executed at the same time,
The identification information fade-in display and the background fade-in display can be executed at a common time,
a period during which the background fade-out display is executed is longer than a period during which the identification information fade-out display is executed,
an execution period of the fade-in display of the background is longer than an execution period of the fade-in display of the identification information;
It is characterized by:

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

1 is a front view showing a gaming machine in embodiment 1. FIG. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. A diagram to explain decorative patterns and small patterns. (A1) and (A2) are figures showing the first presentation mode, (B1) and (B2) are the second presentation mode, (C1) and (C2) are the third presentation mode, and (D1) and (D2) are the fourth presentation mode. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative patterns in the first presentation mode, and in the second presentation mode, respectively. (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the third presentation mode, (D1) and (D2) are diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the fourth presentation mode, and (E) is a diagram for explaining the manner of variable display of the decorative pattern and the small pattern. 1A shows the decorative pattern change start action, (B) shows the change stop action, and (C) shows the loop action. FIG. 1A is a diagram comparing various actions of decorative patterns with periods of lamp light emission control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of loop light emission control of a lamp. 13A to 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of the operation of the hold display. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 26. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the second presentation mode. This is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following Figure 28. A diagram showing details of the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in Figure 28. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns as modified example 1. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns following FIG. 31. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the third presentation mode. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining how the decorative pattern appears. A diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative patterns in the fourth presentation mode. A diagram showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative patterns in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). This figure shows the flow of the stopping display of decorative patterns following Figure 36. (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of the stopping display of decorative patterns when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the flow of the stopped display of decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode). 1A is a diagram showing a first background image, FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a first predetermined background image, and FIG. 1C is a diagram explaining a background change. A diagram showing the flow of background changes in the first presentation mode. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the first presentation mode. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the second presentation mode. 11 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part of the variable display in the third presentation mode and the fourth presentation mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first presentation mode, (B) is the second presentation mode, and (C) is the third and fourth presentation modes. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of a customer waiting demo performance. A diagram showing an example of operation when a start winning occurs during a customer waiting demo performance. A diagram showing the flow of pseudo consecutive announcements. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-consecutive number display and a pattern color, FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the types of pseudo-consecutive number display and a pattern color, and FIG. 1C is a diagram showing a pseudo-consecutive number display color determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the flow of reach presentation. A diagram showing the flow of reach presentation continuing from Figure 50. A diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in a reach performance. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation. A diagram showing the flow of SP reach presentation following Figure 53. A diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the SP reach performance. 1A to 1A are diagrams showing a second modified example of the present invention. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a third modified example of the present invention. 1 is a front view showing an gaming machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a VRAM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the normal state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state or the special state. 13A to 13F are explanatory diagrams of the fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13A is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a random number value when a prize is won, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing variable categories. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. An explanatory diagram of whether or not a pending display effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 10A is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram of a determination ratio for whether or not to execute a continuous breaking effect in a normal state. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a dialogue preview performance setting process, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a dialogue preview performance is executed in the normal state and the performance pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the performance pattern. (A) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a background change is performed and the presentation pattern determination ratio of the background change presentation, (B) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a reach suggestion presentation is performed and the presentation pattern determination ratio, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a cut-in presentation is performed and the presentation pattern determination ratio. This is an explanatory diagram of the content of the effects that can be executed in the normal state and the performance patterns of the broken effects. This is an explanatory diagram of the content of the effects that can be executed in the normal state and the performance patterns of the broken effects. This is an explanatory diagram of the content of the effects that can be executed in the time-saving state and the special state, and the performance patterns of the breaking effects. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram of the approximate execution timing and execution period for each variation pattern of each performance. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach β. A diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach β. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the first consecutive break effect. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the second consecutive breaking performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a dialogue preview performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of background change performance A. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of background change performance A. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of background change presentation B. A figure showing details of some examples of the operation of pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a reach suggestion performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a reach suggestion performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of a weak development performance. A figure showing details of a part of an example of the operation of strong development performance A. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of strong development performance B. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of strong development performance B. A figure showing details of an example of a cut-in performance. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification presentation when the variable display result is a jackpot. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification presentation when the variable display result is a jackpot. A figure showing details of an example of the operation of the result notification presentation when the variable display result is a miss. This is an explanatory diagram for comparing the details of each performance. This is an explanatory diagram for comparing the details of each performance. 13 is a timing chart showing details of the first consecutive break effect and the second consecutive break effect. 13 is a timing chart showing details of the dialogue preview performance. 13 is a timing chart showing details of background change performance A. 13 is a timing chart showing details of background change performance B. 13 is a timing chart showing details of the pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart showing details of the reach suggestion performance. This is a timing chart showing details of the weak development performance. This is a timing chart showing details of strong development performance A. This is a timing chart showing details of strong development performance B. 13 is a timing chart showing details of a cut-in effect. 13 is a timing chart showing details of the result notification presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the speed change of fragment images in each performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a crack pattern in a crack effect. 11A to 11C are diagrams showing display examples of each crack pattern. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern A. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern B. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern C. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern D. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern E. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in crack pattern F. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing display examples with and without a whiteout image in a crack pattern G. FIG. 13A shows a pseudo consecutive effect, and FIG. 13B shows a fragment image displayed in a cut-in effect. (A) shows a fragment image displayed in background change performance A, and (B) shows a fragment image displayed in strong development performance B. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a first modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a second modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example 3 of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a fourth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example 5 of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a sixth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a seventh modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an eighth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a ninth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a ninth modified example of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a tenth modified example of the present invention.

The following describes the mode for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention.

[Form 1] (No. 1)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
A reduced identification information having a size smaller than that of the decorative identification information and corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information can be variably displayed (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display of a small pattern corresponding to a decorative pattern).
The variable display of the decoration identification information includes a moving display (e.g., a scroll display, see FIG. 21 ) that moves the decoration identification information,
The variable display of the reduced identification information is a switching display (e.g., switching display; see FIG. 22(E)) in which the reduced identification information is switched to another reduced identification information without moving the reduced identification information,
In the variable display of the reduced identification information, one piece of decoration identification information is displayed in the variable display of the decoration identification information, and during the period until the display of the one piece of decoration identification information is completed, the reduced identification information can be switched multiple times (for example, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative pattern is displayed until the display of the decorative pattern is completed, the small patterns are switched to small patterns of losing combinations five times, and are displayed for each period Ta1 (period Ta1<period Ta2). See FIG. 22(E)).
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is configured by a combination of the decorative identification information (for example, a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326");
The display result of the variable display of the reduced symbol information is configured by a combination of the reduced symbol information (for example, a combination of small symbols such as "111" and "326");
When a non-specific combination that is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched so that the combination of the reduced identification information corresponding to the non-specific combination does not become the variable display of the reduced identification information before the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is derived (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 decides to stop and display the fixed decorative pattern of the losing combination (for example, "326"), a part that switches and displays so that the small pattern of the losing combination, which is the same as the decorative pattern, "326" is not displayed before the fixed decorative pattern of the losing combination (for example, "326") is stopped and displayed after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern. See FIG. 22(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, the reduced identification information is switched before the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is derived so that the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of the reduced identification information does not correspond to the non-specific combination.Therefore, it is not known in advance that a non-specific combination will be derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information from the combination of reduced identification information in the variable display of the reduced identification information, and a decrease in interest can be prevented.

[Form 2] (No. 2)
The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
Light-emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information stopped in the valid display area among the plurality of the decorative identification information displayed in the display area (for example, a part which becomes a big win or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" displayed in a stopped position in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R).
When a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be displayed in a manner in which it is enlarged from a normal size and then returned to the normal size (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute a variable stop action when a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a variable display based on a miss variable pattern. See Figures 36 to 38, 42, and 43).
When the decoration identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed, the decoration identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not enlarged and displayed (see Modification 3 of FIG. 57 ).
During the variable display of the decorative identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the predetermined light emission control is also continuously performed when the decorative identification information to be stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed (for example, even when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a variable stop action when temporarily stopping and displaying a decorative pattern, the loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d is performed. See Figs. 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a non-specific combination, which is a combination of decoration identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration identification information, the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is temporarily enlarged and displayed, so that the player can be drawn to the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area, and even if a non-specific combination that is essentially meaningless to the player is derived, the player's gaze can be kept on the area where the decoration identification information is displayed. Furthermore, when the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed, the decoration identification information that is not located in the effective display area is not enlarged and displayed, so that the player's gaze can be focused on the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area, and the load of the display control can be reduced. Furthermore, the predetermined light emission control is continued even when the decoration identification information stopped in the effective display area is enlarged and displayed, so that the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 3-1] (No. 4-1)
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a frontward moving display (e.g., a scroll display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the back side to the front side while increasing transparency, and then disappeared (see FIGS. 28 to 30 ).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located on the rear side of one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the character image of the other decoration identification information is displayed while the number image is not displayed. After the one decoration identification information is erased, the number image of the other decoration identification information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 30(A) and (B), the one decoration identification information is displayed in the period from when it is displayed in the frame-in display area 5L, 5C, 5R to when it is displayed out of the frame, (For example, a decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") located at the rear so as to overlap partially with decorative pattern "2" may become visible through decorative pattern "2". In this case, the character in character display portion 002SG052 of decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number ("3") in number display portion 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in FIG. 30(C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased, and then the number ("3") in number display portion 002SG051 of decorative pattern "3" is displayed.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when performing a front-moving display in which the decorative identification information is moved from the back side to the front side while increasing its transparency and then erased, the other decorative identification information located at the back side of one decorative identification information can be seen through the first decorative identification information.In this case, the other decorative identification information located at the back side has its character image displayed while its number image is not displayed, and the first decorative identification information is erased and then the number image of the other decorative identification information is displayed.Therefore, the number image of the one decorative identification information and the number image of the other decorative identification information are not displayed overlapping each other, and it is possible to prevent the number image of the one decorative identification information located at the front side from becoming difficult to understand.

[Form 3-2] (No. 4-2)
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a frontward moving display (e.g., a scroll display) in which the ornament identification information is moved from the front side to the back side while increasing transparency, and then disappeared (see Figs. 31 and 32 ).
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display unit 002SG052) and a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
During the forward movement display of the decoration identification information, other decoration identification information located on the back side of one decoration identification information becomes visible through the one decoration identification information, and the character image of the one decoration identification information is displayed while the number image is not displayed, and the other decoration identification information is erased and then the number image of the one decoration identification information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (G) (H), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front side to the back side, so that another decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "2") located on the back side so as to overlap part of one decorative pattern (for example, decorative pattern "3") may become visible through the decorative pattern "3" during the period from when it is frame-in displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R to when it is frame-out displayed. At this time, the character of the character display part 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") of the number display part 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed). Variation 1)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when performing a front moving display in which the decorative identification information is moved from the front side to the back side while increasing its transparency and then erased, the other decorative identification information located at the back side of one decorative identification information can be seen through the one decorative identification information.In this case, the one decorative identification information located at the front side has its character image displayed while its number image is not displayed, and the other decorative identification information is erased and then the number image of the one decorative identification information is displayed.Therefore, the number image of the other decorative identification information and the number image of the one decorative identification information are not displayed overlapping each other, preventing the number image of the other decorative identification information located at the back from becoming difficult to see.

[Form 4] (No. 5)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
Light-emitting means (e.g., a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, and a movable body lamp 9d),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The variable display of the ornament identification information includes a rotation display in which the ornament identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the ornament identification information (see Figs. 33 and 34 );
The decoration identification information is semi-transparent during the rotating display, and becomes non-transparent when the rotating display stops (see FIGS. 33 and 34 ).
The ornament identification information includes a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG051),
The number image on the front side of the decoration identification information that is in a semi-transparent state during the rotation display is displayed, while the number image on the back side is not displayed (see FIG. 34 ).
During execution of the variable display of the decorative identification information, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode for a predetermined light emission period, and the predetermined light emission control is continuously performed even during the rotation display (for example, even when variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in a high base state, a light emission pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in this order based on a loop light emission control (see FIG. 24(B)) corresponding to the background pattern. Modified example. See FIG. 44).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when performing a rotational display in which the decorative identification information is rotated to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decorative identification information, the decorative identification information becomes semi-transparent, so that not only the front side but also the back side of the decorative identification information can be seen through. In this case, the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information is displayed, but the number image on the back side is not displayed, so that the number image on the front side of the decorative identification information and the number image on the back side are not displayed overlapping each other, which prevents the number image on the front side from becoming difficult to understand. In addition, since the predetermined light emission control is continued during the rotational display, the control of the light emitting means can be simplified.

[Form 5] (No. 6)
The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the ornament identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left ornament pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right ornament pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle ornament pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is achieved in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and on the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and a reach line suggestion performance is executed in which the reach line suggestion performance is erased (e.g., a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion performance).
After the reach state is reached, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a first transparency (e.g., first transmittance F1) until the reach line suggestion performance is executed, and after the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area is made to be transparent at a second transparency (e.g., second transmittance F2) which is less transparent than the first transparency (see FIG. 52 ).
After the reach line suggestion performance is executed, the timing at which the decoration identification information being variably displayed in the third area is set to the second transparency is the timing at which the reach line suggestion image is erased from the third area (for example, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the timing at which the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2 which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C. See Figures 50 to 52).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggesting image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and at the timing when the reach line suggesting image is erased from the third area, the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area becomes a second transparency lower than the first transparency, so that the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area does not interfere with the reach line suggesting image.

[Form 6] (No. 7)
The gaming machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A light emitting means,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the ornament identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left ornament pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right ornament pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle ornament pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is achieved in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and on the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and a reach line suggestion performance is executed in which the reach line suggestion performance is erased (e.g., a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion performance).
When executing the reach line suggestion performance, it is possible to execute an enlarged display for enlarging the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, and a separation display for separating the decorative identification information after executing the enlarged display (see FIGS. 50 to 52 ).
The second period from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period from the start to the end of the enlarged display (for example, the second period te1 from the start to the end of the distant display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1; see FIG. 52 ).
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means during the execution of the reach line suggestion performance (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changed. See Figures 50 (F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggesting image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions and the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third region, and the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second regions is enlarged and displayed for a first period, and then spaced apart for a second period longer than the first period, thereby allowing the player to recognize the decorative identification information that forms the reach state. Also, by turning off the specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggesting image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 7] (No. 8)
The gaming machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
A light emitting means,
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The area in which the ornament identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left ornament pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right ornament pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle ornament pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
When the specific display result is derived, after a ready-to-win state in which the decoration identification information of the same type is temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area, a specific combination (for example, a predetermined jackpot combination) is achieved in which the decoration identification information of the same type as the decoration identification information forming the ready-to-win state stops in the third area,
When the reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image (e.g., reach line effect display 002SG250) is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information temporarily stopped in the first area and the second area and on the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and a reach line suggestion performance is executed in which the reach line suggestion performance is erased (e.g., a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can execute the reach line suggestion performance).
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (e.g., a movable lamp 9d) disposed around the display means,
It is possible to execute a light-off control for turning off the specific light-emitting means during the execution of the reach line suggestion performance (for example, a part for turning off the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changed. See Figures 50 (F) to (H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a reach state is reached, a reach line suggestion image is displayed so as to be superimposed on the decorative identification information stopped in the first and second areas and on the decorative identification information being variably displayed in the third area, and by turning off specific light-emitting means around the display means, the reach line suggestion image can be made to stand out more.

[Form 8] (No. 9)
The gaming machine of form 8 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120);
Light emitting means (e.g., main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b),
The game control means includes:
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined operation display control for operating the decorative identification information in a predetermined operation mode is repeatedly performed over a first period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative patterns at the stop positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the low base state, the loop action of the decorative patterns is repeatedly performed until the variable display of the special patterns is completed. See Figures 23(C), 42, and 43).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped in the normal state, a predetermined light emission control is repeatedly performed to cause the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode over a second period (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative pattern at the stop position of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the low base state, the loop light emission control of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the movable body lamp 9d is repeatedly performed. See Figures 24(B), 42, and 43).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is stopped in the special state, the predetermined operation display control is not performed (for example, when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays the decorative symbols at the stop positions of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the high base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is not executed. See FIG. 44).
The second period is longer than the first period (for example, loop action period Tb3<loop light emission period Tb4. See FIG. 24A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed to encourage the player to change the display of the decorative identification information, while in the special state in which the variable display is likely to be performed, the player is prevented from being excessively encouraged to change the display, which may cause the player to feel annoyed. Also, since the predetermined action display control is repeatedly performed at a shorter cycle than the predetermined light emission control, the decorative identification information can be suitably highlighted.

[Form 9] (No. 10)
The gaming machine of form 9 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
Information regarding the variable display of special identification information that has not yet started can be stored as reserved memory information (for example, the part where the CPU 103 performs a process of storing reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the reserved memory number in the start winning determination process of step S101).
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information is constituted by a combination of the decorative identification information stopped in the effective display area (for example, a part that becomes a big win or a loss depending on a combination of decorative patterns such as "111" and "326" stopped and displayed at the stopping positions of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R).
In the normal state, when a non-specific combination, which is a combination of the decorative identification information corresponding to a non-specific display result other than the specific display result, is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information can be displayed in a manner in which it is enlarged from a normal size and then returned to the normal size according to the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, a portion in which a variable stop action can be executed when the performance control CPU 120 temporarily stops and displays a decorative pattern. See Figures 36 to 39 ).
In the special state, when the non-specific combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative identification information, when the decorative identification information is stopped in the effective display area, the decorative identification information is maintained at a normal size regardless of the number of reserved memories stored as the reserved memory information (for example, in a high base state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, when a variable display based on a shortened variable pattern is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, a variable stop action is not executed and the decorative identification information is temporarily stopped while maintaining its size. See Figures 39 and 44).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, interest is enhanced by providing variation in the movement of the decorative identification information when it stops according to the number of pending memories, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short and the decorative identification information is difficult to see, the decorative identification information is stopped while maintaining its size, so that it can be stopped without compromising its visibility.

[Form 10] (No. 11)
The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images);
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See FIG. 40 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated from the start of scrolling display to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually decreased (for example, when the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the fade-in display portion is displayed).
The execution period of the background fade-out display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-out display (for example, the fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is a portion that is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from when the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R starts until they are displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21). See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the fade-out display basically gives the impression of having disappeared more suddenly the shorter the period in which it is executed, if there is a possibility that the variable display of the decorative identification information and the background change are executed at the same time, the fade-out display of the identification information is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-out display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information.

[Form 11] (No. 12)
The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images);
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See FIG. 40 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated from the start of scrolling display to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually decreased (for example, when the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the fade-in display portion is displayed).
The execution period of the identification information fade-out display and the execution period of the background fade-out display are different (for example, a portion in which the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed at the same time. See FIG. 42 and FIG. 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-out display of the identification information with the fade-out display of the background, it is possible to prevent the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information from becoming difficult to notice.

[Form 12] (No. 13)
A gaming machine of form 12 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images);
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See FIG. 40 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated from the start of scrolling display to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually decreased (for example, when the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the fade-in display portion is displayed).
The execution period of the background fade-in display is longer than the execution period of the identification information fade-in display (for example, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is a portion that is longer than the fade-in display period B21 from when the display speed starts to decelerate in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21). See Figures 42 and 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the fade-in display basically gives the impression of appearing suddenly the shorter the period in which it is executed, if there is a possibility that the variable display of decorative identification information and the background change are executed at the same time, the fade-in display of identification information is executed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, thereby drawing attention to the end of the variable display of decorative identification information.

[Form 13] (No. 14)
The gaming machine of form 13 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In one presentation mode, a plurality of types of background images including a first background image and a second background image can be switched and displayed (for example, in the first presentation mode, a first background image 002SG081 (see FIG. 40(A1)) showing a daytime cityscape seen from afar and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see FIG. 40(A2)) showing a daytime cityscape can be switched and displayed as background images);
When the background image is switched from the first background image to the second background image, a background fade-out display is executed in which the transparency of the first background image is gradually increased and then erased, and a background fade-in display is executed in which the transparency of the second background image is gradually decreased while the background fade-out display of the first background image is being executed (for example, a portion in which a cross-fade display is executed in which a fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and a fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized. See FIG. 40 ).
When variable display of the decorative identification information is started, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which a decorative pattern is gradually accelerated from the start of scrolling display to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, causing the decorative pattern to be faded out).
When the variable display of the decorative identification information is terminated, it is possible to execute an identification information fade-in display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually decreased (for example, when the stop timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C are gradually decelerated and displayed at a low speed in that order, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, and the fade-in display portion is displayed).
The execution period of the identification information fade-in display and the execution period of the background fade-in display are different (for example, a portion where the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed at the same time. See FIG. 42 and FIG. 43).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by synchronizing the fade-in display of the identification information and the fade-in display of the background, it is possible to prevent the end of the variable display of the decoration identification information from becoming difficult to notice.

[Form 14] (No. 15)
A gaming machine of form 14 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
A specific effect can be executed in which the variable display is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "pseudo consecutive announcement" that incites whether or not the variable display will be resumed after the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the display result is derived and displayed, that is, whether or not one variable display will be made to look like multiple variable displays in a pseudo manner).
The decoration identification information has a plurality of colors (e.g., blue and red) including a number image,
When the variable display is resumed in the specific performance, a number image (e.g., pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212) capable of specifying the number of times the variable display has been resumed can be displayed in multiple colors (e.g., blue, red) (see FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 ).
In the specific performance, there are a first combination in which the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed are the same type, and the colors of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are different, and a second combination in which the number image of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number display of the number image when the variable display is resumed and both the colors of the decorative identification pattern temporarily displayed and the number image are the same type.
In the specific performance, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination (for example, in a pseudo consecutive prediction, there is a case where the display colors of the decorative pattern displayed in a provisional stop and the pseudo consecutive number display are non-identical, and a case where the display colors of the decorative pattern displayed in a provisional stop and the pseudo consecutive number display are the same, and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination in a pseudo consecutive prediction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, attention can be drawn not only to whether or not a specific effect is executed, but also to the combination of the number image of the decorative identification information temporarily displayed and the number and color of the count image if the specific effect is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[Form 15] (No. 16)
A gaming machine of form 15 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
A reduced identification information having a size smaller than that of the decorative identification information and corresponding to each of the plurality of types of decorative identification information can be variably displayed (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display of a small pattern corresponding to a decorative pattern).
When the variable display is not being executed, a waiting effect that displays a predetermined image can be executed (for example, a portion that can execute a "waiting-for-customer demo effect" when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the performance control CPU 120 received a customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command. See FIG. 46 ).
When the standby effect is being executed, the decoration identification information is hidden, while the reduced identification information is continued to be displayed (see FIG. 46 ).
When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied while the waiting performance is being performed, the variable display of the reduced identification information is started before the predetermined image is hidden, and then, after the predetermined image is hidden, the decorative identification information is displayed and the variable display is started (for example, when a start winning occurs while the customer waiting demo performance is being performed, the variable display of the small pattern is started before the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden, and then, the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and switched to the background image corresponding to the performance mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first performance mode) and displayed, and then, the decorative pattern is displayed and the scrolling display is started. See FIG. 47).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display of the decorative identification information begins after the specified image is made invisible, thereby allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has begun as a result of the conditions for starting the variable display being met, but since the variable display of the reduced identification information begins before the specified image is made invisible, it is possible to ensure a display that corresponds to the variable display of the specific identification information.

[Form 16] (No. 17)
A gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing a variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a variable display of a special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 and the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161).
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 25).
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scroll display, see FIG. 21 ) in which the decoration identification information moves, and a pre-action display (e.g., a variable start action, see FIG. 23(A) ) in which the decoration identification information operates in a manner different from the moving display before the moving display starts,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed as the active display 002SG103, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. See Figures 26 (C) to (F)).
The decoration identification information is variable displayed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of a decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 25).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making effective use of the period required for the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is being performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and it is possible to increase interest when the variable display of the decorative identification information starts in the normal state which tends to be monotonous. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 17] (No. 18)
The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing a variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a variable display of a special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 and the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161).
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 25).
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scroll display, see FIG. 21 ) in which the decoration identification information moves, and a pre-action display (e.g., a variable start action, see FIG. 23(A) ) in which the decoration identification information operates in a manner different from the moving display before the moving display starts,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the scrolling display is not started until the switching display is ended (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed as the active display 002SG103. The scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. See Figures 26 (C) to (F)).
The decoration identification information is variable displayed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of a decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).
It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 25).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and when the switching display is being performed, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decoration identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decoration identification information, so that the period required for performing the switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the moving display of the decoration identification information is not started until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decoration identification information starting before the corresponding display is displayed. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than that in the special state, and it is possible to increase the interest when the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the normal state which is likely to be monotonous. In addition, since a common switching display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, the number of patterns of the switching display can be reduced.

[Form 18] (No. 19)
The gaming machine of form 18 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing a variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a variable display of a special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 and the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161).
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 25).
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scroll display, see FIG. 21 ) in which the decoration identification information moves, and a pre-action display (e.g., a variable start action, see FIG. 23(A) ) in which the decoration identification information operates in a manner different from the moving display before the moving display starts,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends. Modified example).
The decoration identification information is variable displayed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decoration pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 25).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to a corresponding display, and while the switching display is being performed, a pre-action display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the moving display, thereby making it possible to effectively utilize the period required for performing the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-action display is performed when the switching display is being performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, it is possible to liven up the start of the variable display of the decorative identification information in the special state. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns are executed, the number of switching display patterns can be reduced.

[Form 19] (No. 20)
The gaming machine of form 19 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing a variable display of the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns (see FIG. 7) (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a variable display of a special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information that has not yet started (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the first hold display 002SG101 and the second hold display 002SG102 in the special chart hold memory display area 5U in the hold display update process of step S161).
It is possible to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information being executed in the corresponding display area (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 performs a process of displaying the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F in the pending display update process of step S161).
With the start of the variable display of the specific identification information, it is possible to perform a switching display in which the reserved display corresponding to the variable display is switched to the corresponding display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103. See FIG. 25).
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, it is possible to perform a moving display (e.g., a scroll display, see FIG. 21 ) in which the decoration identification information moves, and a pre-action display (e.g., a variable start action, see FIG. 23(A) ) in which the decoration identification information operates in a manner different from the moving display before the moving display starts,
In the special state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed, and the moving display is not started until the switching display is ended (for example, the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U is moved to the active display area 5F, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is not started until the reserved shift display period until it is switched and displayed as the active display 002SG103 ends, the above-mentioned variable start action is executed, and the scroll display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is started after the reserved shift display period ends. Modified example).
The decoration identification information is variable displayed based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 performs variable display of the decoration pattern based on a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76).

It is possible to perform the common switching display when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable display pattern information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first pending display 002SG101 or the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display 002SG103 in a common manner when the variable display is executed based on the first type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when the variable display is executed based on the second type of variable pattern designation command (for example, a reach variable pattern designation command). See FIG. 25).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display, and when the switching display is being performed, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decoration identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display of the decoration identification information, so that the period required for performing the switching display can be effectively utilized. In addition, since the moving display of the decoration identification information is not started until the switching display ends and the corresponding display is displayed in the corresponding display area, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity caused by the moving display of the decoration identification information starting before the corresponding display is displayed. In addition, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, it is possible to liven up the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the special state. In addition, since a common switching display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, the number of patterns of the switching display can be reduced.

[Form 20] (No. 21)
The gaming machine of form 20 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display can be controlled to one of a plurality of display modes (e.g., the first display mode to the fourth display mode) including the first display mode and the second display mode;
When starting the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to execute a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated from the start of scrolling display to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
In the first presentation mode, a moving display in which the decoration identification information is moved is executed as a variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 20(A1) and 20(A2)).
In the second presentation mode, a special variable display different from the moving display is executed as the variable display of the decoration identification information (see FIGS. 20(B1) and 20(B2)).
The execution period of the fade-out display when the special variable display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the execution period of the fade-out display when the moving display is executed in the first presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is executed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is executed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21<fade-out display period A22. See FIG. 45 (A) and (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second presentation mode, not only is the manner in which the decorative identification information is variable displayed differently from that in the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period from the start of the variable display to the erasure of the decorative identification information is longer, so that the decorative identification information can be focused on for a longer period of time.

[Form 21] (No. 22)
The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The display can be controlled to one of a plurality of display modes (e.g., the first display mode to the fourth display mode) including the first display mode and the second display mode;
When starting the variable display of the decorative identification information, it is possible to execute a fade-out display in which the transparency of the decorative identification information is gradually increased and then the decorative identification information is erased (for example, a portion in which the decorative pattern is gradually accelerated from the start of scrolling display to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed, and the decorative pattern is faded out).
The variable display pattern of the decoration identification information can be determined to be any one of a plurality of types of variable display patterns,
The execution period of the fade-out display is different between the case where the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the first presentation mode and the case where the predetermined variable display pattern is determined in the second presentation mode (for example, the fade-out display periods A21 and A22 are different between the case where the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and the case where the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. See FIG. 45 (A) (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the predetermined variable display pattern is determined, the fade-out execution period differs between when the display is controlled in the first presentation mode and when the display is controlled in the second presentation mode, making it difficult for the player to predict that the predetermined variable display pattern is determined, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game.

[Form 22] (No. 23)
The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means executes the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
The performance control means is capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of a decorative pattern in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) which is information related to the character of the character image,
The variable display period includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display start condition is satisfied until the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed, and a post-variable display period after the decorative identification information starts to be variable displayed (for example, the variable display period of the special pattern includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special pattern and the small pattern starts until the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts).
the character image is displayed in the pre-variable-display period and the post-variable-display period,
The related information image is erased before the start of the post-variable display period after being displayed in the pre-variable display period (for example, the name of the character (character related information) displayed in the information display unit 002SG053 is erased before the start of the post-variable display period, that is, before the start of the scroll display of the decorative pattern, after being displayed during the pre-variable display period, that is, when the variable start action is being executed. See FIG. 23(A) and FIG. 26).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by drawing attention to the related information image before the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information, i.e., while the image is still displayed, the player can deepen his/her understanding of the character. Also, by erasing the related information image before the start of the variable display, the player can draw attention to the variable display, preview effects, etc., rather than the related information image.

[Form 23] (No. 24)
The gaming machine of form 23 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
In the normal state, the display can be controlled to one of a plurality of display modes including a first display mode (e.g., the first display mode) and a second display mode (e.g., the second display mode) (e.g., the first display mode to the fourth display mode. See FIG. 20 );
In the special state, the display mode can be controlled to a third display mode (e.g., a third display mode or a fourth display mode),
The ornament identification information includes a character image (e.g., a character display section 002SG052) and a related information image (e.g., an information display section 002SG053) which is information related to the character of the character image,
In the first presentation mode, the decoration identification information is displayed in a form including the character image and the related information image (see FIG. 26 );
In the second and third presentation modes, the decoration identification information is displayed without including the related information image (see FIGS. 28, 29, and 33).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the first presentation mode, the related information image is displayed to draw the player's attention to the related information image, thereby enabling the player to deepen his/her understanding of the character, while in the second and third presentation modes, the related information image is erased, allowing the player to focus more on the variable display and preview presentations rather than the related information image.

[Form 24] (No. 25)
The gaming machine of form 24 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (e.g., a special pattern) and deriving a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot display result) as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103);
A performance control means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120),
The game control means includes:
Executing the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol process processing of step S25),
It is possible to control the state into a normal state (e.g., a low-probability, low-base state) and a special state (e.g., a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state and in which the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of multiple types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes variable display of decorative patterns in the performance control process processing of step S76),
The ornament identification information includes a number image (e.g., a number display unit 002SG061),
When the normal background image is displayed, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute an SP reach effect that notifies whether or not a jackpot will be hit),
In the notification performance, a specific background image (for example, a fifth background image 002SG085) different from the normal background image is displayed,
When the notification effect is executed in a variable display in which the specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed when the specific background image is displayed in the notification effect (for example, in a SP reach effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that determine a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 53(F)),
With the end of the notification effect, the specific background image is erased and the normal background image is displayed, and while the normal background image is displayed, a combination of decorative identification information corresponding to the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 53(G), with the end of the SP reach effect, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols for determining a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed).
A specific image (e.g., specific image 002SG075) is operationally displayed adjacent to the number image of the combination of decoration identification information corresponding to the specific display result displayed when the normal background image is displayed;
In the special state, the specific image is not displayed (for example, in the low base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmation decorative pattern displayed after the end of the SP reach performance (see FIG. 53 (H) and (I)), whereas in the high base state, the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is not displayed in the number display section 002SG051 of the combination of the jackpot confirmation decorative pattern displayed after the end of the SP reach performance (see FIG. 54 (P) and (S))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the effect of the presentation is enhanced and livened up by displaying a specific image in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, a sense of speed can be imparted to the variable display by not displaying a specific image in motion relative to the number image of the decorative identification information displayed after the end of the notification presentation.

[Form 25] (No. 18-2)
A gaming machine of aspect 25 is the gaming machine of aspect 17 or aspect 18,
The performance control means includes:
When the corresponding display (e.g., active display 002SG103) corresponding to the variable display displayed in the corresponding display area (e.g., active display area 5F) is erased based on the completion of the variable display of the specific identification information, an erase effect display (e.g., erase effect 002SG110) can be displayed to emphasize that the corresponding display has been erased,
If the hold display is being displayed when the erase effect display is displayed, the erase effect display continues to be displayed until a variable display corresponding to the hold display starts (for example, the erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased when the next variable display corresponding to the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, as shown below. See FIG. 25 (B3)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of a variable display and the start of the next variable display, it is possible to prevent the interest of the presentation from declining. Also, the erasure effect display allows the player to recognize that the corresponding display corresponding to the ended variable display has been erased, while the display of a new corresponding display allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has started.

[Form 26] (No. 18-3)
A gaming machine according to a twenty-sixth aspect is the gaming machine according to the seventeenth or eighteenth aspect,
The area in which the ornament identification information is displayed includes a first area (e.g., a left ornament pattern display area 5L), a second area (e.g., a right ornament pattern display area 5R), and a third area (e.g., a middle ornament pattern display area 5C) located between the first area and the second area,
In the normal state, the decoration identification information is displayed in a smaller size in the third area than in the first area and the second area (see, for example, FIG. 19 );
In the special state, the decoration identification information in the first area, the second area, and the third area is displayed in the same size (see, for example, FIG. 19 );
The third area in the special state is disposed closer to the center of the display area of the display means than the third area in the normal state (see, for example, FIG. 19 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the normal state, the decorative identification information in the first and second regions is made to appear larger, and the decorative identification information in the third region is shifted to create a sense of depth and enhance interest, while in the special state in which the average variable display period is short, the decorative identification information is positioned closer to the center of the display region, thereby enhancing the degree to which the decorative identification information can be recognized.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

Next, an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following, the near side of FIG. 1 is the front (front face, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the far side is the rear (rear face, back) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the surface facing the player playing with the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, in the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated to "S1" or "002SGS1", "Normal reach" may be abbreviated to "N reach", and "Super reach" may be abbreviated to "SP reach".

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided at the top left of the display screen of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern, and the small pattern is displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the reserved display, the small symbol, the error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the right-hit notification image 002SG201 (see FIG. 20) that prompts the player to perform a right-hit operation, and the remaining time-saving display 002SG202 (see FIG. 20) indicating the number of remaining time-saving turns are displayed in front of the performance images such as characters (higher layer), thereby preventing the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the small symbol, and the error display, while the decorative symbol may be displayed behind the performance images (lower layer), thereby preventing the decorative symbol from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The small pattern is also called the fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is displayed variably by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 as a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are variably displayed. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being variably displayed even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when the performance content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or when the movable bodies 32A and 32B cover all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Also, the performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command.

The pattern displayed on the fourth pattern display device provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (such as the special variable winning ball device 7 at a specified location on the game board 2), such as the first special pattern LED or the second special pattern LED, is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there are provided display areas (special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying reserved displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. The reserved displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to variable displays. In this embodiment, a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided, but a first special pattern reserved memory display area in which a first reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special pattern is pending is displayed, and a second special pattern reserved memory display area in which a second reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special pattern is pending may be provided separately.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric device having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in the upright position, so that the second start winning port is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning port being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in a tilted position, so that the second start winning port is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning port being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning port, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), movable bodies 32A and 32B that operate according to the presentation are provided. In addition, movable body lamps 9d are provided on movable bodies 32A and 32B. The movable body lamps 9d and the aforementioned main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, and attacca lamps 9c may be collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. The main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacca lamps 9c, and movable body lamps 9d are each composed of an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss".

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on and off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable bodies 32A and 32B, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

In addition, since the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer has the concept of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

The VRAM area contains a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images on layer 1, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images on layer 2, and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging images on layer 3. The VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images, and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is an area where an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (composite) to create a displacement target image, and where a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area is an area in which an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, an image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, or an image obtained by superimposing (compositing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area, is created as a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

The image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is set as the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) on the image display device 5, the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is set as the image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area on the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area is set as the image with the lowest display priority (display priority: low) on the image display device 5. In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is a middle layer with a lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a first interface image including a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U that identifiably displays the first special pattern reserved memory count and the second special pattern reserved memory count at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second interface image including a small pattern with a smaller display area than the decorative pattern and a reserved memory count display at the top left of the display area of the image display device 5 are drawn to display these images.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 where the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which the background image is drawn to display the background image across the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), the image drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and the image drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area (layer 3 image). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) are set to the highest display priority, and are therefore displayed as the topmost image in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area (decorative design) is set to a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, and is displayed as the middle image in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area (background image) is set to the lowest display priority, and is therefore displayed as the lower image in the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently in the display area of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable bodies 32A, 32B to the movable bodies 32A, 32B or to the drive circuit that drives the movable bodies 32A, 32B.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamps (such as supplying sound designation signals and lamp signals), and control of the movable bodies 32A and 32B (such as supplying signals to operate the movable bodies 32A and 32B) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 3 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 3(B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 3B, in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change of the decorative pattern in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and probability variable control are both performed (high probability high base state, time-saving with probability variable state). In addition, the time-saving high probability state may simply be called the "high probability state."

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "0" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 3(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 4, on the main board 11 side, numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the change pattern is a random number value used to determine the change pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "0" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 5 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 6(B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", and "Probable variable jackpot C", in which after the jackpot game state ends, probable variable control and time-saving control are executed to transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "non-probable variable jackpot", in which after the jackpot game state ends, only time-saving control is executed to transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The variable probability control and time-saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A to the variable probability jackpot C are ended on the condition that the state is controlled to the jackpot game state. In addition, the time-saving control that is started after the end of the non-variable probability jackpot game state is ended on the condition that 100 variable displays are ended, or that the state is controlled to the jackpot game state before the 100 variable displays are ended. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is any of the variable probability jackpot A to the variable probability jackpot C, the variable probability control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot game state ends, so that the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is called a consecutive state. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays unless the variable display result becomes a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, while when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A", which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 7 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, one normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, three types of fluctuation patterns are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns: super reach (no pseudo consecutive hits), super reach (one pseudo consecutive hit), and super reach (two pseudo consecutive hits), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types or two or less types of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided.

In the present embodiment, the super reach variation patterns are as follows: a variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo consecutive hits) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2) and a variation pattern for miss (PA2-2); a variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo consecutive hit) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-3) and a variation pattern for miss (PA2-3); and a variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo consecutive hits) in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-4) and a variation pattern for miss (PA2-4).

As shown in FIG. 7, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the variable display result is a non-variable jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

In addition, if the variable display result is a sure-win A to C, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach (two pseudo consecutive performances) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%.

Also, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is one or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern without shortening), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Also, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B. More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Also, when the game state is a low base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C. More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 is determined at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 is determined at a rate of 2%.

Also, when the game state is a high base state (time-saving state or probability-changing state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo consecutive performance) miss fluctuation pattern). More specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 80% of the time, PA2-1 is determined 10% of the time, PA2-2 is determined 5% of the time, PA2-3 is determined 3% of the time, and PA2-4 is determined 2% of the time.

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined according to the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The selection ratio of one of the multiple jackpot variable patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied according to the game state, for example, regardless of the jackpot type. In this way, the variable display is performed with a variable pattern suitable for the game state, which can increase the interest in the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 002SG150 as shown in FIG. 9 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 002SG150 shown in FIG. 9 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 002SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 002SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 002SG151C, a game control flag setting section 002SG152, a game control timer setting section 002SG153, a game control counter setting section 002SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 002SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151A stores the reserved data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, in which a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151B stores the reserved data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, in which a start winning (second start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, but which have not yet started.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151A associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the first start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 002SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of winning, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 002SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 002SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart or a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display results (special chart display results) in these special chart games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port are stored in separate reserved memory units in association with the reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 002SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they were detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 002SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 002SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 002SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 002SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 002SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores not only a performance control program, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to make various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, and the like.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is variable displayed, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 is provided with a performance control data holding area 002SG190 as shown in Figure 10 (A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 002SG190 shown in Figure 10 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 002SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 002SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 002SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 002SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 002SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 002SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A as shown in FIG. 10 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 002SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. The start winning time receiving command buffer 002SG194A also has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, two commands, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win is made in the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A, and when a start win is made in the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 002SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "0" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory or the second special chart reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A shown in FIG. 10(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that was just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 10(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (Step S3; Yes), recovery processing (Step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (Step S8). The recovery processing in Step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was fluctuating, it is sufficient if the fluctuating special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, the process enters into a loop. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 12. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 12.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for opening the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
14 is a flow chart showing the start winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. 13. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (002SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (002SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (002SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts in 002SGS102 is not the upper limit (002SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "0" (002SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 002SGS101 (002SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 002SGS102 (002SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start entry port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (002SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (002SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (002SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154. When the second reserved memory count in 002SGS105 is not the upper limit value (002SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 002SG155 is set to "2" (002SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of 002SGS103 and 002SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (002SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (002SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 002SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 002SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 002SG154 (002SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the random numbers extracted in this way and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserved information at the top of the empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit (002SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 002SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 002SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (002SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 12.

Following the processing of 002SGS111, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending the pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (002SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

After executing the process of 002SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (002SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is advanced to. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 002SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (002SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

(Special pattern normal processing)
Fig. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Fig. 13 as the normal special symbol process. In the normal special symbol process shown in Fig. 15, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory number is "0" or not (step 002SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 002SGS141, it is sufficient to read the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; N), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out as reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" (step 002SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 002SGS143).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 002SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 002SGS141 (step 002SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 002SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 002SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 002SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 002SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

In addition, the special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 002SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 002SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 002SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 002SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 002SGS149.

In step 002SGS149, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 5 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 002SGS150). In addition, in this step 002SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability of a jackpot is off and the game is in a low probability state (this feature is in a low probability, low base state), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result judgment table selected in step 002SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, so in the processing of step 002SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, different judgment data (judgment values) are used to determine whether the special game display result is a "jackpot", so that when the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is judged (determined) with a higher probability than when the game state is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 002SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 002SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 002SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 6(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 002SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot type the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 002SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of step 002SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as a variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is to be controlled to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability high base state) which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, for example, the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit, is set (step 002SGS155), and the determined jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, it is set to "2", and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, it is set to "3". After processing step 002SGS155, proceed to step 002SGS156.

Also, if step 002SGS150 determines that the result is a miss (step 002SGS150; N), step 002SGS156 is executed without executing steps 002SGS152 to 002SGS155.

In step 002SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in response to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determined jackpot type in the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being a "miss", a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 002SGS150a, if the jackpot type in step 002SGS154 is "high probability jackpot A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "high probability jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 002SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 002SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 002SGS145 (step 002SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 002SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 16. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 16 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, the operation of displaying the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the operation of outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the operation of lighting the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the operation of driving the movable bodies 32A and 32B are controlled. In addition, the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices are judged, determined, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random number value update processing (step S77), a demo performance control processing (step S78) for executing a demo performance on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a background display update processing (step S79) for updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to another background image, and a menu display processing (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. Then, the processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

In the background display update process of this embodiment, one of the first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode, the second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, the third background image corresponding to the third presentation mode, and the fourth background image corresponding to the fourth presentation mode is selected and displayed. The first and second background images can be displayed when the game state is in a normal state, the third background image can be displayed when the game state is in a low probability high base state, and the fourth background image can be displayed when the game state is in a high probability high base state. In addition, the first and second background images are switched when a switching display condition is met, for example, when a variable display of SP Reach Hare is executed or when one of the background images is continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes a process for adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and a process for adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command until the customer waiting demo performance starts, and may start the customer waiting demo performance based on the timer expiring without the variable display starting. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 16 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 17, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a reservation display update process (step S161) to perform a shift display, which will be described later, to update the reservation memory display (first reservation display 002SG101 or second reservation display 002SG102) in the special chart reservation memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display according to the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 002SG194A. After the reservation display update process is executed, one of the following steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed according to the value of the performance process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

In addition, in step S161, a pre-reading preview setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process, in which judgments, decisions, and settings are made to execute a pre-reading preview performance (such as a performance that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable bodies 32A and 32B, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the performance control CPU 120 will be described. Figure 18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 17. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on or not (step 002SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS271; Y), for example, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 002SGS272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

In addition, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 002SGS271 (step 002SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 002SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 002SGS273; Y), for example, the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number at a time (step 002SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

After executing step 002SGS272 or step 002SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 002SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) and the variation pattern (step 002SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command to the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B to the probability variable jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns in which three patterns are aligned to an even number as the stopping pattern.

When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-variable jackpot, similar to the case where the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command to the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the variable jackpot B to the variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol may be determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In this case, by further making the presentation during the jackpot game or the variable display in the variable jackpot state more common, the player can be drawn to whether the game state is in the variable jackpot state or the time-saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times, and further whether the time-saving state will end with 100 variable displays or continue until 10,000 variable displays, thereby improving the interest.

If the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, a combination of decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned (miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern. If the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a reach-miss combination (miss pattern) in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different is determined as the stopping pattern.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach with pseudo consecutive wins (fluctuation patterns PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) (step 002SGS277). If the fluctuation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is not a fluctuation pattern designation command for a super reach, that is, if it is a fluctuation pattern designation command for a normal reach (step 002SGS278; N), the process proceeds to step 002SGS383.

If the variation pattern designation command read out in step 002SGS275 is a variation pattern designation command for a super reach, the display color of the stopped patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5C that form the reach state is specified from the data indicating the stopped patterns of the decorative patterns determined in step 002SGS276 and stored in the decorative pattern display result storage area. Then, using the pseudo consecutive number of times display determination table shown in FIG. 49 (C), the display color of the pseudo consecutive number of times display displayed when the first re-variable display is started, that is, the pseudo consecutive number of times display (e.g., "x2") indicating that two variable displays, including the first variable display, will be started in the variable display, is determined and stored (step 002SGS278).

Next, it is determined whether the variation pattern designation command read in step 002SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279). If it is determined that it is a super reach variation pattern with two pseudo consecutive wins (step 002SGS279; Y), the pseudo consecutive win count display determination table shown in FIG. 49 (C) is used to determine and store the display color of the pseudo consecutive win count display to be displayed when the second re-variable display is started, that is, the pseudo consecutive win count display (e.g., "x3") indicating that three variable displays, including the first variable display, will be started in the variable display (step 002SGS280).

If it is determined in step 002SGS279 that the variation pattern is not two pseudo consecutive wins, or if the processing of step 002SGS280 is executed, a start waiting timer is set to start the pseudo consecutive win count display (step 002SGS281), and the process proceeds to step 002SGS282.

Next, in step 002SGS282, a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected (step 002SGS282), and the process timer is started (step 002SGS283).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 002SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 002SGS285). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 002SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns and small patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns and small patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 002SGS287), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Decorative designs and small designs)
Next, the decorative pattern and the small pattern will be described based on Figs. 19 to 22. Fig. 19 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern and the small pattern. Fig. 20 is a diagram showing the state of the first presentation mode (A1) (A2), the second presentation mode (B1) (B2), the third presentation mode (C1) (C2), and the fourth presentation mode (D1) (D2). Fig. 21 is a diagram showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the first presentation mode (A1) (A2), and the second presentation mode (B1) (B2). Fig. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between the variable display area and the decorative pattern in the third presentation mode (C1) (C2), and the fourth presentation mode (D1) (D2), and (E) is a diagram for explaining the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern and the small pattern.

In addition, in FIG. 19, the sizes of the decorative pattern (for low base state), decorative pattern (for high base state), and small pattern are displayed at the ratio when displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and display area 5S.

As shown in FIG. 19, the decorative patterns (for low base state) displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display section 002SG051 consisting of a circular number base section when viewed from the front and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section, a character display section 002SG052 displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display section 002SG051, an information display section 002SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base section when viewed from the front and information about the character (for example, in this embodiment, the name of the character) displayed on the front of the information base section, and a roughly rectangular base display section 002SG054 displayed so as to surround the periphery of the number display section 002SG051, the character display section 002SG052, and the information display section 002SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 002SG053 shows the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various information other than the name (such as the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed as long as it is information about the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052.

The decorative patterns (for high base state) displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the high base state are composed of a number display section 002SG061 consisting of the numbers "0" to "9", and a roughly rectangular base display section 002SG064 displayed surrounding the number display section 002SG061. The decorative patterns for the high base state do not have a character display section or information display section like the decorative patterns for the low base state.

In addition, the display area 5S provided in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern. The small pattern consists of numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but it is not necessary that all the numbers of both patterns correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern may be numbers "1" to "5", which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" of the decorative pattern, or may be symbols or figures different from the numbers of the decorative pattern.

Next, we will explain the decorative patterns (for low base state), decorative patterns (for high base state), and small patterns.

<Display time of each pattern> The decorative patterns (for low base state) and decorative patterns (for high base state) are almost always displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R while the image display device 5 is powered on, but may be erased (not displayed) when, for example, an SP reach performance (super reach performance) is executed during variable display, or when a customer waiting demo performance is executed. On the other hand, the small patterns are always displayed in front of the decorative patterns (higher layer) while the image display device 5 is powered on, and continue to be displayed even when the decorative patterns are erased as described above. Furthermore, they may be erased when information with a higher display priority than the small patterns (for example, an error display) is displayed.

<Variable display mode of each symbol> In the first performance mode described below, the decorative symbols (for low base state) are variably displayed by a scroll display that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and in the second performance mode, the decorative symbols are variably displayed by a scroll display that moves curvedly from the back to the front across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the third presentation mode described below, the decorative symbols (for the high base state) are displayed variably in a rotating display that rotates around an axis of rotation facing the up and down direction in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and in the fourth presentation mode, the decorative symbols are displayed variably in a scrolling display that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Regardless of the game state or presentation mode, the small symbols are displayed variably in a switching display (updating display in which the symbols are updated) in which symbols "0" to "9" are switched in each small symbol display area 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR.

The above-mentioned "scroll display" and "switching display" are both included in the "switching display" in which patterns are switched in a broad sense, but as described below, a "scrolling display" may be defined as a display in which a pattern is framed in or faded in to the display area, and then framed out or faded out from the display area, thereby updating and displaying multiple patterns, while a "switching display" may be defined as a display in which multiple patterns are updated and displayed by repeatedly displaying and not displaying (erasing) or rotating, etc., at a specified position in the display area, without moving, fading in, or fading out.

<Number display section> The decorative pattern (for low base state) and the decorative pattern (for high base state) have not only the number display section 002SG051, 002SG061, but also the character display section 002SG052, the information display section 002SG053 and the base display section 002SG054, whereas the small pattern is composed only of the number display section.

In addition, the decorative patterns (for low base state) are displayed at the same size in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and are displayed at a size slightly smaller in the center decorative pattern display area 5C than in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, creating a sense of depth. On the other hand, the decorative patterns (for high base state) are displayed at the same size in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, and are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. The small patterns are displayed at the same size in each small pattern display area 5SL, 5SC, 5SR.

In addition, in the low base state, the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are arranged approximately horizontally at approximately the center position in the vertical direction of the image display device 5, but the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is arranged slightly above the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, so it is arranged slightly above the approximately center position in the vertical direction of the image display device 5, while in the high base state, each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R is arranged approximately horizontally at approximately the center position in the vertical direction of the image display device 5. Therefore, the decorative pattern displayed at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the high base state is arranged closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 than the decorative pattern displayed at the stop position of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C in the low base state (see FIG. 20).

In addition, when the size of the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as a standard, the size of the number display section 002SG061 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is large, and the size of the number display section of the small pattern is small. In other words, the size of the number display section is larger in the order of decorative pattern (for high base state), decorative pattern (for low base state), and small pattern (size of number display section: decorative pattern (for high base state) > decorative pattern (for low base state) > small pattern). In addition, the overall size of each pattern is also in the same relationship as the number display section.

In this way, in the low base state, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are made to look larger, and the decorative pattern in the center decorative pattern display area 5C is shifted to create a sense of depth and increase interest, while in the high base state, where the average variable display period is short, the decorative patterns are positioned closer to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, increasing the degree of recognition of the decorative patterns (see Figure 20).

The decorative pattern (for low base state), the decorative pattern (for high base state), and the number display part of the small pattern are each formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). A stereoscopic image is, for example, an image created by 3DCG (a virtual solid is constructed (modeled) with points placed on a three-dimensional coordinate system as vertices, information that reproduces the material, etc. is given to each surface, and an object is reproduced by illuminating it from an arbitrary light intensity, light source position, etc.), but it may also be an image that can be viewed stereoscopically by displaying it on a three-dimensional display device (for example, an image liquid crystal panel that can display a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of an image for the right eye (R image) and an image for the left eye (L image), a backlight that irradiates planar light from the rear to the front of the image liquid crystal panel, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel that is provided on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel at a predetermined distance from the image liquid crystal panel).

Of the numbers "0" through "9" in the decorative symbols, the odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, and 9" are probability variable symbols corresponding to a "probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a high probability, high base state after the jackpot ends, while the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, and 8" are normal symbols (non-probability variable symbols) corresponding to a "non-probability variable jackpot" that is controlled to a low probability, high base state after the jackpot ends. Note that even in the case of a probability variable jackpot, the normal symbols may be configured to produce a predetermined jackpot combination.

<Character display section> The character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed with a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). The character display section 002SG052 may also be formed with a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, the character displayed on the character display section 002SG052 is configured to perform a predetermined action (movement) when the variable display starts or stops, as described below. On the other hand, the decorative pattern (for high base state) and the small pattern do not have a character display section.

<Information display section> The information display section 002SG053 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is formed of a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). The information display section 002SG053 may be formed of a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). The information display section 002SG053 also displays "name", which is information about the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052, and as described below, the "name" is erased when variable display begins. On the other hand, no information display section is provided for the decorative pattern (for high base state) and the small pattern.

<Pedestal display section> The pedestal display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) has a decorative section that decorates the character displayed on the front, and is formed as a non-stereoscopic image (2D image, two-dimensional image). The pedestal display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is formed as a stereoscopic image (3D image, three-dimensional image). Both the pedestal display section 002SG054 and the pedestal display section 002SG064 may be formed as stereoscopic images (3D image, three-dimensional image). Furthermore, when the size of the pedestal display section 002SG054 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) is used as a standard, the size of the pedestal display section 002SG064 of the decorative pattern (for high base state) is large. On the other hand, no pedestal display section is provided for the small pattern.

<Main color> The color of the numbers displayed on the number display parts 002SG051 and 002SG061 of the decorative pattern (for low base state) and decorative pattern (for high base state) is "blue" for normal patterns consisting of even numbers, and "red" for special patterns consisting of odd numbers. Note that the number base parts other than numbers and the base display parts 002SG054 and 002SG064 may be displayed in the same color as the numbers or in a different color than the numbers.

The characters displayed in the character display section 002SG052 may be configured with their own original color without being influenced by the main color. Also, the character corresponding to the probability variation pattern is preferably an ally character, for example, when there are ally characters and enemy characters. Alternatively, it is preferable that the ally character be a central character in the story, such as the protagonist in the story or a character who has a close relationship with the protagonist.

As mentioned above, when the story concept of allies and enemies is applied, the preview and SP reach effects are basically presented from the perspective of the allies, and if the SP reach effect is structured as an allies and enemies fighting, the player is notified that a favorable state (such as a jackpot) will occur if the allies win against the enemies and the outcome is favorable for the allies.

In addition, the main color with the highest occupancy rate in the entire area of each of the decorative patterns (for low base state) and the decorative patterns (for high base state) may be composed of the same color as the numbers. Also, although the color "blue" was used for the normal patterns consisting of even numbers and "red" for the special patterns consisting of odd numbers, they may be other colors.

In addition, in a high base state, as described below, the scrolling display is performed at high speed, so it is necessary to make the design more visible and appealing than the decorative design (for a low base state), and stop design announcements and announcements of when the fluctuation will start are often performed by incorporating effect displays into the decorative design. As a result, the decorative design (for a high base state) is mainly composed of the number display section 002SG061, and is characterized by a larger size ratio of the design than the decorative design (for a low base state) which is composed of a character display section and a number display section.

Although not shown in the present embodiment, the numbers in the decorative pattern (for the high base state) may be made more flashy in appearance, such as by making the operation more complex or by making the design more sophisticated, compared to the numbers in the decorative pattern (for the low base state), in order to enhance the high base state.

On the other hand, the color of the numbers in the small symbols is "yellow" for normal symbols consisting of even numbers, and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. In this embodiment, the colors are "yellow" for normal symbols consisting of even numbers, and "yellow-green" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers, but they may be other colors. Also, numbers that are the same as the decorative symbols may be the same color as the decorative symbols.

The design of the small symbols may be a reduced version of the material of the numbers in the decorative symbols in the low base state and high base state, but rather than enhancing the presentation effect through design, it is preferable that the design be simpler than the numbers in the decorative symbols (for example, flat rather than three-dimensional, and with a simple color that is not glossy) in order to improve visibility for the player.

As shown in FIG. 20, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute any one of the following presentation modes: the first presentation mode (see FIG. 20 (A1) (A2)), the second presentation mode (see FIG. 20 (B1) (B2)), the third presentation mode (see FIG. 20 (C1) (C2)), and the fourth presentation mode (see FIG. 20 (D1) (D2)). The first presentation mode and the second presentation mode are presentation modes that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, low-base state. The third presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low-probability, high-base state, and the fourth presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a high-probability, high-base state.

As shown in FIG. 20 (A1), in the first presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a first background image 002SG081 depicting a daytime cityscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 20 (A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scroll display (first scroll display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

21 (A1) and (A2), each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame-in manner downward from the top of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, then moves linearly downward and is displayed in a frame-out manner downward from the bottom of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in a frame (e.g., the decorative pattern "3") passes the stopping position for the decorative pattern set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the succeeding decorative pattern (e.g., the decorative pattern "4") is displayed in a frame-in manner and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2), when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stopping position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the trailing "4" decorative pattern are not visible, but after the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stopping position, the leading "3" decorative pattern and the trailing "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in number in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and the updated display of "0" to "9" is repeated. In other words, the decorative patterns are scrolled by displaying the decorative patterns of "0" to "9" in a loop in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

The display area 5S located in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, and the small symbol, while the special pending memory display area 5U and active display area 5F located in the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 display the first pending display 002SG101 and the second pending display 002SG102 corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that is being executed. Note that the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, the small symbol, the special pending memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common to all performance modes, so their explanation will be omitted below.

As shown in FIG. 20 (B1), in the second presentation mode, decorative symbols for a low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a second background image 002SG082 depicting a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as a background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 20 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed using a scroll display (second scroll display) that moves in a curved shape from the back to the front of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In more detail, as shown in Figures 21 (B1) and (B2), the left and right decorative patterns are displayed as frame-in from the upper left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the upper right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R, moving toward the center of the screen, then moving downward and away from the left and right sides of the screen, and are displayed as frame-out from the lower left side of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the lower right side of the right decorative pattern display area 5R toward the side, as shown. The center decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed as it moves from the back of the screen to the front of the center decorative pattern display area 5C, and then is displayed as frame-out.

Also, when the leading decorative pattern (e.g., the "2" decorative pattern) displayed in the frame passes the stop position of the decorative pattern set at the vertical center position of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the following decorative pattern (e.g., the "3" decorative pattern) is displayed in the frame and moves toward the center of the screen. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (B2), when the leading "2" decorative pattern passes near the stop position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "3" decorative pattern are visible, but after the leading "2" decorative pattern passes the stop position, the following "3" decorative pattern and the "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in number in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., and after "9", it returns to "0" and the update display from "0" to "9" is repeated. In other words, the decorative symbols "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, resulting in a scrolling display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in FIG. 20 (C1), in the third performance mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a third background image 002SG083 depicting an evening cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 20 (C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R by a rotational display that rotates around an axis of rotation that faces in the vertical direction.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 22 (C1) (C2), the decorative pattern in the third performance mode has a first surface 5a and a second surface 5b, which is the opposite surface of the first surface 5a, and the preceding decorative pattern (for example, the decorative pattern of "3") is displayed on the first surface 5a. On the other hand, when the first surface 5a faces the front, it is not possible to determine whether the succeeding decorative pattern (for example, the decorative pattern of "4") is displayed on the second surface 5b. In other words, since the base display unit 002SG064 has low transmittance (opaque), the decorative pattern displayed on the second surface 5b cannot be seen through from the front side (visible from the front side through the decorative pattern).

The decorative patterns can also be rotated in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from above), and as they rotate from first surface 5a to second surface 5b to first surface 5a to second surface 5b, the numbers increase in the order of "0", "1", "2", "3", etc., returning to "0" after "9", and then repeatedly updating the display from "0" to "9". In other words, the decorative patterns are displayed in a loop of "0" to "9" in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, thereby rotating the decorative patterns.

As shown in FIG. 22(C2), when the first surface 5a is rotated by about 90 degrees or more from a state in which it faces the front and the second surface 5b is displayed, the second surface 5b displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "4") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "3") displayed on the first surface 5a. Next, although not shown in particular, when the second surface 5b is rotated by about 90 degrees or more from a state in which it faces the front and the first surface 5a is displayed, the first surface 5a displays a decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "5") subsequent to the decorative pattern (e.g., a decorative pattern of a "4") displayed on the second surface 5b.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and a time-saving remaining display 002SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining", where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving control will be executed is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 20 (D1), in the fourth presentation mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and a fourth background image 002SG084 depicting a nighttime cityscape is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. Also, as shown in FIG. 20 (C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed using a scroll display (third scroll display) that moves linearly from top to bottom in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

22 (D1) (D2), each decorative pattern is displayed in a frame-in manner downward from the top of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, then moves linearly downward and is displayed in a frame-out manner downward from the bottom of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Also, when the preceding decorative pattern displayed in a frame (e.g., the decorative pattern "3") passes the stopping position for the decorative pattern set in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the succeeding decorative pattern (e.g., the decorative pattern "4") is displayed in a frame-in manner and moves downward. That is, as shown in FIG. 22 (D1), when the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stopping position, the leading "2" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern are not visible, but as shown in FIG. 22 (D2), after the leading "3" decorative pattern passes the stopping position, the leading "3" decorative pattern and the following "4" decorative pattern become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in number from "0", "1", "2", "3", ... and return to "0" after "9", and the increase from "0" to "9" is repeated. In other words, the decorative patterns are scrolled by displaying the "0" to "9" decorative patterns in a loop in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In addition, a right-hit notification image 002SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "right hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to perform a right-hit operation.

In the second presentation mode, the name in the information display section 002SG053 of the decorative symbol is always hidden even when the decorative symbol is stopped. In the third and fourth presentation modes, the decorative symbol is variable displayed without including the information display section 002SG053. In this way, in the first presentation mode, the information display section 002SG053 is displayed to draw attention to the character's name, allowing the player to deepen their understanding of the character, while in the second and third presentation modes, the information display section 002SG053 is hidden to draw attention to the variable display and preview presentation, etc., rather than the character. Note that not only the name displayed in the information display section 002SG053, but also the information display section 002SG053 itself may be hidden.

As shown in FIG. 22(E), the decorative patterns and small patterns have different variable display modes. For example, during a period in which the decorative patterns are scrolled at high speed, one decorative pattern is framed-in from the top edge of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and requires a passing period Ta2 before it is framed-out from the bottom edge. In other words, a period Ta2 is required from when one decorative pattern is displayed until the decorative pattern display is finished. Meanwhile, during the period Ta2, the small patterns of the losing combination are switched (updated) multiple times (e.g., five times) and displayed.

In more detail, if the frame rate (screen display speed) is set to 30 FPS (30 frames (frames) of images are displayed per second), 10 frames of images are displayed from the start of the display of one decorative pattern to the end of that display, and this period Ta2 is set to approximately 0.3 seconds.

Meanwhile, the small symbols of different losing combinations (for example, "635", "175", "461", "532", "913", etc.) are displayed every two frames (period Ta1). In other words, during the period Ta2 from when one decorative symbol is displayed until the decorative symbol display ends, the small symbols of losing combinations are switched five times, each displayed for the period Ta1 (period Ta1 < period Ta2). Note that although the small symbols of each losing combination are displayed for the period Ta1, this is only for a split second (approximately 0.06 seconds), making it difficult to see with the naked eye.

Furthermore, if the CPU 120 for controlling the performance decides to stop displaying the fixed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326") based on the determination that the display result of the variable display will be a losing display result, then after starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, and before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative pattern of the losing combination (e.g., "326"), a switching display is performed so that the small pattern of the losing combination "326" that is the same as the decorative pattern is not displayed. This prevents the small pattern of the losing combination from revealing in advance that the decorative pattern of the losing combination will be stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the first, second and fourth presentation modes, and in the rotating display in the third presentation mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts, and changes from high to low when the variable display stops; in other words, the variable display speed is variable, whereas the small patterns are variably displayed at a constant speed from when the variable display starts until it stops.

(Various actions of decorative patterns)
Next, various action displays of the decorative symbols will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 is a diagram showing (A) a variation start action of the decorative symbols, (B) a variation stop action, and (C) a loop action.

As shown in Figures 23(A) to 23(C), the decorative symbols for the low base state move within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and rotate within the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, to perform variable display, but apart from such variable display movements, various actions (operations) can be performed to change the number display portion 002SG051 and character display portion 002SG052 of the decorative symbols.

(Change start action)
As shown in FIG. 23(A), when the variable display starts in the first and second presentation modes, the decorative pattern executes a "variation start action" in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 reverses the direction of the body from left to right. Specifically, in the variation start action A1, the character is in a normal state in which both hands are placed on the hips and facing diagonally forward to the right, in the variation start action A2, the character is in a state in which both hands are raised and spread out and facing forward, and in the variation start action A3, the character is in a state in which both hands are placed on the hips and facing diagonally forward to the left. Here, for the sake of convenience of explanation, only the state of three frames of the variation start actions A1, A2, and A3 are displayed, but in reality, the character is displayed for several tens of frames during the variation start action period (A1 to A3), and a variation start action (movement) is performed in which the direction of the character's body changes in the order of diagonally forward to the right (A1), forward (A2), and diagonally forward to the left (A3).

Next, after the character's body faces diagonally forward and to the left, the decorative pattern moves (rises) a predetermined distance from the stopped position in the opposite direction to the scrolling direction (A4), and then starts to move downward, starting the scrolling display. These change start actions A1 to A4 are executed over a change start action period Tb1 (see FIG. 24) from when the variable display of the special pattern starts until the scrolling display of the decorative pattern (the downward movement of the decorative pattern) starts.

For ease of explanation, only four frames of the change start actions A1, A2, A3, and A4 are shown here, but in reality, the change start action (movement) is performed by displaying the character's movement over several dozen frames during the change start action period Tb1, which is until the character's body orientation is reversed.

In the present embodiment, the change start action is exemplified by a mode in which the character's body direction is reversed left and right, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of the change start action can be changed to other modes, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving the body. Also, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern takes action. In other words, the change start action is an action that is executed before the decorative pattern starts to be scrolled or rotated, and is an action that changes in the scroll display, that is, a separate action that operates in a different mode from the scroll display.

In addition, in the first presentation mode, during the variation start action period Tb1, the character's name (character related information) displayed in the information display section 002SG053 is erased (hidden). In this way, the character's name is easy to see when it is displayed still, but once the scrolling display has started, the character's name is hidden, drawing attention to the scrolling display.

Specifically, the variable display period of the special symbols includes a pre-variable display period from when the variable display of the special symbols and small symbols starts until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols starts, and a post-variable display period after the scrolling display of the decorative symbols starts. The name of the character (character related information) displayed on the information display unit 002SG053 is erased after it is displayed during the pre-variable display period, i.e., when the variable start action is being executed, and before the post-variable display period starts, i.e., before the scrolling display of the decorative symbols starts. In this way, by erasing the name during the variable start action period Tb1, i.e., before the scrolling display starts, attention can be drawn to the variable display and preview performances, rather than the name.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pre-variable display period is the period from when the variable display of the special and small symbols starts until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols starts, but the present invention is not limited to this. The pre-variable display period may be the period from when the variable display start condition is met until the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, that is, the period from when the start winning occurs or when the variable display based on the reserved memory starts until the scrolling display of the decorative symbols starts.

(Fluctuation stop action)
As shown in Figure 23 (B), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (when the decorative pattern is displayed in a temporarily stopped state), a "variable stop action" is executed in the decorative pattern in which the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged.

Specifically, when the scrolling decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position, the character is displayed in a normal state with hands on hips and facing diagonally forward to the right (change stop action B1), enlarged so that it extends farther upward from the base display unit 002SG054 than in the normal state (change stop action B2), and then reduced in size and restored to the normal state (change stop action B3).

For ease of explanation, only three frames of the fluctuation stop action B1, B2, and B3 are shown here, but in reality, the fluctuation stop action (movement) is performed by displaying the character in motion over several dozen frames during the fluctuation stop action period Tb2, from when the character is enlarged until it is restored.

In this embodiment, the change stopping action is exemplified by the enlarged display of the character, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the change stopping action can be changed to other modes, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving the body. Also, at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern may take action. In other words, the change stopping action is an action that is executed when the scrolling display of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and is a separate action from actions that change such as scrolling and rotating displays.

(Loop action)
As shown in Figure 23 (C), when the variable display ends in the first and second presentation modes (from the time the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed until it is stopped (pattern is confirmed)), in the decorative pattern, a "loop action" is executed in which the character displayed in the character display unit 002SG052 repeatedly shrinks and restores, and the number display unit 002SG051 repeatedly rotates horizontally around a rotation axis facing in the vertical direction.

Specifically, in loop action C1, the character has both hands on his hips and faces diagonally forward to the right, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in a normal manner; in loop action C2, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054 and the numeric display unit 002SG051 is rotated approximately 45 degrees to the right; in loop action C3, the reduced character is enlarged and restored, with the numeric display unit 002SG051 facing forward in a normal manner; and in loop action C4, the character is reduced to fit within the pedestal display unit 002SG054 and the numeric display unit 002SG051 is rotated approximately 45 degrees to the left. In this loop action, loop actions C1, C2, C3, and C4 are executed in sequence over the loop action period Tb3, and after the loop action period Tb3 ends, the loop action returns to C1, and the loop actions C1 to C4 are executed again over the loop action period Tb3. In other words, in the loop action, loop actions C1 to C4 are executed cyclically.

For ease of explanation, only four frames of loop actions C1 to C4 are shown here, but in reality, the character is reduced in size and then restored, and during the loop action period Tb3 from when the numeric display section 002SG051 rotates to when it is restored, the character and numeric display section 002SG051 are displayed over several dozen frames, thereby performing the loop action (movement).

In this embodiment, the loop action is exemplified by displaying the character in a reduced size and rotating the number display unit 002SG051, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the loop action can be changed to other modes, such as changing the character's hair or facial expression, or moving the body. Also, it is sufficient that at least one of the number display unit 002SG051, character display unit 002SG052, information display unit 002SG053, and base display unit 002SG054 that form the decorative pattern is in action. In other words, the loop action is an action that is executed from when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position until it is stopped (pattern is confirmed), and is a separate action from the action that changes in the scroll display.

(Comparison of various action periods and light emission periods)
Next, various actions of the decorative pattern and the light emission control of the lamp will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 (A) is a diagram comparing various actions of the decorative pattern and the period of the light emission control of the lamp, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the loop light emission control of the lamp.

As shown in FIG. 24(A), the decorative pattern fluctuation start actions A1-A4 (see FIG. 23(A)) have an execution period of about 1.5 seconds (fluctuation start action period Tb1 = about 1.5 seconds) and consist of about 45 frames of images. The decorative pattern fluctuation stop actions B1-B3 (see FIG. 23(B)) have an execution period of about 0.8 seconds (fluctuation stop action period Tb2 = about 0.8 seconds) and consist of about 28 frames of images. The decorative pattern loop actions C1-C4 (see FIG. 23(C)) have a loop action period Tb3, which is one cycle, of about 1.8 seconds (loop action period Tb3 = about 1.8 seconds) and consist of about 55 frames of images.

As shown in FIG. 24(B), the movable body lamps 9d provided on the movable body 32A provided on the upper part of the image display device 5 and the movable body 32B provided on the lower part of the image display device 5, as well as the main lamps 9a and frame lamps 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3, emit light based on the loop light emission control performed by the performance control CPU 120 when the gaming state is in a low base state.

In this loop light emission control, for example, "white", "blue", and "yellow" are emitted in that order over a loop light emission period Tb4, which is one cycle, and after the loop light emission period Tb4 ends, the light returns to "white", and then during the loop light emission period Tb4 again, the light is emitted in the order of "white", "blue", and "yellow", and this is repeated periodically. In other words, in the loop light emission control, the light emissions of "white", "blue", and "yellow" are executed periodically.

The loop light emission period Tb4 is longer than the loop action period Tb3 (loop action period Tb3 < loop light emission period Tb4). By doing this, in the low base state, the loop action is repeatedly performed to encourage the player to change the display of decorative symbols, while in the high base state, where variable display is easier to execute than in the low base state, excessive encouragement of variable display, which can be perceived as annoying, can be prevented. Also, since the loop action is repeatedly performed at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, the decorative symbols can be made to stand out in an optimal manner.

In the present embodiment, the loop light emission control is exemplified as a form in which the lights "white", "blue", and "yellow" are emitted periodically, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emission color and light emission pattern of the lamp in one cycle can be changed in various ways. For example, a light emission pattern in which the lights are emitted in the order of "white", "blue", and "yellow", followed by "yellow", "white", and "blue", may be cyclically performed, or a light emission pattern in which four or more colors are emitted in sequence may be cyclically performed.

The various actions of the decorative symbols shown in FIG. 24(A) are executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first or second presentation mode, but are not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third or fourth presentation mode. Also, the loop light emission control of the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b shown in FIG. 24(B) is executed when the game state is controlled to a low base state and the presentation mode is the first or second presentation mode, but is not executed when the game state is controlled to a high base state and the presentation mode is the third or fourth presentation mode.

(Pending display)
Next, the hold display will be described with reference to Fig. 25. In Fig. 25, (A1) to (A4) and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams for explaining an example of the operation of the hold display.

As shown in FIG. 25 (A1), when waiting to play (number of reserved memories "0"), no reserved display is shown in the special reserved memory display area 5U and active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5. The special reserved memory display area 5U consists of four display areas, the first display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-1" in the start winning time reception command buffer 002SG194A, the second display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-2", the third display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-3", and the fourth display area from the left corresponds to buffer number "1-4".

As shown in FIG. 25 (A2), when a start winning (e.g., the first start winning) occurs during game standby, the first pending display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U. Next, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upwards to the left (see FIG. 25 (A3)), then moves diagonally downwards to the left in a parabolic arc towards the active display area 5F, and when it reaches the active display area 5F it is enlarged and displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25 (A4)).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 25 (A2), when a start winning occurs, the first reserved display 002SG101 is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U and is not displayed in the active display area 5F, but when the first reserved display 002SG101 is displayed in the special reserved memory display area 5U based on the occurrence of the first start winning, the variable display of the small pattern begins in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern.

However, although the variable display has started, as shown in FIG. 25 (A4), the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U has not moved to the active display area 5F and switched to the active display 002SG103; in other words, the shift display has not ended. Therefore, if the scrolling display of the decorative patterns starts before the shift display has ended, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, the first reserved display 002SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U, is moved to the active display area 5F and displayed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern does not start until the reserved shift display period ends, during which the display is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103.Then, the aforementioned variable start action is executed, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern starts after the reserved shift display period ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (B1), when the decorative pattern is being variably displayed and the number of reserved memories is "1" or more (for example, the number of reserved memories is "2"), the special reserved memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved display 002SG101 in the first and second display areas from the left, and the active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

As shown in FIG. 25 (B2), when the variable display corresponding to the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F ends, the active display 002SG103 that was displayed in the active display area 5F is erased, and an erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to highlight that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

The erase effect 002SG110 continues to be displayed even after the active display 002SG103 is erased, and is erased after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, as shown below. In this way, by not creating a blank period in the presentation between the end of a variable display and the start of the next one, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the presentation. Furthermore, the erase effect 002SG110 allows the player to recognize that the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the ended variable display has been erased, while the display of a new active display 002SG103 allows the player to recognize that a new variable display has started.

Next, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left is started, the first pending display 002SG101 starts to move diagonally upward to the left (see FIG. 25 (B3)), then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic manner toward the active display area 5F, and by moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, it is switched to be displayed as the active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 25 (B4)).

In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the second display area from the left starts to move horizontally to the left (see FIG. 25 (B3)) in conjunction with the movement of the first hold display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left, and moves from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 25 (B4)).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 25 (B2), after the active display 002SG103 is erased with the end of the variable display, the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has not yet moved to the active display area 5F as shown in FIG. 25 (B3). However, at the point when the moving display of the first pending display 002SG101 starts, the variable display of the small pattern starts in response to the variable display of the special pattern.

However, although the variable display has started, as shown in FIG. 25 (B4), the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U has not finished moving (shifting display) to the active display area 5F. Therefore, if the scrolling display of the decorative pattern starts in this state, it will be difficult to tell which first reserved display 002SG101 the scrolling display corresponding to has started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, until the end of the reserved shift display period in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special reserved memory display area 5U moves to the active display area 5F and is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103, the aforementioned variable start action is executed before the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins, and the scrolling display (variable display) of the decorative pattern begins after the reserved shift display period ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special chart reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F are common to the first to fourth presentation modes, so the shift display shown in FIG. 25 is executed in a common manner in the first to fourth presentation modes. However, for example, if a special chart reserved memory display area 5U and an active display area 5F corresponding to each presentation mode are provided, it may be possible to execute a shift display in a manner corresponding to each presentation mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 25, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a shift display that switches the first hold display 002SG101 or the second hold display 002SG102 to the active display 002SG103 in an operating mode (for example, a mode in which the hold display moves in a mountain-shaped trajectory from the special chart hold memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F) that is common to multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, non-reach fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns, etc.), but it may also be possible to execute shift displays of multiple types of operating modes corresponding to each fluctuation pattern and each presentation mode. Also, it may be possible to execute a shift display that has a different operating mode when the game state is in a low base state and when it is in a high base state.

In addition, the operating modes common to multiple types of change patterns in the shift display include those in which at least one of multiple elements such as the display mode, display speed, and shift display period until the pending display is switched to the active display and displayed is common.

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs, the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special chart pending memory display area 5U, and then the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) is moved (shifted) from the special chart pending memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of pending memories is "0", when a start winning occurs, the first pending display 002SG101 (or the second pending display 002SG102) is not displayed in the special chart pending memory display area 5U, and the active display 002SG103 may be displayed directly in the active display area 5F.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a switching display (shift display) that switches the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the active display in response to the start of the variable display of the special pattern, the first reserved display 002SG101 is non-linearly (for example, in a mountain shape) moved from the first display area from the left in the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be moved linearly to the left. In addition, the switching display (shift display) is not limited to a sliding display of the reserved display, but may be a display that erases the active display 002SG103 displayed in the active display area 5F and the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, and starts displaying the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the new variable display in the active display area 5F.

(Example of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, an example of the operation of each part at the start of the variable display will be described based on Figs. 26 to 35. Fig. 26 is a diagram showing the flow of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the first performance mode. Fig. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of the variable display of the decorative pattern following Fig. 26. Fig. 28 is a diagram showing the flow of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the second performance mode. Fig. 29 is a diagram showing the flow of the variable display of the decorative pattern following Fig. 28. Fig. 30 is a diagram showing the details of the flow of the variable display of the decorative pattern in Fig. 28. Fig. 31 is a diagram showing the flow of the variable display of the decorative pattern as a modified example 1. Fig. 32 is a diagram showing the flow of the variable display of the decorative pattern following Fig. 31. Fig. 33 is a diagram showing the flow of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the third performance mode. Fig. 34 is a diagram for explaining the appearance of the decorative pattern. Fig. 35 is a diagram showing the flow of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the fourth performance mode.

In the following diagrams showing the display screen of the image display device 5, diagrams using lines other than solid lines (e.g., dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without symbols do not indicate images displayed on the display screen, but are used to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in first presentation mode)
First, an example of the operation of each section when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the first presentation mode will be described with reference to Figs. 26 and 27.

Figure 26 (A) shows a state in which the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position in the first performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. Also, the active display area 5F displays an active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory number "2").

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and a erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 26(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, while the decorative symbol change start action (see FIG. 23(A)) starts in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle decorative symbol display area. Also, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 26(D)). In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left starts moving horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 26(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 26(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 26(B) continues to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started.

As shown in FIG. 26(E), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moving to the active display area 5F ends, the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the upward action A4 begins, and when the upward movement (action A4) ends, a downward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 26(F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and the upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, a downward movement begins, and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 26(G).

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C end, and the upward action A4 begins. When the upward movement (action A4) ends, a downward movement begins, and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 26(H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts and the variable display of the small pattern starts, the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R, and middle decorative pattern display area starts, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the first reserved display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the player can seamlessly recognize that the variable display based on the reserved display has started. Also, from when the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, so the player can recognize that the variable display has started.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speeds, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance is nearly 100%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is slow immediately after the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 26 (F) and (G), and then moves through the medium speed shown in Figure 26 (H) to the high speed shown in Figures 27 (I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so at high speeds, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. Also, as shown in Figures 26(G) to 27(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are slow immediately after the variable display begins, then speed up through medium speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency increases as the display accelerates.

(Example of variable display operation in the second presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each section when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the second presentation mode will be described with reference to Figs. 28 and 29.

Figure 28 (A) shows the state in which the decorative symbols that were scrolling in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position in the second performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. Also, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory number "2"). Also, in the second performance mode, the name of the decorative symbol information display section 002SG053 is always hidden, even when the decorative symbols are stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and a erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 28(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small pattern starts, while the decorative pattern change start action (see FIG. 23(A)) starts in the order of the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the middle decorative pattern display area. Also, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 28(D)). In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left starts moving horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 28(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 28(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 28(B) continues to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has begun.

As shown in FIG. 28(E), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moving to the active display area 5F ends, the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the retreat action A4 begins, and when the retreat movement (action A4) to the back of the display screen ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 28(F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and the backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 28(G).

Next, as shown in FIG. 28(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C end, and the backward action A4 begins. When the backward movement (action A4) ends, forward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 28(H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts and the variable display of the small pattern starts, the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R, and middle decorative pattern display area starts, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the first reserved display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the player can seamlessly recognize that the variable display based on the reserved display has started. Also, from when the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, so the player can recognize that the variable display has started.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speeds, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance is nearly 100%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is slow immediately after the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 28(F) and (G), and then moves through the medium speed shown in Figure 28(H) to the high speed shown in Figures 29(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so at high speeds, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. Also, as shown in Figures 28(G) to 29(K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are slow immediately after the variable display begins, then speed up through medium speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency increases as the display accelerates.

In this way, the scroll display in the second presentation mode is configured to move and disappear while increasing the transmittance (transparency) from the back of the screen to the front. Specifically, as shown in Figures 30(A) and (B), in the scroll display, the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the back to the front, so that between the time when a decorative pattern is displayed in frame-in and the time when it is displayed out of frame in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, another decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") that is positioned so as to overlap part of one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") on the back side may be visible through decorative pattern "2". At this time, the character in the character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed, while the number in the number display section 002SG051 ("3") is difficult to see (or is not displayed), and as shown in Figure 30 (C), the decorative pattern "2" is erased, and then the number in the number display section 002SG051 of the decorative pattern "3" ("3") is displayed.

In addition, the other decorative pattern "3" located behind the first decorative pattern "2" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "2". In this case, the other decorative pattern "3" located behind displays a character in its character display unit 002SG052 while not displaying a number in its number display unit 002SG051, and the decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This prevents the number "2" of the first decorative pattern and the other decorative pattern "3" from being displayed overlapping, preventing the "2" of the decorative pattern located in the foreground from becoming difficult to see.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30(A), the decorative pattern is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a frame-in manner, and then in a frame-out manner, as shown in FIG. 30(C), the decorative pattern is moved and erased while increasing its transmittance (transparency). However, at the start of the variable display, as described above, the decorative pattern is displayed in a fade-out manner in proportion to the increase in the display speed, so that the decorative pattern is moved from the back of the screen to the front while increasing its transmittance (transparency) while being faded out according to the display speed. Therefore, from the start of the scrolling display until the high-speed display is started, it looks like FIG. 30(A) to FIG. 30(C), but after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display is started, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative pattern even at the back of the screen.

(Example of Operation of Variable Display as Modification 1)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started as Modification 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 31 and Fig. 32. In this Modification 1, the decorative symbols are scrolled in a curved manner as in the second performance mode, but they move in the opposite direction to the second mode, that is, from the front side of the screen to the back side.

The flow in Figures 31(A) to 31(D) is similar to that in Figures 28(A) to 28(D), so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in Figure 31 (E), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moving to the active display area 5F ends, the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L end and the backward action A4 begins, and when the forward movement (action A4) toward the front of the display screen ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in Figure 31 (F).

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(F), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 31(G).

Next, as shown in FIG. 31(G), the actions A1 to A3 of the decorative pattern displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C end, and forward action A4 begins. When the forward movement (action A4) ends, backward movement begins and the scrolling display begins, as shown in FIG. 31(H).

In this way, as the variable display corresponding to the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts and the variable display of the small pattern starts, the variable display of the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, right decorative pattern display area 5R, and middle decorative pattern display area starts, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first reserved display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, the scroll display starts after the first reserved display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 002SG103, so the player can seamlessly recognize that the variable display based on the reserved display has started. Also, from when the shift display begins with the start of the variable display until the shift display ends, the decorative symbols do not scroll, but a change start action is performed, so the player can recognize that the variable display has started.

In addition, when the scroll display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in the display speed, and at high speeds, a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance is nearly 100%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is slow immediately after the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 31(F) and (G), and then moves through the medium speed shown in Figure 31(H) to the high speed shown in Figures 32(I), (J), and (K). As the speed increases, the transmittance also increases, so at high speeds, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern. Also, as shown in Figures 31 (G) to 32 (K), the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5R are also displayed at a low speed immediately after the variable display begins, then at a medium speed and then at a high speed, and a fade-out display is executed in which the transparency increases as the speed increases.

In this way, the scroll display as variant 1 is a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) increases from the front side of the screen to the back side, and then disappears. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31 (G) (H), the scroll display is a mode in which the decorative pattern moves in a curved manner from the front side to the back side, so that between the time when a decorative pattern is framed in and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the time when it is framed out, another decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "2") that is positioned so that it overlaps partially with one decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") on the back side may become visible through the decorative pattern "3". At this time, the character in the character display section 002SG052 of the decorative pattern "2" is displayed, while the number ("2") in the number display section 002SG051 becomes difficult to see (or is not displayed).

In addition, the other decorative pattern "2" located behind the first decorative pattern "3" can be seen through the first decorative pattern "3". In this case, the other decorative pattern "2" located behind displays a character in its character display unit 002SG052 while not displaying a number in its number display unit 002SG051, and the decorative pattern "2" is erased before the number of the decorative pattern "3" is displayed. This prevents the number "3" of the first decorative pattern from overlapping with the other decorative pattern "2", preventing the "3" of the decorative pattern located in the foreground from becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in this modified example 1, the decorative patterns are displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a frame-in manner, and then in a frame-out manner, while increasing their transmittance (transparency), and are then erased. However, at the start of the variable display, as described above, the decorative patterns are displayed in a fade-out manner in proportion to the increase in the display speed, and therefore, while being faded out in accordance with the display speed, they are moved from the back of the screen to the front while increasing their transmittance (transparency). Therefore, from the start of the scrolling display until the high-speed display is achieved, it appears as shown in Figures 31(F) to 31(H), but after the fade-out display period ends and the high-speed display is achieved, it becomes extremely difficult to see the decorative patterns even at the back of the screen.

(Example of variable display operation in the third presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative patterns is started in the third presentation mode will be described with reference to Figs.

Figure 33 (A) shows the state in which the decorative symbols that were rotating in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position in the third performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory number "2"). In addition, the small symbols and the right hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and a erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 33(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, but since it is in a high base state, the decorative symbol change start action (see FIG. 23(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 33(D)). In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left starts moving horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 33(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 33(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 33(B) continues to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started.

As shown in FIG. 33(F), when the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends, the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins. In the high base state, the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R starts all at once, but the rotating display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, the rotation display starts after the first reserved display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on the reserved display has begun.

In addition, when the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin to rotate, the rotation display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speeds a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance is nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 33(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are slow immediately after the variable display begins, as shown in Figure 33(G), and then move to the medium speed shown in Figure 33(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually recognize each decorative pattern at high speeds.

As shown in FIG. 34, the rotating display in the third presentation mode rotates the decorative pattern to repeatedly display it on the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b, and the decorative pattern is semi-transparent during the rotating display and becomes non-transparent when the rotating display stops. During the rotating display, the number display section 002SG051 on the first surface 5a of the decorative pattern that is semi-transparent is displayed, while the number display section 002SG051 on the second surface 5b is not displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 34(A), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a slow speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transparency is the first transparency, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is in a state where the number "326" displayed on the first surface 5a can be seen, but the number "437" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse side, the second surface 5b, is difficult to see.

Also, as shown in FIG. 34(B), when the decorative pattern is displayed rotating at a medium speed and in a semi-transparent state where the transmittance is a second transmittance higher than the first transmittance, the decorative pattern displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is in a state where the number "437" displayed on the second surface 5b can be seen, but the number "548" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse surface, the first surface 5a, is difficult to see.

Also, as shown in FIG. 34(C), in a semi-transparent state in which the decorative patterns are displayed at a high speed and have a third transmittance higher than the second transmittance, the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are in a state in which the number "763" displayed on the first surface 5a is difficult to see, and the number "874" (to be displayed) displayed on the reverse surface, the second surface 5b, is difficult to see. Note that both the first surface 5a and the second surface 5b are difficult to see during the high speed rotation display.

In this way, when rotating the decorative pattern to repeatedly display the front and back sides of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern becomes semi-transparent, so not only the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) but also the back side (e.g., second surface 5b) of the decorative pattern can be seen through. In this case, the numbers on the front side (e.g., first surface 5a) are displayed, while the numbers on the back side (e.g., second surface 5b) are not displayed, so the numbers on the front side and the back side of the decorative pattern do not overlap and are not difficult to read. Also, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being performed in the high base state, the light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 24(B)) corresponding to the background pattern, and this simplifies the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d.

(Example of variable display operation in the fourth presentation mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the fourth presentation mode will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 35 (A) shows the state in which the decorative symbols that were scrolled in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped at the stop position in the fourth performance mode. Here, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet ended, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped display state, so the small symbols displayed in the display area 5S are being variably displayed. In addition, the active display area 5F displays the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display, and the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U displays two first reserved displays 002SG101 (first reserved memory number "2"). In addition, the small symbols and the right hit notification image 002SG201 are displayed so as to be superimposed on the front side (upper layer) of the decorative symbols. (See Figure 23 (A))

Next, as shown in FIG. 35(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols are displayed in a non-winning combination, the active display 002SG103 corresponding to the variable display that has ended is erased from the active display area 5F, and a erase effect 002SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 002SG103 has been erased.

As shown in FIG. 35(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the variable display of the small symbols starts, but since it is in a high base state, the decorative symbol change start action (see FIG. 23(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display starts in which the two first pending displays 002SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first hold display 002SG101 starts moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, and moves from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as active display 002SG103 (see FIG. 35(D)). In addition, the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the second display area from the left starts moving horizontally (shift display) to the left in conjunction with the first hold display 002SG101 that was displayed in the first display area from the left (see FIG. 35(C)), and moves (shift display) from the second display area from the left to the first display area (see FIG. 35(D)).

Note that the erase effect 002SG110 displayed in FIG. 35(B) continues to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left has started.

As shown in FIG. 35(F), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moving to the active display area 5F ends, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins. In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R begins all at once.

In this way, when the variable display corresponding to the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left starts, the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in a frozen state in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R starts all at once, but the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R does not start until the shift display in which the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F ends.

In other words, the scroll display begins after the first pending display 002SG101 has completed moving to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as active display 002SG103, allowing the player to seamlessly recognize that a variable display based on the pending display has begun.

When the scrolling display of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins, the scroll display speed (movement speed) gradually increases from slow to medium to fast, and the transmittance (transparency) of the image gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speeds a fade-out display is executed in which the transmittance is nearly 100%. For example, as shown in Figures 35(E) and (F), the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are slow immediately after the variable display begins, and then move through the medium speed shown in Figure 35(G) to the high speed shown in Figure 35(H). As the transmittance increases as the speed increases, it becomes extremely difficult to visually see each decorative pattern at high speeds.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in response to the start of variable display, it performs an action to start varying the decorative pattern, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the shift display ends, which switches the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special pending memory display area 5U to active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

In this way, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to an active display, and a variable start action is performed to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is being performed, making it possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform the shift display. Also, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is being performed in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, it is possible to liven up the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state.

The performance control CPU 120 can also execute a variable display of the decorative pattern based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and can perform a common shift display when a variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command). This allows a common shift display to be performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, thereby reducing the number of shift display patterns.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the low base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in response to the start of the variable display, the CPU 120 performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in the high base state, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance does not perform an action to start changing the decorative pattern when the pending shift display is being performed in response to the start of the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the high base state, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs an action to start changing the decorative pattern when the CPU 120 is performing a pending shift display in response to the start of the variable display, and does not start scrolling the decorative pattern until the first pending display 002SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left in the special chart pending memory display area 5U is switched to and displayed as active display 002SG103 in the active display area 5F.

In this way, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a shift display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to an active display, and a variable start action is performed to operate the decorative symbol in a manner different from the moving display while the shift display is being performed, making it possible to effectively utilize the period required to perform the shift display. Also, since the variable start action is performed when the shift display is being performed in a high base state, which is more advantageous than a low base state, it is possible to liven up the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the high base state.

Even in the high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative patterns based on a variable pattern designation command sent from the main board 11 in the performance control process processing of step S76, and a common shift display can be performed when a variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern designation command) and when a variable display is executed based on a second type of variable pattern designation command (e.g., a reach variable pattern designation command). This allows a common shift display to be performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is executed, thereby reducing the number of shift display patterns.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 42 and 43, a form has been exemplified in which, when the variable display of a special pattern begins, the shift display for switching the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to an active display ends, and then the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the scrolling display of the decorative patterns displayed in any one of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R among the left, right, and center begins after the shift display for switching the reserved display corresponding to the variable display ends, when the variable display of a special pattern begins, the scrolling display of any one of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may begin while the shift display is being performed.

(Example of operation of each part when a symbol stops being displayed)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the symbols stop will be described with reference to Figs. 36 to 40. Fig. 36 is a diagram showing the flow of the display of the stopped decorative symbols in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Fig. 37 is a diagram showing the flow of the display of the stopped decorative symbols following Fig. 36. Figs. 38 (A) to (G) are diagrams showing the flow of the display of the stopped decorative symbols when the number of reserved memories is three in the first presentation mode (second presentation mode). Figs. 39 (A) and (B) are diagrams showing the flow of the display of the stopped decorative symbols in the fourth presentation mode (third presentation mode).

(Example of the operation of the stop display of the first performance mode [reserved memory number "2 or less"])
First, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbol is displayed in a stop state in the variable display based on the miss variable pattern when the reserved memory number is 2 or less in the first presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 36 and 37. Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 36 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for the stopped display of each decorative pattern approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 36 (B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stopping position of the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 36(C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged (see FIG. 36(D)), after which a variable stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) is executed to restore the character to its original size (see FIG. 36(E)). Then, in the temporarily stopped state, a loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started, and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special pattern is completed.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 36 (F), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 36 (F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stopping position of the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 36(G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged (see FIG. 36(H)), after which a variable stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) is executed to restore the character to its original size (see FIG. 37(I)). Then, in the temporarily stopped state, a loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started, and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special pattern is completed.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, as shown in Figure 37 (J), the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 37 (K)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stopping position of the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 37(K)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), and the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 is enlarged (see FIG. 37(L)), after which a variable stop action (see FIG. 23(B)) is executed to restore the character to its original size (see FIG. 37(M)). Then, in the temporarily stopped state, a loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is started, and is executed repeatedly until the variable display of the special pattern is completed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as still, the loop action of the decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed as still in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ends and they are displayed as still, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 37 (M)).

(Example of the operation of the stop display of the first performance mode [number of reserved memories "3"])
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state in the variable display when the reserved memory number is 3 in the first presentation mode will be described with reference to Figures 38(A) to (G). Note that the second presentation mode is almost the same as the first presentation mode except for the background image, so a detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 38 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for the stopped display of each decorative pattern approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in left decorative pattern display area 5L, which had been displayed at high speed, first slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative patterns (see Figure 38 (B)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 38(C)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

When the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 38 (D)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 36(E)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

When the decorative pattern in the right decorative pattern display area 5R is temporarily stopped, the display speed of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, which had been displayed at high speed, slows down, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of the decorative pattern (see Figure 38 (F)).

Next, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 38(G)), the transparency of the decorative pattern becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed. In addition, after the temporary stop display, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) is executed.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as still, the loop action of the decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed as still in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ends and they are displayed as still, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 38 (G)).

(Example of the stop display of symbols in the fourth performance mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the decorative symbols are displayed in a static manner in the variable display in the fourth performance mode will be described with reference to Figures 39(A) and 39(B). Note that the third performance mode is almost the same as the fourth performance mode except for the background image, so a detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 39 (A), when decorative patterns are being scrolled at high speed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, as the timing for each decorative pattern to stop approaches, the display speed of the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R that were being displayed at high speed decreases all at once, and a fade-in display is executed in which the transmittance (transparency) gradually decreases, improving the visibility of each decorative pattern (see Figure 39 (B)).

The left, center, and right decorative patterns are then simultaneously displayed in a temporary stop at the stop positions of decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Here, the transparency of the decorative patterns becomes nearly 0% (opaque), but the variable stop action of the character displayed in character display section 002SG052 (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed. Furthermore, the character's loop action (see FIG. 23(C)) after the temporary stop display is not executed either.

After that, when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the small symbol is displayed as still, the decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed as still in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed as still, and the active display 002SG103 is erased (see Figure 39 (C)).

In this way, in a low base state, depending on the number of reserved memories (for example, when the number of reserved memories is two or less and a variable display based on an abbreviated variable pattern is executed), the variable stop action adds variety to the movement of the decorative pattern when it is temporarily stopped, enhancing interest, whereas in a low base state when the number of reserved memories is three, or in a high base state where the average variable display period is short and the decorative pattern is difficult to see, when a variable display based on abbreviated variable patterns is executed regardless of the number of reserved memories, the variable stop action is not executed, and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped while maintaining its size, allowing it to be stopped without compromising its visibility.

In this embodiment, the animation (moving image) data of various movements of the decorative patterns can be created by combining materials for each period, such as 1. from the start of the variable display to just before the high-speed variable display, 2. high-speed variable display, 3. low-speed variable display to variable display stop, and 4. stopped pattern. However, for 2. high-speed variable display, as shown in Figures 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2), the transmittance of the decorative patterns is high and they are almost transparent, so that while it is possible to recognize the state of the variable display at high speed, it is extremely difficult to visually recognize which decorative patterns have passed by (represented by arrows in Figures 20 (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2)). Therefore, even if there is high-speed variable display animation data for each type of decorative pattern (a type corresponding to which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from), this would not be meaningful and would only take up space in ROM 121, so it is preferable that common data be used for the high-speed variable display animation data regardless of which decorative pattern the high-speed variable display starts from.

(Example of background change)
Next, an example of the background change will be described with reference to Fig. 40 and Fig. 41. Fig. 40 shows (A1) the first background image, (A2) the first predetermined background image, and (B) an explanatory diagram of the background change. Fig. 41 shows the flow of the background change in the first presentation mode.

As shown in Figure 40, in the first presentation mode, the background image can be switched between a first background image 002SG081 (see Figure 40 (A1)), which shows a daytime cityscape seen from afar, and a first predetermined background image 002SG081A (see Figure 40 (A2)), which shows a daytime cityscape. The background image is switched when a predetermined switching condition (for example, when an SP reach miss occurs) is met. In this embodiment, the switching is performed at a predetermined timing in the next variable display after an SP reach miss (for example, when the variable display starts).

In the present embodiment, the first presentation mode is exemplified by switching between the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and although not particularly shown, it may be possible to selectively switch between and display three or more types of background images including the first background image 002SG081 and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A. In addition, the establishment of the switching condition is not limited to the above, and may be established when a specific presentation other than SP Reach is executed, when one background image is displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time, or when selected by the player's operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start timing of the switching display is the start timing of the variable display of the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be any timing during the variable display period, such as before the decorative pattern reaches a reach state.

As shown in FIG. 40B, when the first background image 002SG081 is switched to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A (or when the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is switched to the first background image 002SG081), a fade-out display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 displayed at 100% opacity is gradually increased and erased, while a fade-in display is performed in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A, which is hidden at 0% opacity, is gradually decreased. In other words, a cross-fade display is performed in which the fade-out display period A1 of the first background image 002SG081 and the fade-in display period B1 of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are synchronized (fade-out display period A1 = fade-in display period B1). The fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 last, for example, about 6 seconds, during which about 210 frames of images are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(A), when the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, its transmittance (transparency) increases over time, making it difficult to see (see FIG. 41(B)), while the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A displayed in the layer below the first background image 002SG081 decreases, and it gradually becomes visible (see FIG. 41(C)).

Next, the visibility of the first background image 002SG081 decreases further while the visibility of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A increases (see Figures 41 (D) and (E)). Finally, the transmittance of the first background image 002SG081 becomes 100% and it is erased, while the transmittance of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A becomes 0%, making it easily visible (see Figure 41 (F)).

In the present embodiment, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 are synchronized, that is, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 have the same period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a portion of the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-in display period B1 may overlap, or the fade-in display period B1 may start after the fade-out display period A1 ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an example has been given in which the transmittance always increases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded out, and the transmittance always decreases at a constant rate when the background image or decorative pattern is faded in, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance in the fade-out or fade-in display of the background image is not necessarily limited to an increase or decrease at a constant rate; for example, the transmittance may increase or decrease slowly in a first period, and then increase or decrease rapidly in a second period.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the background image is switched in one presentation mode (for example, the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode), but the present invention is not limited to this, and can also be applied to a form in which the first background image corresponding to the first presentation mode is switched to a second background image corresponding to the second presentation mode, and to a form in which the fade-out display period of the first background image and the fade-in display period of the second background image are synchronized.

(Example of operation of each part during variable display)
Next, examples of the operation of each part in the variable display in each presentation mode will be described with reference to Figs. 42 to 45. Fig. 42 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the first presentation mode. Fig. 43 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the second presentation mode. Fig. 44 is a timing chart showing the flow of each part in the variable display in the third and fourth presentation modes. Fig. 45 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of the variable display in (A) the first presentation mode, (B) the second presentation mode, and (C) the third and fourth presentation modes.

(First performance mode)
As shown in Fig. 42, in the first performance mode, when the reserved memory number is "2" or less and the variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, the small symbols are displayed at high speed with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and the scroll display is started after the variable start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols in the center decorative symbol display area 5C. In addition, the reserved display is shifted, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see Fig. 45 (A)).

The decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scrolling to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed as the decorative patterns are faded out. This fade-out display period A21 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In addition, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of the variable display, a fade-out display is started in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display is started in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases and becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B21 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in that order. Also, during the temporary stop display, a variable stop action is performed and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small patterns are stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative patterns ends and they are stopped and displayed. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed and the next variable display can start.

The fade-out display period A1 during which the first background image 002SG081 is faded out is longer than the fade-out display period A21 from when the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start to be scrolled and displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1>fade-out display period A21).

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is set to be a longer period than the fade-in display period B21 from when the display speed starts to decelerate in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R until the scroll display is temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B21).

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly execute a light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 24(B)) corresponding to the background pattern. Also, background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(Second performance mode)
Next, as shown in Fig. 43, in the second performance mode, when the number of reserved memories is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-1 is executed, the small symbols are displayed at high speed with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and the scroll display is started after the variable start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols in the center decorative symbol display area 5C. In addition, the shift display of the reserved display is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (see Fig. 45 (B)).

The decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scrolling to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed as the decorative patterns are faded out. This fade-out display period A22 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In addition, if the switching conditions for switching the background image from the first background image 002SG081 to the first predetermined background image 002SG081A are met at the start of the variable display, a fade-out display is started in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first background image 002SG081 gradually increases, while a fade-in display is started in which the transmittance (transparency) of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A gradually decreases and becomes opaque.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the center decorative pattern display area 5C gradually slow down and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing them to fade in. This fade-in display period B22 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the decorative patterns in the center decorative pattern display area 5C are temporarily stopped and displayed in that order. Also, during the temporary stop display, a variable stop action is performed and a loop action is repeatedly executed. After that, when the variable display ends and the small patterns are stopped and displayed, the loop action of the decorative patterns ends and they are stopped and displayed. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has passed, and the next variable display can start.

The fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is set to a longer period than the fade-out display period A22 from when the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R begins until they are displayed at high speed (fade-out display period A1 > fade-out display period A22). In this way, since the fade-out display basically gives the impression of having disappeared suddenly the shorter the period in which it is performed, for fade-out displays that may be performed at the same time when the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change occur (for example, when the variable display begins), the fade-out display of the decorative pattern is performed in a shorter period than the fade-out display of the background image, thereby drawing attention to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is set to be a longer period than the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to decelerate in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R to when the display is temporarily stopped (fade-in display period B1>fade-in display period B22). In this way, since the fade-in display basically gives the impression of appearing suddenly the shorter the period in which it is performed, for fade-in displays that may be performed at the same time when the variable display of the decorative pattern and the background change occur (for example, when the variable display is stopped), the fade-in display of the decorative pattern is performed in a shorter period of time than the fade-in display of the background, drawing attention to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 45 (A) and (B)). By doing this, not only does the second presentation mode have a different manner of scroll display of the decorative pattern compared to the first presentation mode, but the fade-out display period A22 from when the scroll display starts until the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see due to the high speed display is longer, so that the decorative pattern can be noticed for a longer period of time.

In this embodiment, as a variable display of the decorative pattern in the second presentation mode, a second scroll display that moves in a curved manner in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front is used as a special variable display different from the first scroll display that moves in a straight line from top to bottom in the first presentation mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special variable display different from the first scroll display is not limited to the above-mentioned one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the back to the front, but may be various scroll displays such as one that moves in a curved manner in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R from the front to the back as described in the first variation example, or one that moves in a straight line or curved line from bottom to top.

Furthermore, the fade-out display periods A21, A22 are different when the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the first presentation mode and when the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is determined in the second presentation mode. By doing this, the fade-out display period is the same despite the different presentation modes, making it difficult for the player to predict that the determined fluctuation pattern is the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern PA1-1, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A1 during which the fade-out display of the first background image 002SG081 is performed is different from the fade-out display period A22 from when the scrolling display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R begins until they are displayed at high speed. In other words, the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, at the start of the variable display), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has begun. In more detail, if the fade-out display period A1 and the fade-out display period A22 were synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first background image 002SG081 would disappear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has begun. Therefore, by erasing the decorative pattern first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

Furthermore, the fade-in display period B1 during which the fade-in display of the first predetermined background image 002SG081A is performed is different from the fade-in display period B22 from when the display speed starts to slow down in the scroll display of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R until the display is temporarily stopped. In other words, the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are not executed (synchronized) at the same time (for example, when the variable display is stopped), which prevents it from becoming difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has started. In more detail, if the fade-in display period B1 and the fade-in display period B21 are synchronized, the decorative pattern and the first predetermined background image 002SG081A will appear together, making it difficult to notice that the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped. Therefore, by making the decorative pattern appear first, the decorative pattern can be made to stand out.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed, the movable body lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b repeatedly execute a light emission pattern in the order of white, blue, and yellow based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 24(B)) corresponding to the background pattern. Also, background BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(Third and fourth performance modes)
Next, as shown in Fig. 44, in the third and fourth performance modes, when the variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variable pattern PA1-3 is executed, the small symbols are variably displayed at high speed with the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R start rotating or scrolling all at once without performing a variable start action. Also, the pending display is shifted, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts (see Fig. 45(C)).

The decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate from the start of scrolling to a high-speed display, and the transmittance (transparency) increases in proportion to the increase in speed as the decorative patterns are faded out. This fade-out display period A23 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping timing of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually decelerate all at once and are displayed at a slower speed, and the transmittance (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, causing the patterns to fade in. This fade-in display period B23 is common to each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed statically. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action as in the first and second presentation modes are not executed, and the variable display ends as is, and the decorative symbols are displayed statically together with the small symbols. After that, a pattern determination period (e.g., 500 ms) has elapsed, and the next variable display can begin.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is performed in the first presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when the rotating display is performed in the third presentation mode or the scroll display is performed in the fourth presentation mode, and the fade-out display period A22 when the scroll display is performed in the second presentation mode is longer than the fade-out display period A21 when the scroll display is performed in the first presentation mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21 < fade-out display period A22. See Figures 45 (A) to (C)).

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is being performed, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b are illuminated in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high bass music based on the light emission control corresponding to the high bass music pattern. In addition, the high bass music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in the high base state, the movable lamp 9d, main lamp 9a, and frame lamp 9b are exemplified as being illuminated in accordance with the output of the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high base music based on the light emission control corresponding to the high base music pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed in the high base state, the light emission pattern of white, blue, and yellow may be repeatedly executed in order based on the loop light emission control (see FIG. 24(B)) corresponding to the background pattern, and background BGM may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, the light emission control of the performance control CPU 120 can be simplified.

(Example of customer waiting demo performance)
Next, the customer waiting demo performance will be described with reference to Fig. 46 to Fig. 47. Fig. 46 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo performance. Fig. 47 is a diagram showing an example of the operation when a start winning occurs during the customer waiting demo performance.

As shown in FIG. 46, the "Waiting for Customers Demo Presentation" is a presentation that notifies the user that the machine is in a waiting for customers (waiting to play) state, and is started by the presentation control CPU 120 when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since receiving a waiting for customers demo designation command output from the main board 11 without receiving a control command such as a variable display start designation command.

Specifically, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the movable bodies 32A, 32B, etc. is executed in the initial operation control process, and then the menu/volume and light adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 46(A)). Then, when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the power was turned on without any variable display, the menu/volume and light adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is hidden, the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is displayed, and the customer waiting demo performance begins (see FIG. 46(B)).

In the customer waiting demo performance, after a moving image is displayed that sequentially introduces the multiple friendly characters (which may include enemy character images) that appear in various performances and the contents of the content (see FIG. 46 (B)-(E)), an image of a group of friendly characters is still displayed (see FIG. 46 (F)), the movable body 32A descends from the origin position to the performance position, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, it rises back to the origin position (see FIG. 46 (G)-(H)), and the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the normal state is displayed as the background image, and the performance ends (see FIG. 46 (I)). When the customer waiting demo performance ends, the menu/volume and light adjustment display suggestion display 002SG480 is displayed (see FIG. 46 (J)).

When a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the customer waiting demo performance ended without any variable display being performed, the customer waiting demo performance will start again. Even after that, the customer waiting demo performance will be performed periodically as long as the standby state continues. The customer waiting demo performance may be repeatedly performed multiple times in the standby state, or may not be performed after being performed a predetermined number of times. The performance mode of the customer waiting demo performance as a standby performance is arbitrary and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, during the execution period of the customer waiting demo performance (see Figures 46 (B) to (H)), small symbols are continuously displayed in a static state in the display area 5S, while decorative symbols are hidden in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, by displaying small symbols even when decorative symbols are not displayed, the player can recognize that the variable display is in a static state.

Here is an example of the operation that occurs when a start winning occurs while such a customer waiting demo performance is being performed.

As shown in FIG. 47(A), when the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, if the first start winning occurs (the condition for starting the variable display is met), the variable display of small symbols starts in the display area 5S while the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 47(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(C), the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and decorative patterns are displayed frozen in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F are displayed, and the first reserved display 002SG101 is displayed in the first display area from the left of the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U. Then, the first reserved display 002SG101 starts moving (shifting) from the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U to the active display area 5F, and the change start action of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts in the order of left, right, and center.

As shown in Figure 47 (D), when the shift display of the first pending display 002SG101 to the active display area 5F ends, as shown in Figure 47 (E), the decorative patterns in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R move upward in sequence, the change start action ends, and the scrolling display begins (see Figure 47 (F)).

In this way, if a start winning occurs while the customer waiting demo performance is being performed, the variable display of small symbols begins before the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 becomes invisible, then the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 becomes invisible and switches to the background image corresponding to the performance mode at that time (here, the first background image 002SG081 corresponding to the first performance mode), and then the decorative symbols are displayed and the scrolling display begins.

In other words, if the scroll display of the decorative symbols is started while the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is still displayed, it is difficult for the player to understand that the scroll display has started with the occurrence of the first start winning. Therefore, by starting the variable display of the small symbols, switching from the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 to the first background image 002SG081, and then starting the scroll display after the shift display of the reserved display ends, the player can be made to recognize that the scroll display has started with the occurrence of the first start winning. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 is switched to the first background image 002SG081 and the scroll display is started after the shift display ends, the time lag from the occurrence of the first start winning to the start of the scroll display becomes large, so for the small symbols, the variable display starts before the customer waiting demo performance image 002SG400 goes invisible, so the display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbols can be guaranteed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figs. 46(A), (I), and (J), when the customer waiting demo performance ends and the decorative symbols are displayed frozen in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, if the performance mode is the first or second, a loop action (see Fig. 23(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is executed, and loop light emission control (see Fig. 24(B)) is executed in the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d. On the other hand, if the performance mode is the third or fourth, the loop action (see Fig. 23(C)) of the frozen decorative symbols is not executed, and light emission control is executed in the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d in accordance with the rhythm, melody, beat, etc. of the high-bass music.

In this way, in a low base state, the loop action of the decorative symbols is repeatedly executed at a shorter cycle than the loop light emission control, which draws attention to the decorative symbols, thereby encouraging the variable display of the decorative symbols, i.e., resumption of play, while in a high base state, neither the loop action of the decorative symbols nor the loop light emission control is executed, which draws attention to the fact that a presentation during a high base (third presentation mode or fourth presentation mode) is being executed. It is not necessary to execute the loop action of the decorative symbols in the first presentation mode or second presentation mode, and it is also possible to execute the loop action of the decorative symbols in the third presentation mode or fourth presentation mode.

In addition, the loop action of the decorative symbols is not executed while the variable display is stopped in the high base state because it is unlikely that the player will end the game in the high base state, and it is more likely that the player will simply leave their seat. Therefore, there is no need to appeal to the player to take a seat just because the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a non-operating state without a variable display, and by appealing with the loop action, other players are prevented from accidentally sitting down.

In addition, the "loop action" of this embodiment is focused on "movement," but for example, the decorative pattern will not change position, sway, or deform, but may instead have an animation in which a highlight moves around the decorative pattern while it remains stationary, causing it to sparkle.

In addition, in this embodiment, the third background image 002SG083, the fourth background image 002SG084, and performance images (not shown) such as character images displayed as background images in the high base state may be animated, such as moving the background images in time with the high base music or at a predetermined moving speed. In this case, while the variable display is stopped in the high base state as described above, the loop action of the decorative pattern is not executed, but the animation display of the third background image 002SG083 and the fourth background image 002SG084 may continue.

(Example of pseudo consecutive announcements)
Next, an example of the operation of the pseudo consecutive announcement will be described with reference to Fig. 48 to Fig. 49. Fig. 48 is a diagram showing the flow of the pseudo consecutive announcement. Fig. 49 is a diagram showing an example of the pseudo consecutive number display and the symbol color, (B) a diagram showing the types of the pseudo consecutive number display and the symbol color, and (C) a diagram showing the pseudo consecutive number display color decision table.

As shown in FIG. 48, the "pseudo consecutive announcement" is a presentation that teases whether or not the variable display will be resumed after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing between the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols and the derived display of the display result, i.e., whether or not one variable display will be made to look like multiple variable displays.

As shown in FIG. 49(A), the pseudo consecutive prediction can be executed in two patterns: a "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" in which the initial variable display and one re-variable display result in a total variable display count of 2, and a "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" in which the initial variable display and two re-variable displays result in a total variable display count of 3. When the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 1 pattern) variable pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern" is executed, and when the Super Reach (pseudo consecutive 2 pattern) variable pattern is selected, the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" is executed. Note that the probability of winning is higher with the "pseudo consecutive 2 pattern" than with the "pseudo consecutive 1 pattern."

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48(A), when a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive prediction is started, a decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the variable display was started, and then a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, entering a reach state (see FIG. 48(B)), and then a pseudo consecutive decorative pattern with the word "NEXT!" displayed on its surface is decelerated and displayed just before the stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 48(C)).

After that, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, the pseudo consecutive decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 48(D)), and the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 of "x2" indicating that the first re-variable display will start, that is, the second variable display will start, is displayed above the middle decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 48(F)), and the variable display of the decoration pattern is resumed in the left decoration pattern display area 5L, the middle decoration pattern display area 5C, and the right decoration pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 48(G)). Note that in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, the pseudo consecutive pattern passes the stop position in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C, and the decoration pattern with a number one larger than the temporary stopped decoration pattern is stopped and displayed in the left and right decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5C, and the variable display result of a miss is displayed (see FIG. 48(E)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed in Figure 48 (G), in the case of a pseudo consecutive prediction of a "pseudo consecutive 1 time pattern", after a predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol that was variably displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as stopped (see Figure 48 (L)), and a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed as stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, resulting in a reach mode (see Figure 48 (M)), and the performance progresses to a SP reach.

In addition, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed in FIG. 48 (G), in the case of a pseudo consecutive prediction of a "pseudo consecutive two times pattern," a decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, and then a decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the reach state is entered again, and then a pseudo consecutive decorative symbol with the word "NEXT!" displayed on the surface is decelerated and displayed just before the stopping position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 48 (H)).

Next, the pseudo consecutive decoration pattern is temporarily stopped at the stop position in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 48(I)), and the pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG213 of "x3" is displayed above the middle decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 48(J)), indicating that the second re-variable display will start, that is, the third variable display will start, and then the variable display of the decoration patterns is resumed in the left decoration pattern display area 5L, middle decoration pattern display area 5C, and right decoration pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 48(K)).

Then, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 48(L)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a reach state (see FIG. 48(M)), and the SP reach performance develops.

The pseudo consecutive announcement includes an introductory part that teases whether or not the variable display will resume (see Fig. 48 (A)-(C), (G), (J), (K), (L)), and a result notification part that notifies the result of whether or not the variable display has resumed (see Fig. 48 (D)-(F), (H), (I), (M)).

As shown in FIG. 49 (B1), in the pseudo consecutive prediction, after the pseudo consecutive decoration pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop position in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, when the variable display is resumed, a pseudo consecutive number of times display is displayed that can specify the number of times the variable display has been resumed. Specifically, a pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG212 (see FIG. 48 (F) (G)) of "x2" indicating that the first re-variable display will start, that is, the second variable display will start, and a pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG213 (see FIG. 48 (J) (K)) of "x3" indicating that the second re-variable display will start, that is, the third variable display will start are displayed.

The pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG212 shown in FIG. 49 (B1) and the pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG213 shown in FIG. 49 (B2) are sometimes displayed in blue and sometimes displayed in red. Also, as explained in FIG. 19, the color is "blue" for normal symbols consisting of even numbers, and "red" for special symbols consisting of odd numbers. The display color of such pseudo consecutive number of times display is determined using the pseudo consecutive number of times display color determination table shown in FIG. 49 (C) in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280 in the variable display number setting process explained in FIG. 18.

Specifically, when the display color of the pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG212 is determined in steps 002SGS278 and 002SGS280, if the variable display result is a "probable jackpot", a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is blue) is determined 10% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are red) is determined 90% of the time.

In addition, when the variable display result is a "non-certain jackpot," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo consecutive number of times display color is blue) is determined at a rate of 30%, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo consecutive number of times display color are red) is determined at a rate of 70%.

In addition, when the variable display result is a "miss," a display color that is not the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color is blue and pseudo consecutive number display color is red/pattern color is red and pseudo consecutive number display color is blue) is determined 90% of the time, and a display color that is the same as the pattern color of the decorative pattern determined in step 002SGS276 (for example, pattern color and pseudo consecutive number display color are blue/pattern color and pseudo consecutive number display color are red) is determined 10% of the time.

In this way, in the pseudo consecutive win prediction, there are cases where the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a first combination of non-same colors, and cases where the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop and the pseudo consecutive win count display have a second combination of the same color, and the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination in the pseudo consecutive win prediction.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a jackpot and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color blue is determined as the pseudo-consecutive count display for the first and second pseudo-consecutive runs is higher than the rate at which the non-same color red is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss and a normal pattern (blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color blue is determined as the pseudo-consecutive count display for the first and second pseudo-consecutive runs is lower than the rate at which the non-same color red is determined.

In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color red is determined as the pseudo-consecutive count display for the first and second pseudo-consecutive runs is higher than the rate at which the non-same color blue is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a miss, and a probability variable pattern (red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color red is determined as the pseudo-consecutive count display for the first and second pseudo-consecutive runs is lower than the rate at which the non-same color blue is determined.

Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, when a normal pattern ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276 (see FIG. 49 (B1)), for the first pseudo-consecutive in which pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 is "x2", the second combination ("x2", blue) in which the provisionally stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 have the same number and display color, blue, is determined at a higher rate than the first combination ("x2", red) in which the provisionally stopped decorative pattern and the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 have the same number but display color, red.

In addition, for the second pseudo-consecutive win, in which the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 is "x3", the third combination ("x3", blue), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, blue, is determined more frequently than the fourth combination ("x3", red), in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the numbers on the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 are different and the display color is red.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, and the normal pattern ("2", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive and second pseudo-consecutive is lower than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined.

When the variable display result is a jackpot, and a sure-win pattern ("3", red) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, for the first pseudo-consecutive in which the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 is "x2", the third combination ("x2", red) in which the provisionally stopped decorative pattern and the numbers in the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 are different but the display color is the same type, red, is determined at a higher rate than the fourth combination ("x2", blue) in which the provisionally stopped decorative pattern and the numbers in the pseudo-consecutive count display 002SG212 are different and the display color is blue.

In addition, for the second pseudo-consecutive win, in which the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG213 is "x3", the second combination ("x3", red) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number and display color of the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 are the same type is determined at a higher rate than the first combination ("x3", blue) in which the decorative symbol displayed as a temporary stop and the number of the pseudo-consecutive win count display 002SG212 are the same type but the display color is different, blue.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, and the normal pattern ("3", blue) is determined as the stopping pattern in step 002SGS276, the rate at which the same color, blue, is determined as the pseudo-consecutive number display for the first pseudo-consecutive and second pseudo-consecutive is lower than the rate at which the non-same color, red, is determined.

In this way, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, there are cases where the numbers of the decorative pattern displayed in the temporary stop and the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, 002SG213 are the same type, but the display colors of the decorative pattern displayed in the temporary stop and the pseudo consecutive number display are different, resulting in a first combination, and cases where the decorative pattern displayed in the temporary stop and the numbers and display colors of the pseudo consecutive number display are both the same type, resulting in a second combination.By this, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the variable display is resumed in the second combination than when the variable display is resumed in the first combination in the pseudo consecutive prediction, and not only can you focus on whether the pseudo consecutive prediction is executed, but if it is executed, you can also focus on the combination of the numbers of the decorative pattern displayed in the temporary stop and the numbers and colors of the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212, 002SG213, which increases the interest of the game.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, since the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo consecutives is determined as the fluctuation pattern than when a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo consecutive is determined, by making it higher the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state when the decorative pattern provisionally stopped in the second pseudo consecutive and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive count display are the same type of second combination than when both the decorative pattern provisionally stopped in the first pseudo consecutive and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive count display are the same type of second combination, it is possible to draw attention to the number of pseudo consecutive executions and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive count display.

In addition, if the decorative pattern displayed as a provisional stop and the number and display color of the pseudo consecutive number display during the second pseudo consecutive turn are the same type of second combination, the decorative pattern becomes a probability variable pattern, so the probability of being controlled to a probability variable jackpot game state may be higher when a super reach fluctuation pattern of two pseudo consecutive turns is determined as the fluctuation pattern than when a super reach fluctuation pattern of one pseudo consecutive turn is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display is determined to be one of multiple colors depending on the number of decorative patterns displayed in a temporary stop state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display color of the pseudo consecutive number display may be a display color that is predetermined for each pseudo consecutive number.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the pseudo consecutive number of times display 002SG212, 002SG213 is exemplified as "x2" or "x3", but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive number of times display can be changed to various modes as long as the pseudo consecutive number of times can be specified, and can be displayed in various modes such as "nth consecutive time" (n is an integer of 2 or more), "nth time", "nth re-change", etc.

In this embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive prediction, the numbers of the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop and the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display are the same type and the same color in two patterns: when the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop is a normal pattern ("2", blue) and the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG212 ("x2", blue), and when the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop is a normal pattern ("3", red) and the pseudo consecutive number display 002SG213 (x3, red). However, other patterns such as when the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop is a normal pattern ("4", green) and the pseudo consecutive number display (x4, green) may also be used, and the color of the numbers of the decorative pattern, the color of the numbers of the pseudo consecutive number display, and the number of pseudo consecutive numbers can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the number of the decorative pattern displayed in the pseudo consecutive win prediction is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive wins displayed, it is determined whether or not the pseudo consecutive win count display color will be the same color as the number of the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop, and the expectation level is higher if the same color is determined than if it is determined to be a non-same color. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the number of the decorative pattern displayed in the provisional stop is a number other than "2" or "3" corresponding to the number of pseudo consecutive wins displayed, the pseudo consecutive win count display color may not be determined, and may be uniformly determined to a predetermined display color (for example, white, etc.).

In addition, in this embodiment, in the pseudo consecutive announcement, a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R to enter a reach state, and then a pseudo consecutive decorative pattern with the word "NEXT!" displayed on the surface is temporarily displayed at a stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C to start the re-variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the pseudo consecutive decorative pattern can be changed in various ways. Also, after a decorative pattern with a different number from the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L or the right decorative pattern display area 5R, or the pseudo consecutive decorative pattern, may be temporarily displayed at a stop position in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C to start the re-variable display.

The decorative symbols provisionally displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R during the pseudo consecutive prediction do not necessarily have to be the same as the final decorative symbols that are provisionally displayed when the variable display ends. For example, after a normal symbol is provisionally displayed in the first pseudo consecutive, a special symbol may be provisionally displayed in the second pseudo consecutive, that is, a symbol different from the first pseudo consecutive. The number of pseudo consecutive times is not limited to the above two times, and pseudo consecutive times (re-variable display) may be possible three or more times.

(Example of reach effect operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the reach performance will be described with reference to Figs. 50 to 52. Fig. 50 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach performance. Fig. 51 is a diagram showing the flow of the reach performance following Fig. 50. Fig. 52 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of each part in the reach performance. Note that, although an example of the operation of the reach performance in the first performance mode will be described below, similar reach performances may also be executable in the second to fourth performance modes.

As shown in FIG. 50(A), when a variable display based on a normal reach variable pattern or a super reach variable pattern is started, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the variable display was started (see FIG. 50(B)), and then a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined reach mode, and the reach performance is started (see FIG. 50(C)). At this time, the decorative pattern is displayed at high speed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C. In addition, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A and 32B are lit based on the loop light emission control described above (see FIG. 24(B)).

Note that in Figures 50(B) and (C), a form in which the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are temporarily displayed in that order is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and decorative patterns may be temporarily displayed simultaneously in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R.

As shown in FIG. 50(D), when the reach performance begins, the decorative patterns temporarily stopped in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed as a reach line suggestion image superimposed on the decorative pattern (which is almost transparent and invisible) being variably displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, and the reach line suggestion performance begins. The reach line effect display 002SG250 is a display that emphasizes the reach line that connects the decorative patterns temporarily stopped at the stopping positions of the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and is a display that suggests that the decorative pattern in the center decorative pattern display area 5C will be stopped and displayed on the reach line.

In FIG. 50(D), the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and right decorative pattern display area 5R are not just enlarged and displayed as the character in the character display section 002SG052, as in the variable stop action described above, but the number display section 002SG051, character display section 002SG052, information display section 002SG053 and base display section 002SG054 which form the decorative pattern are all enlarged and displayed at the same ratio. In this way, by displaying an enlarged display in a different manner from when the variable display is stopped, it can be recognized that the variable display has not stopped, but has entered a reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 50(D), when the reach performance starts, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is displayed small near the stopping position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C so as to overlap with the decorative pattern being variably displayed, and then gradually extends linearly toward the stopping positions (left and right direction) of the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R (see FIG. 50(E)). After reaching the left and right sides of the display screen (see FIG. 50(F)), the appearance changes so that the vertical dimensions expand (see FIG. 50(G)), and the transmittance (transparency) gradually increases due to a fade-out display (see FIG. 50(H)), and finally disappears and becomes invisible (see FIG. 51(I)).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 50(F), in the reach line suggestion performance, it is possible to change the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 (enlarged display), and when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is being changed, the movable body lamps 9d of the movable bodies 32A, 32B arranged on the periphery (nearby) of the display screen of the image display device 5 are turned off, so that the periphery of the display screen becomes darker than usual, making the reach line effect display 002SG250 stand out more.

As shown in Fig. 50(D), after the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged and displayed, the left decorative pattern starts moving to the left and the right decorative pattern starts moving to the right, that is, in the direction moving away from each other (see Fig. 50(E)). Also, while moving away from each other, they rotate a predetermined angle around a rotation axis facing up and down (see Fig. 50(F)), and when they reach the farthest position on the left and right of the display screen, the movement and rotation display ends and they are temporarily stopped and displayed (see Fig. 50(G)).

After that, as shown in FIG. 50(H), the left and right decorative patterns that were displayed enlarged at the left and right separated positions are reduced in size and rotated while moving from the separated positions toward the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and are restored to their normal display positions.

Then, as shown in Figure 51 (I), when the decorative patterns are restored to the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R and the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased and hidden, the decorative patterns that were variably displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C are displayed in a fade-in manner with a gradually decreasing transmittance (transparency) as well as a gradually decreasing scroll display speed (see Figures 51 (J) to (K)), and finally the transmittance of the decorative patterns becomes 0% (opaque) and they are displayed by scrolling at a slow speed (see Figure 51 (L)).

As shown in FIG. 52, when executing a reach line suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an enlarged display that enlarges the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and a separation display that separates the decorative patterns after executing the enlarged display. The second period te1 from the start to the end of the separation display is longer than the first period td1 from the start to the end of the enlarged display (td1<te1), allowing the player to recognize the decorative patterns that form the reach state.

In addition, the period td2 from the start of the enlarged display to the end of the enlarged display is longer than the period tf1 until the enlarged decorative pattern is restored to its original state (td2<tf1), so the player can be made aware of the decorative pattern that forms the reach state, and when restored, it can be quickly reduced in size to prepare for the next performance.

In addition, when the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R are enlarged, the left-right dimension of the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, where attention is focused on which decorative pattern will be displayed in a stopped state, narrows, making it difficult to visually confirm the variable display of the decorative patterns. Therefore, by performing a moving display that separates the left and right decorative patterns, the left and right decorative patterns that have reached a reach state are emphasized by the enlarged display, and then attention is quickly drawn to the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

In addition, the reach line effect display 002SG250 is exemplified as being displayed immediately after the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a reach state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be displayed at the same time as the reach state is reached.

In addition, the movable body lamp 9d is shown as being turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing after the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lamp may be turned off at the same time as the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250. Also, it is not limited to being turned off, and the brightness may be reduced compared to when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable body lamp 9d built into the movable bodies 32A and 32B provided above and below the image display device 5 is used as a specific light-emitting means that is turned off when the display mode of the reach line effect display 002SG250 is changing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific light-emitting means is not limited to a lamp provided on a movable body that can operate as described above as long as it is provided around the image display device 5. For example, it may be a plurality of board side lamps including an attacca lamp 9c provided on the game board, or a main lamp 9a or a frame lamp 9b provided on the game machine frame 3. In particular, if the lamp is provided near the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, the reach line effect display 002SG250 can be made to stand out by turning it off.

In addition, after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, the timing at which the transmittance (transparency) of the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C is set to the second transmittance F2, which is lower than the first transmittance F1 before the reach line effect display 002SG250 is executed, is the timing after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, so that the decorative pattern being variably displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C does not interfere with the display of the reach line effect display 002SG250.

In addition, in this embodiment, the transmittance of the decorative pattern in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decreases (fade-in display) after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance may change to the second transmittance F2 almost at the same time as the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, or the transmittance may change to the second transmittance F2 after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reach line effect display 002SG250 is erased from the middle decorative pattern display area 5C.

(Example of SP reach performance)
Next, an operation example of the SP reach performance will be described with reference to Fig. 53 to Fig. 55. Fig. 53 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach performance. Fig. 54 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP reach performance following Fig. 53. Fig. 55 is a diagram showing an operation example of each part in the SP reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 53(A), in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when controlled to the low base state, after the reach state described in FIG. 50(C) is reached, the reach title display 002SG070 indicating the type of SP reach performance is displayed to notify the reach title, and the SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started as a notification performance to notify whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (see FIG. 53(B) and (C)). In the SP reach performance, a fifth background image 002SG085 is displayed, which is different from the first background image 002SG081 and the second background image 002SG082, which are normal background images, and which represents the universe corresponding to the SP reach performance. The fifth background image 002SG085 may be an image with a different form depending on the type of SP reach performance.

Then, from the time the battle is concluded until a specified valid operation period has elapsed, an operation prompt display 002SG071 consisting of the text "PRESS!!" that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B, and a button display 002SG072 that imitates the push button 31B are displayed (see FIG. 53 (D)).

When the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when the valid operation period has elapsed without any operation being detected, the operation prompt display 002SG071 and the button display 002SG072 are hidden and the game ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a specified light color while the movable body 32B rises from the origin position to the performance position, the effect display 002SG073 that highlights the movable body 32B is displayed, a specified performance sound effect is output, and the game is notified that it has been controlled to a jackpot game state (see FIG. 53 (E)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character, a combination of symbols that confirms a big win (e.g., "222") is temporarily stopped and displayed while the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image (see FIG. 53 (F)).

As shown in Figure 53 (G), when the SP Reach performance ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm a big win (for example, "222") is displayed temporarily. After that, a character 002SG074 appears holding a lit ignition device, frames in from the bottom right side of the display screen, and then runs to the left, igniting the number display parts 002SG051 of the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see Figure 53 (H)).

As shown in FIG. 55(A), the specific image 002SG075, which shows a flame displayed by igniting a predetermined position on the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 of each symbol, increases along the periphery of the number display section 002SG051 as shown in FIG. 55(B) to (D), and is displayed near the numbers on the number display section 002SG051. Also, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 55(D), the flame image constituting the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in a loop of three images with different aspects (specific image 002SG075A, specific image 002SG075B, specific image 002SG075C), so that the flame appears to be flickering. Finally, the specific image 002SG075 is hidden, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed stationary, and the big win display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 53(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position, and a result notification display 002SG078 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character (see FIG. 53 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image in the notification performance, a combination of confirmed symbols that is a miss and is not a jackpot combination (for example, "232") is displayed provisionally (see FIG. 53 (L)).

As shown in FIG. 53(M), when the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, and while the first background image 002SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that has been determined to be a loss (for example, "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed temporarily without displaying the specific image 002SG075, and the loss display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 53(N)).

In addition, in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern when controlled to the high base state, after a notification effect is performed to notify that it will be controlled to the jackpot game state (see FIG. 53(E)), a result display (not shown) is displayed indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, in the notification effect, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach effect is displayed as the background image, a combination of symbols that confirms a jackpot (for example, "222") is displayed provisionally (see FIG. 54(O)).

As shown in FIG. 54(P), when the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the combination of symbols that confirm a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed. After that, the decorative symbols are displayed temporarily without the specific image 002SG075 being displayed, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 54(Q)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32B does not rise from the origin position to the performance position, and a result notification display 002SG078 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character (see FIG. 53 (K)). After that, when the fifth background image 002SG085 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background image in the notification performance, a combination of confirmed symbols that is a miss and is not a jackpot combination (for example, "232") is displayed as a provisional stop (see FIG. 54 (R)).

As shown in FIG. 54(S), when the notification effect (SP reach effect) ends, the fifth background image 002SG085 is hidden and the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, and while the fourth background image 002SG084 is displayed, the combination of symbols that has been determined to be a loss (for example, "232") is temporarily displayed. After that, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed temporarily without displaying the specific image 002SG075, and the loss display result is derived and displayed (see FIG. 54(T)).

In this way, in a low base state, the specific image 002SG075 is displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the jackpot confirmation decorative pattern displayed after the notification effect ends, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and adding excitement (see Figures 53 (H) and (I)), while in a high base state where the average variable display period is short, the specific image 002SG075 is not displayed in motion relative to the number display portion 002SG051 of the decorative pattern displayed after the notification effect ends (see Figure 54 (S)), giving the variable display a sense of speed.

In this embodiment, in a low base state, a specific image 002SG075 showing a flame is displayed in close proximity to the number display portion 002SG051 of the combination of decorative symbols that confirms a jackpot, which is displayed after the end of the SP reach performance. However, the specific image is not limited to the specific image 002SG075 showing a flame as described above, and an image other than a flame (for example, light, water, effects, characters, items, etc.) may also be applied.

The display of a specific image in motion may not only refer to a flickering flame as described above, but may also include the specific image rotating around the numeric display unit 002SG051, or changing in shape or display color.

In addition, in this embodiment, the character 002SG074 acts on each of the decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby activating and displaying the specific image 002SG075 around the number display unit 002SG051. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific image may be displayed without the character 002SG074 acting on each of the decorative patterns that are temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modified example of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Fig. 56 shows (A1) to (A7) a diagram illustrating the second modified example of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, the variable stop action was to enlarge the character displayed in the character display section 002SG052 when the decorative pattern was temporarily stopped at the stop position in the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the decorative pattern may be displayed moving in the opposite direction after passing the stop position in the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R and then returning to the stop position.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 56 (A1) and (A2), the decorative pattern moves gradually downward in the direction of the white arrow while decelerating towards the stopping position, and when it reaches the stopping position and is displayed as temporarily stopped (see Figure 56 (A3)), the pedestal display unit 002SG054 and information display unit 002SG053 remain displayed as temporarily stopped at the stopping position, while the number display unit 002SG051 and character display unit 002SG052 pass the stopping position and continue to move further downward.

At this time, the distance L2 traveled by the number display unit 002SG051 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped is greater than the distance L1 traveled by the character display unit 002SG052 from the time it passes the stop position until it is displayed as temporarily stopped (L1 < L2).

After that, the numeric display unit 002SG051 and the character display unit 002SG052, which have passed the stop position, each move upward, and the character display unit 002SG052 is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 56 (A5)), while the character display unit 002SG052 moves upward again, passing the stop position (see FIG. 56 (A6)). In this way, the movement distance L3 from when the numeric display unit 002SG051 passes upward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped is smaller than the movement distance L2 from when the numeric display unit 002SG051 passes downward through the stop position to when it is displayed temporarily stopped (L3<L2). Finally, the numeric display unit 002SG051 moves downward and is displayed temporarily stopped at the stop position (see FIG. 56 (A7)).

In addition, in Figure 56 (A6), the action in which only the character display part 002SG052 passes through the stopping position and moves upward is an upward action that is different in form from the fluctuation start action A4 shown in Figure 23 (A), so that the difference from the fluctuation start action can be recognized.

In this way, when the decorative pattern reaches the stopping position, it is not displayed as temporarily stopped at the moment it reaches the stopping position, but rather at least some of the multiple seed display parts that make up the decorative pattern pass the stopping position and then are displayed as if they move in the opposite direction and return to the stopping position, making it look as if some of the display parts have passed by with momentum, which adds a sense of realism.

In addition, by displaying the first display units (e.g., the pedestal display unit 002SG054 and the information display unit 002SG053) among the multiple display units as temporarily stopped at the stop position, while the other second display units (e.g., the number display unit 002SG051 and the character display unit 002SG052) pass through the stop position, it is possible to give movement while ensuring that the stop position is not unclear. Furthermore, by making the movement distances passed by the number display unit 002SG051 and the character display unit 002SG052 among the second display units different, it is possible to display an action that matches the size and appearance of the display units.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modified example of the present invention will be described with reference to Fig. 57. Fig. 57 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the third modified example of the present invention.

In the above embodiment, when a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed at a stop position of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first performance mode, as shown in FIG. 21 (A2), the decorative patterns before and after the decorative pattern temporarily displayed at the stop position are not temporarily displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a variable display based on a miss variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), when any decorative pattern (e.g., decorative pattern "3") is temporarily displayed at a stop position, a part of the decorative patterns before and after it (e.g., decorative pattern "2", decorative pattern "4") may be temporarily displayed.

When any of the decorative patterns that were variably displayed (for example, the decorative pattern "3") is temporarily stopped at the stop position (see Figs. 57(A) and (B)), if a variable stop action is performed (see Figs. 57(C) and (D)), it is preferable that the variable stop action is performed on the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped at the stop position, and that the variable stop action is not performed on the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in an area other than the stop position.

In this way, when a losing combination, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a losing display result, is derived as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily enlarged to draw the player's attention to the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and even if a losing combination that does not make sense to the player is derived, the player's gaze can be kept on the area where the decorative symbols are displayed. Also, when the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged, decorative symbols that are not located in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are not enlarged, so the player's gaze can be focused on the decorative symbols tentatively displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the load on the display control can be reduced.

In addition, since the loop light emission control continues even when the decorative patterns to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are enlarged (see Figures 42 and 43), the control of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and movable body lamp 9d can be simplified. Note that, if multiple valid stop positions are set, a variable stop action may be executed for the decorative patterns temporarily stopped and displayed at each valid stop position.

(Other Modifications)
In addition, when the variable display mode becomes a reach mode and then develops into an SP reach performance, only the number display unit 002SG051 may be moved to a predetermined position on the display screen where the SP reach performance is displayed (for example, the upper left or right side of the display screen) by a specific action including a first predetermined action in which the left and right decorative patterns forming the reach mode move toward the front side of the display screen and a second predetermined action in which the decorative patterns move toward the back side of the display screen, and in this case, it is preferable that the moving speed of the decorative patterns is faster in the second predetermined action than in the first predetermined action.

In addition, when the variable display is stopped, in a case where the decorative pattern is displayed by the number display section 002SG051 and the information display section 002SG053, the number display section 002SG051 may be able to execute a number variable start action different from the scroll display when the variable display starts, and the information display section 002SG053 may also be able to execute an information display variable start action in conjunction with the number variable start action of the number display section 002SG051. In this case, the information display variable start action may end before the number variable start action ends, and the information display section 002SG053 may be erased.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which either the first or second presentation mode can be executed in a low base state, the third presentation mode can be executed in a low-probability high base state, and the fourth presentation mode can be executed in a high-probability high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of presentation modes may be executable in a low base state, or three or more types of presentation modes may be executable in a high base state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a first scroll display in the vertical direction is executed in the first presentation mode, a second scroll display that curves and moves from the back side to the front side is executed in the second presentation mode, a rotating display is executed in the third presentation mode, and a third scroll display in the vertical direction is executed in the fourth presentation mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the manner in which the decorative patterns are variable displayed in each presentation mode can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a big win game state is applied as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state, a probability-varying state, a small win game state, etc. may also be applied as an advantageous state.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which the normal state is a low-probability, low-base state, and the special states, which are more likely to execute a variable display than the normal state and have a shorter average variable display period, are a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be a low-probability state and the special state a high-probability state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the game states are a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a high probability state (high probability high base state), and an example of applying the present invention to a pachinko game machine 1 that can be controlled to the time-saving state or the high probability state when a jackpot game ends is given; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to pachinko game machines that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result, which is one of the cases when the variable display result does not match in a low probability state, or that can be controlled to the time-saving state based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled to an advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after the RAM is cleared (a cold start of the pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game is called time-saving state A, the time-saving state controlled based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled to an advantageous state in a low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or RAM clear (cold start of pachinko game machine 1) is called time-saving state B, and the time-saving state controlled based on the variable display result being displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result is not a miss in a low probability state is called time-saving state C.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to the time-saving state C described above, multiple types of variable display results that can be won in the time-saving state C can be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed can be varied depending on the type of variable display result when the time-saving state C is won.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine was used as an example of a game machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to the big bonus, regular bonus, and assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT), etc.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

[Example]
Further, the mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the embodiment.

[Form 1-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed, the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different;
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the specific performance is executed and after the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed (see Figures 90 to 93, 102, 103, 109, 120, and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the types of background images are different before and after the fragment image is displayed in both the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even in effects in which fragment images are similarly displayed, different impressions can be suitably given, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 1-2]
The gaming machine of form 1-2 is,
Both a predetermined performance and a specific performance can be executed in one variable display,
When a specific performance is executed without a predetermined performance, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a specific performance is executed without a predetermined performance (see Figures 90 to 93).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-3]
The gaming machine of form 1-3 is,
The background image includes a first background image and a second background image that is more advantageous than the first background image;
The first predetermined part can be executed while the first background image is displayed,
A second background image is displayed during the execution of the second predetermined part;
The second background image can be displayed even when a second background teasing effect different from the predetermined effect is executed,
When the second background image is displayed by the predetermined effect, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the second background image is displayed by the second background teasing effect (see FIG. 87).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be heightened by drawing attention to whether the second background image is displayed through the predetermined effect or the second background preview effect.

[Form 1-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-1 is,
In one variable display, both a predetermined performance and a specific performance can be executed,
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
When a specific performance is performed before the specific performance is performed, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific performance is not performed (see Figures 90 to 93).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, interest can be increased by making the player expect that both the predetermined effect and the specific effect will be executed.

[Form 1-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-2 is
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The specific performance is a performance that can be executed after the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
the background image includes a first background image before the decoration identification information reaches a reach state, a second background image before the decoration identification information reaches a reach state and which is more advantageous than the first background image, a third background image after the decoration identification information reaches a reach state, and a fourth background image after the decoration identification information reaches a reach state and which is more advantageous than the third background image,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed together with a second background image;
The fragment image in the specific performance is displayed together with the fourth background image (see Figures 102, 103, 109, 120, and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the relationship between the predetermined effect, the specific effect, and the background image, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-4-3]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-3 is,
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode through which at least a part of the second background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized;
The fragment image in the specific performance is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a part of the fourth background image in a superimposed relationship (see Figures 116, 117, and 130).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second specified part and the specific performance can be improved.

[Form 1-4-4]
The gaming machine of form 1-4-4 is,
The fragment image is capable of performing a rotational movement;
When the image fragment is rotated to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the second background image superimposed on the image fragment;
When the rotation operation causes the image fragment to be at the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the second background image that is superimposed on the image fragment (see FIGS. 140 and 146 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 1-4-5]
The gaming machine of type 1-4-5 is
When a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a first angle, a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a second angle (see FIG. 140 and FIG. 146 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 1-5]
The gaming machine of form 1-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction in common;
A fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a predetermined direction (see FIG. 141 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 1-6]
The gaming machine of form 1-6 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that does not involve a change in speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see FIG. 129).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 1-7-1 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction in common;
The period required for the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance to be hidden in the display area of the display means is the same (see FIG. 132 and FIG. 137 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 1-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 1-7-2 is,
The visibility of the fragment images that are displayed moving in a specific direction differs between when the display starts and the timing before the fragment images are hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 132 and 137).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 1-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 1-7-3 is,
A fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a specific performance takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a predetermined performance (see FIG. 141 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-8]
The gaming machine of form 1-8 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance can perform a rotational motion,
The number of rotational operations performed from when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means is the same as the number of rotational operations performed from when a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means (see Figures 140 and 146 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 2-1]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
the display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when a transition is made from a first predetermined part to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image in a specific performance is displayed;
During a display period of the effect image, it is difficult to visually recognize the image fragments over a first period, and the image fragments can be visually recognized over a second period after the first period has elapsed (see FIGS. 102, 103, 109, 120, and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image, and the specific effect of displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image, can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times, and furthermore, the sense of incongruity felt when a fragment image is displayed by an effect image is reduced, allowing the predetermined effect and the specific effect to be executed preferably.

[Form 2-2]
The gaming machine of form 2-2 is,
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display period (see FIGS. 120 and 125 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 2-3]
The gaming machine of form 2-3 is,
The execution period of the first predetermined part is longer than the execution period of the second predetermined part,
The display period of the effect image is shorter than the execution period of the first predetermined part and the execution period of the second predetermined part (see FIG. 120 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display of the fragment images can be started without creating an awkward feeling by using the effect image.

[Form 2-4]
The gaming machine of form 2-4 is,
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see FIGS. 102, 103, and 109).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the predetermined effect and the specific effect is increased, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 3-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner in which they change and move from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the fragment images (see Figures 105, 112, 122, 127, and 129).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the speed at which the fragment images are moved is different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even effects in which fragment images are similarly displayed can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 3-2]
The gaming machine of form 3-2 is,
In one variable display, a predetermined performance can be performed multiple times, while a specific performance can be performed once;
When the predetermined performance is executed multiple times, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined performance is executed once,
When a specific performance is executed once, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a predetermined performance is executed multiple times (see Figures 90 to 93).
The gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the predetermined performance and the specific performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 3-3]
The gaming machine of form 3-3 is,
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part transitions to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image in a specific performance is displayed;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 105(C) and FIG. 112(C)).
The gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 3-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-1 is
The fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner moving at a first speed during a first period from the start of display to a specific timing during the display period, and are displayed in a manner moving at a second speed during a second period from the specific timing to being hidden in the display area of the display means;
The second period is longer than the first period (see FIG. 129 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 3-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 3-4-2 is
An effect image can be displayed at the timing when the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed,
The display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 127, 129, and 138).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can prevent the effect of a particular presentation from being reduced.

[Form 3-5]
The gaming machine of form 3-5 is,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance can perform a rotational motion,
the number of rotational actions performed from when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational actions performed from when a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 146 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 4-1]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a non-transparent manner that makes it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in an overlapping relationship,
The fragment image in a specific performance is a transparent image that allows recognition of at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship (see Figures 105, 112, 116, 117, 122, 127, and 139).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the display manner of the fragment image differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even effects in which fragment images are similarly displayed can give a suitably different impression, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 4-2]
The gaming machine of form 4-2 is
The specific effect is an effect including displaying a special image together with the fragment image,
In a specific performance, the fragment image and the special image are in a superimposed relationship,
A first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific performance is an image in a transparent form through which at least a part of the background image can be recognized;
The second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the specific effect is an image in a transparent form through which at least a part of the special image can be recognized,
The third fragment image among the multiple fragment images in the specific performance is a transparent image that allows recognition of both at least a part of the background image and at least a part of the special image (see FIG. 139 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by varying the display mode of the fragment images for each performance, the performance effect of each performance can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 4-3-1 is
The fragment images in certain effects can rotate.
When the first image fragment is rotated to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of a background image that is superimposed on the first image fragment;
When the first image fragment is rotated to the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the first image fragment (see FIGS. 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 4-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 4-3-2 is
In a specific performance, when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a first angle, a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a second angle (see FIG. 140 and FIG. 146 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 5-1]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction in common;
A fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed in a manner moving in a predetermined direction (see Figures 105, 112, 122, and 127).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed, and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, thereby allowing the player to be surprised at various times; furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment images move is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the period of time required for them to disappear is different, so that even effects in which fragment images are similarly displayed can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 5-2]
The gaming machine of form 5-2 is
The visibility of the fragment images that are displayed moving in a specific direction differs between when the display starts and the timing before the fragment images are hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 134 and 138 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 5-3]
The gaming machine of form 5-3 is as follows:
A fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a specific performance takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image that moves in a specific direction in a predetermined performance (see FIG. 141 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a difference can be created between the predetermined presentation and the specific presentation, and interest can be increased by providing a variety of presentation methods.

[Form 5-4]
The gaming machine of form 5-4 is,
All of the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden in a manner that they move toward the outside of the display area of the display means (for example, see FIG. 140(A) ),
A first fragment image among the fragment images in the specific performance is hidden in a manner of moving toward the outside of the display area of the display means,
A second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image among the fragment images in the specific performance, is hidden before moving outside the display area of the display means (for example, see FIG. 140(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way in which the fragment images are displayed can be differentiated between the predetermined presentation and the specific presentation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack form in response to a movement of the object image, a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from the first crack form to a second crack form in response to a movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which an object image is displayed, and in response to a movement of the object image, a plurality of fragment images are started to be displayed in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image of a first crack form is displayed in a predetermined effect until a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed;
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part is executed or not executed,
The period from when the crack precursor image of the second crack type is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined effect is longer than the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed in the specific effect,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from when it is displayed until when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means;
In a specific performance, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from when it is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 106 to 108, 116, 117, 123, and 124).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed and the specific effect in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment image is displayed, as well as the display period of the fragment image, differs between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, even effects in which fragment images are displayed similarly can give different impressions in an appropriate manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 6-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-2 is
The second predetermined part has a longer execution period than the first predetermined part (see Figures 116, 117, 122, and 127).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of a given presentation from decreasing due to a monotonous presentation structure.

[Form 6-3]
The gaming machine of form 6-3 is,
When the second predetermined part is executed and then the third predetermined part is not executed, a fourth predetermined part can be executed in which a crack precursor image of the second crack form is continuously displayed for a period longer than the display period of the fragment image in the third predetermined part (see FIG. 123).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably indicate that the third predetermined part will not be executed.

[Form 6-4-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-1 is
The predetermined effect is an effect in which the decoration identification information is in a reach state,
a first pattern in which a predetermined effect is executed and the decoration identification information is in a reach state, and a second pattern in which the predetermined effect is not executed and the decoration identification information is in a reach state,
When the variable display is performed according to the first pattern, there is a higher expectation of control to an advantageous state than when the variable display is performed according to the second pattern (see FIG. 123).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of a predetermined performance, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 6-4-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-4-2 is
In one variable display, both a predetermined performance and a specific performance can be executed,
The specific performance can be executed after the third predetermined part is executed,
When the third predetermined part is executed before the execution of the specific performance, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the third predetermined part is not executed (see Figures 90 to 93).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the third specified part in the specified performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-5]
The gaming machine of form 6-5 is as follows:
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at a first timing when the second predetermined part transitions to a third predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image in a specific performance is displayed;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 106(G) and FIG. 108(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-6]
The gaming machine of form 6-6 is
The predetermined effect is an effect in which the decoration identification information is in a reach state,
The decoration identification information of the reach state can be highlighted in the third predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the period during which the decoration identifying information in the reach state is highlighted is longer than the period during which the fragment images are displayed (see FIG. 107(I) to FIG. 107(K)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to conveniently indicate that a reach state has been reached.

[Form 6-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-1 is,
A motion emphasis image can be displayed in the first predetermined part in accordance with a motion of the object image,
It is possible to display it in a display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
A motion-emphasized image is displayed at the same time as the display of the crack precursor image of the crack pattern starts (see FIG. 106(D) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the crack precursor image can be changed to a cracked state without creating an unnatural appearance.

[Form 6-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-2 is
A small fragment image can be displayed along with the motion-enhanced image;
The display period of the small fragment image is longer than the display period of the motion emphasis image (see FIG. 106(D) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately indicate that the crack precursor image has changed to a cracked state.

[Form 6-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-3 is
An effect image can be displayed in the second predetermined part in response to the action of the object image,
When displaying an effect image, the action emphasis image is not displayed (see FIG. 106(H) and FIG. 123).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a difference is provided between the first and second predetermined parts, and the predetermined presentation can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-7-4]
The gaming machine of form 6-7-4 is
The period required for the small fragment image in the first predetermined part to be hidden in the display area of the display means is different from the period required for the small fragment image in the third predetermined part to be hidden in the display area of the display means (FIG. 123).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently in the first and third specified parts, which can enhance interest.

[Form 6-8]
The gaming machine of form 6-8 is
The fragment image in the third predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in a specific performance is a non-transparent image in which it is difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship (see Figures 116, 117, and 130).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display mode of the fragment images can be made different between the predetermined effect and the specific effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-9]
The gaming machine of form 6-9 is
the fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The fragment images in the specific performance are displayed in a manner that does not involve a change in speed throughout the display period of the fragment images (see FIG. 129).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed naturally.

[Form 6-10]
The gaming machine of form 6-10 is
The period required from when the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed until when it is not displayed in the display area of the display means is longer than the period required from when the fragment image in the third predetermined part is displayed until when it is not displayed in the display area of the display means (see Figures 123 and 124).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a difference can be created between the predetermined presentation and the specific presentation, and interest can be increased by providing a variety of presentation methods.

[Form 7-1]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A motion detection means capable of detecting a motion of a player;
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
A motion promotion effect can be executed to encourage the player to perform a motion on the motion detection means,
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
The action prompting image can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than the period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
The action promotion effect is an effect in which an action promotion image is displayed over a valid action period, and when a player's action is detected, the display state of the action promotion image is changed from the action promotion state to the action completion state,
When the action promotion image is changed from the action promotion state to the action completion state by the action promotion effect, a specific effect can be executed;
During at least a portion of the execution period of the specific performance, it is possible to visually recognize both the action prompting image of the action completion mode and the fragment image in the specific performance;
The display period of the fragment image in the specific performance is shorter than the display period of the action promotion image in the action promotion mode and longer than the display period of the action promotion image in the action completion mode (see FIGS. 102, 103, 112, 120, and 127).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect displaying a crack precursor image and a fragment image and the specific effect displaying a fragment image without displaying a crack precursor image can be executed at different times, it is possible to surprise the player at various times and further to prevent the interest of the specific effect from decreasing due to a monotonous presentation structure.

[Form 8-1]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed;
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the third predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed (see Figs. 102, 103, 105, 120, and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the types of background images before and after the fragment images are displayed are different in common between the first and second predetermined effects, even effects which similarly display fragment images can give suitably different impressions, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 8-2]
The gaming machine of form 8-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state and displayed,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack stage in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack stage in the third predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 102, 103, 105, 120, and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 9-1]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
the display means is capable of displaying an effect image at a first timing when a transition is made from the first predetermined part to the second predetermined part and at a second timing when a transition is made from the third predetermined part to the fourth predetermined part;
During a display period of the effect image, it is difficult to visually recognize the image fragments over a first period, and the image fragments can be visually recognized over a second period after the first period has elapsed (see FIGS. 102, 103, 105, 120, and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects which display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times, and further, the sense of incongruity felt when the fragment image is displayed by the effect image can be reduced, so that the first and second predetermined effects can be executed preferably.

[Form 9-2]
The gaming machine of form 9-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state and displayed,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack stage in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack stage in the third predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 102, 103, and 105).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 10-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The image fragments in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that changes and moves from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the image fragments (see Figs. 102, 103, 110, 111, 120, 126, and 129).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, because the speed at which the fragment images are moved is different in the first and second predetermined effects, even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 10-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part transitions to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when the third predetermined part transitions to a fourth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 102(G) and FIG. 110(H)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-1 is
the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner moving at a first speed over a first period from the start of display to a specific timing, and are displayed in a manner moving at a second speed over a second period from the specific timing to being hidden;
The second period is longer than the first period (see FIG. 129 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way in which the fragment images are displayed can be made different between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-3-2 is
When the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed, an effect image can be displayed;
In the fourth predetermined part, the display period of the effect image overlaps with the first period but does not overlap with the second period (see FIGS. 110 and 129 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can prevent the effect of a particular presentation from being reduced.

[Form 10-4]
The gaming machine of form 10-4 is
All of the fragment images in the second predetermined part are hidden from view by moving out of the display area of the display means (see FIG. 140(A) ),
a first fragment image among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is hidden in a manner of moving toward the outside of the display area of the display means;
A second fragment image, which is different from the first fragment image, among the fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is made invisible before moving out of the display area of the display means (see FIG. 140(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way in which the fragment images are displayed can be made different between the first predetermined presentation and the second specific presentation, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-5]
The gaming machine of form 10-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is a transparent image through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 116, 117, and 130).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-6-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-1 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction;
A fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part (see Figs. 75 and 133).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-6-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-6-2 is
The visibility of the fragment images moving in a specific direction differs between when the display starts and before the image is hidden (see FIGS. 75 and 133).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are capable of rotating;
the number of rotational operations performed from when a first fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the second predetermined part is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means is greater than the number of rotational operations performed from when a second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images in the fourth predetermined part is displayed until it is not displayed in the display area of the display means (see FIG. 146 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-2 is
When the image fragment is rotated to a first angle, it becomes possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the image fragment;
When the image fragment is rotated to the second angle, it becomes difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image that is superimposed on the image fragment (see FIGS. 140 and 146).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-7-3]
The gaming machine of form 10-7-3 is
When the first fragment image is at a first angle, the second fragment image among the plurality of fragment images is at a second angle (see FIG. 140 and FIG. 146 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the fragment images are displayed.

[Form 10-8]
The gaming machine of form 10-8 is
In one variable display, both the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance can be executed,
The first predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed before the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
The second predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed after the decoration identification information becomes a reach state,
When the first predetermined performance is executed before the execution of the second predetermined performance, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the first predetermined performance is not executed (see Figures 90 to 93).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the first predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-9]
The gaming machine of form 10-9 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state and displayed,
In the third predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack stage in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack stage in the third predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 120 and 126).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 11-1]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a non-transparent manner that makes it difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image in an overlapping relationship,
The fragment image in the fourth predetermined part is a transparent image through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIGS. 105, 102, 103, 122, and 120).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, because the display manner of the fragment images differs between the first and second predetermined effects, even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions in an advantageous manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 12-1]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and third predetermined parts have different execution periods,
the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner moving in a plurality of directions, at least the predetermined direction and the specific direction;
the fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the fragment image displayed moving in a predetermined direction;
A fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the fourth predetermined part takes a longer time to disappear from the display area of the display means than a fragment image displayed moving in a specific direction in the second predetermined part (see Figures 102, 103, 110, 111, 120, and 126).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, while the direction in which the fragment images move is the same in the predetermined effect and the specific effect, the period of time required for them to disappear is different, so that even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions and increase interest in the game.

[Form 13-1]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a first crack form in response to a movement of the object image, a second predetermined part that changes the crack precursor image from the first crack form to a second crack form in response to a movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined effect includes a fourth predetermined part that displays an object image and displays a crack precursor image of a third crack type in response to a movement of the object image, and a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image in response to a movement of the object image.
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The first and fourth predetermined parts have different execution periods,
After the second predetermined part is executed, the third predetermined part is executed or not executed,
The period from the start of the second predetermined part to the transition to the third predetermined part is longer than the period from the start of the fourth predetermined part to the transition to the fifth predetermined part,
In the third predetermined part, the fragment image requires a first period from when it is displayed until when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means;
In the fifth predetermined part, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period from when it is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 102, 103, 106, 107, 123, and 120).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, since the period from when the object image is displayed to when the fragment images are displayed, and the display period of the fragment images, are different between the first and second predetermined effects, even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 13-2]
The gaming machine of form 13-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be displayed in a first crack form according to the movement of the object image,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the third pre-crack state to the third crack state and displayed (see FIG. 106 and FIG. 102).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 14-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
The second predetermined effect includes a third predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a fourth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
The second predetermined performance can be executed at a specific timing after the first predetermined performance is executed,
The first and third predetermined parts have the same execution period,
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part have the same length of the execution period,
When executing the second predetermined performance after the first predetermined performance, the fragment image displayed in the second predetermined part is made non-displayable in the display area of the display means, and then the third predetermined part is started (see Figs. 99, 100, and 118).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display a crack precursor image and a fragment image, can be executed consecutively, thereby continuously giving the player surprises, and further, since the third predetermined part starts after the fragment image in the second predetermined part has gone invisible, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the presentation effect caused by a new crack precursor image being displayed even when a fragment image is already being displayed.

[Form 14-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image in the fourth predetermined part are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction;
The position where the display of the image fragment starts is different between the second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part (see FIGS. 99, 100, and 141).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 14-3]
The gaming machine of form 14-3 is
The second predetermined part and the fourth predetermined part can commonly display a special image together with the fragment image,
The special image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a first manner,
The special image in the fourth predetermined part is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner (see FIG. 99(F) and FIG. 100(F)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special image is displayed differently between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 14-4]
The gaming machine of form 14-4 is
The second and fourth predetermined parts have different lengths of the display period of the fragment images, but have the same length of the display period of the special image (see FIG. 118 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images are displayed differently between the first and second predetermined presentations, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 14-5]
The gaming machine of form 14-5 is
There is a first pattern in which the second predetermined performance is executed after the first predetermined performance is executed, and a second pattern in which the second predetermined performance is not executed after the first predetermined performance is executed,
The rate at which the game progresses according to the first pattern is controlled to an advantageous state is higher than the rate at which the game progresses according to the second pattern (see FIG. 84 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the second predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-6]
The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed in a manner of moving without a change in speed throughout a display period of the fragment image,
The image fragments in the fourth predetermined part are displayed in a manner that does not involve a change in speed throughout the display period of the image fragments (see FIG. 129 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the relevance between the first and second predetermined effects can be increased, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-7-1]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-1 is
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part transitions to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when the third predetermined part transitions to a fourth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is common between the first timing and the second timing (see Fig. 99(C), Fig. 100(C), Fig. 118).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance is increased, and the effects of both performances can be improved.

[Form 14-7-2]
The gaming machine of form 14-7-2 is
The effect image displayed at the first timing and the effect image displayed at the second timing have the same display period (see FIG. 118 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the correlation between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance is increased, and the effects of both performances can be improved.

[Form 15-1]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When it is notified by the notification performance that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, a crack precursor image of a second crack form is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image are displayed;
the fragment image in the second predetermined part requires a first period of time until it is no longer displayed in the display area of the display means;
When the notification effect notifies the player that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state, the fragment image requires a second period different from the first period until it is hidden in the display area of the display means (see FIGS. 102, 103, 115, 120, and 128(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of surprise; furthermore, by displaying the crack precursor image together with a fragment image that takes a different amount of time to disappear than the fragment image in the predetermined effect, it is possible to notify the player that the game is not being properly controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 15-2]
The gaming machine of form 15-2 is
The display period of the breakage precursor image when it is notified that the ball is not controlled to the advantageous state is longer than that of the breakage precursor image in the first predetermined part (see FIG. 120).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to effectively indicate that the control is not in an advantageous state.

[Form 15-3]
The gaming machine of form 15-3 is
Among the plurality of image fragments in the second predetermined part, there is a first image fragment having the largest display size;
a second fragment image having the largest display size among the plurality of fragment images when it is notified that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
The display size of the first fragment image is larger than that of the second fragment image (see, for example, FIG. 103(J) and FIG. 115(D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed differently, which can enhance interest.

[Form 15-4]
The gaming machine of form 15-4 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part is an image in a transparent mode through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized,
When it is notified that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, the fragment image is a transparent image through which at least a part of the background image in a superimposed relationship can be recognized (see FIG. 130).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragment images can be displayed differently, which can enhance interest.

[Form 15-5]
The gaming machine of form 15-5 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined part and the fragment image when it is notified that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction (for example, see FIG. 75 and FIG. 134).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way the fragment images are displayed can be made relevant, enhancing interest.

[Form 15-6]
The gaming machine of form 15-6 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at a first timing when the first predetermined part is shifted to a second predetermined part and at a second timing when a fragment image is displayed when it is notified that the game is not controlled in an advantageous state;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 102(G) and FIG. 115(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide differences in the display patterns of the effect images, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 16-1]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When the notification effect notifies the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, a crack precursor image of a second crack mode can be displayed.
When the crack precursor image of the first crack type is displayed, the light emitting means emits light in a first light emitting pattern;
When the crack precursor image of the second crack form is displayed, the light emitting means emits light in a second light emitting pattern;
The light emission of the light emitting means in the first light emitting pattern continues until a second predetermined part is executed;
The light emission of the light emitting means according to the second light emission pattern continues until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the notification performance in which it is not controlled to the advantageous state ends (see FIG. 102, FIG. 103, FIG. 115, FIG. 120, FIG. 128(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image, thereby giving the player a surprise, and further, by using the crack precursor image and a second light-emitting pattern that continues until a predetermined condition is met after the notification effect ends, it is possible to notify the player that the reel is not being properly controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
When the notification effect notifies the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, a crack precursor image of a second crack mode can be displayed.
The type of background image is different before the first predetermined part is executed and when the fragment image is displayed in the second predetermined part (see FIGS. 102(A) to 102(F) and 103(I) to 103(K)).
The display mode of the background image is different before the notification of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state by the notification effect and when the fragment image is displayed when it is notified that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state (see FIGS. 115(A), 115(B), 115(D), 120, and 128(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect that displays a crack precursor image, thereby giving the player a surprise, and further, by using the crack precursor image and changing the display mode of the background image before it is notified whether or not control will be exercised in an advantageous state, it is possible to notify the player that control will not be exercised appropriately in an advantageous state.

[Form 18-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type in response to a movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a second crack type, a fifth predetermined part that starts a first operation of the movable body, and a sixth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
In the sixth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body ends after the fragment image becomes invisible in the display area of the display means (see Figs. 102, 103, 105, 120, and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment image, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times, and furthermore, by displaying the crack precursor image and then operating the movable body to display the fragment image, it is possible to provide a powerful presentation.

[Form 18-2]
The gaming machine of form 18-2 is
In the first predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state and displayed,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 120 and 122).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 18-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-1 is
A specific color effect image can be displayed in common at a first timing when the second predetermined part transitions to a third predetermined part and at a second timing when the fifth predetermined part transitions to a sixth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 102(G) and FIG. 105(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide differences in the display patterns of the effect images, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 18-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-2 is
The first action is an action in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
When the movable body is placed at the advanced position, the display of the effect image is started (see FIG. 105(C) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, thereby enhancing the effect of the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 18-3-3]
The gaming machine of form 18-3-3 is
The period of the first movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the sixth predetermined part is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 122 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 18-4]
The gaming machine of form 18-4 is
A suggestion effect that suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body, which is different from the second predetermined effect, can be executed;
A movable body emphasizing image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body in accordance with the movement of the movable body,
While a movable body emphasis image is displayed in association with the movement of the movable body in the suggestion performance, a movable body emphasis image is not displayed in association with the first movement of the movable body in the fifth predetermined part (see FIG. 122 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 19-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of a first crack type in response to a movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image.
The second predetermined performance includes a fourth predetermined part that displays a crack precursor image of the second crack type together with the first movement of the movable body, and a fifth predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
In the fifth predetermined part, the movable body starts a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body ends before the fragment image becomes invisible in the display area of the display means (see Figs. 102, 103, 113, 114, 120, and 128(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment image, can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times, and further, by operating the movable body to display the crack precursor image, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form 19-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-2 is
The crack precursor image can be changed from a first pre-crack state to a first crack state in the first predetermined part,
In the fourth predetermined part, the crack precursor image can be changed from the second pre-crack state to the second crack state and displayed,
The period until the crack precursor image changes from the first crack pre-stage state to the first crack state in the first predetermined part and the period until the crack precursor image changes from the second crack pre-stage state to the second crack state in the fourth predetermined part are different in length (see Figures 120 and 128).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form.

[Form 19-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-1 is
An effect image of a specific color can be displayed in common at a first timing when the second predetermined part transitions to a third predetermined part and at a second timing when the fourth predetermined part transitions to a fifth predetermined part;
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first timing and the second timing (see FIG. 102(G) and FIG. 113(E)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display pattern of the effect image can be made different between the first predetermined performance and the second predetermined performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 19-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-2 is
The second action is an action in which the movable body moves from the advanced position toward the origin position,
When the second action is started, the display of the effect image is started (see FIG. 113(F) );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, thereby enhancing the effect of the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 19-3-3]
The gaming machine of form 19-3-3 is
The period of the second movement of the movable body is longer than the display period of the effect image,
The display period of the fragment image in the fifth predetermined part is longer than the period of the second movement of the movable body (see FIG. 128 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 19-4]
The gaming machine of form 19-4 is
A suggestion effect that suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body, which is different from the second predetermined effect, can be executed;
A movable body emphasizing image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body in accordance with the movement of the movable body,
While a movable body emphasis image is displayed in association with the movement of the movable body in the suggestion performance, a movable body emphasis image is not displayed in association with the first movement of the movable body in the fourth predetermined part (see FIG. 128 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of the second predetermined effect from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 20-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays an object image, a second predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image according to the movement of the object image, and a third predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the cracking precursor image.
The specific performance is a performance in which, in response to a first action of the movable body, a display of a plurality of fragment images is started in a period shorter than a period from when a crack precursor image is displayed in a predetermined performance to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing is different between the specified performance and the specific performance.
In a specific performance, the movable body can execute a second action different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body is started after the fragment image is hidden in the display area of the display means (see Figures 102, 103, 109, 120, and 125).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined effect and the specific effect that display the crack precursor image and the fragment image can be executed at different times, so that the player can be surprised at various times. Furthermore, by operating the movable body to display the fragment image without displaying the crack precursor image, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form 20-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 20-2-1 is
The first action is an action in which the movable body moves from the origin position toward the advanced position,
When the first action is started, the display of the effect image is started (see FIG. 109(B) );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by linking the movement of the movable body with the display of the effect image, a sense of unity is created, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of a particular presentation.

[Form 20-2-2]
The gaming machine of form 20-2-2 is
the effect image can be displayed over a display period including the first display period and the second display period;
The length of the first operation period of the movable body and the length of the first display period of the effect image are substantially the same,
The display period of the fragment image in the specific performance is longer than the period of the first movement of the movable body (see FIG. 125 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the effect of the specific presentation.

[Form 20-3]
The gaming machine of form 20-3 is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that is different from the specific effect and suggests that the movable body will be controlled to an advantageous state by operating the movable body,
A movable body emphasizing image can be displayed in a display area superimposed on the movable body in accordance with the movement of the movable body,
While a moving body emphasis image is displayed in association with the movement of the moving body in the suggestion performance, a moving body emphasis image is not displayed in association with the first movement of the moving body in the specific performance (see FIG. 125 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect of a particular presentation from being reduced by the moving body emphasis image.

[Form 21-1]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a first crack type,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a second crack type,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
Even if a crack precursor image of the first crack form or the second crack form is displayed, the background image can be visually recognized together with the crack precursor image,
When the crack precursor image of the first crack aspect or the second crack aspect is not displayed, an image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than a predetermined display layer is displayed with a first visibility,
The background image when the crack precursor image of the first crack aspect is displayed is displayed with a second visibility lower than the first visibility,
When the crack precursor image of the second crack mode is displayed, an image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than a predetermined display layer is displayed with the second visibility over a predetermined range, and is displayed with the first visibility over a specific range different from the predetermined range (see FIGS. 102(E), (F), 104(C), 120, and 121).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display crack precursor images with different crack patterns, can be executed at different times, allowing the player to be surprised at a variety of times.Furthermore, since the visibility of the background image that can be viewed together with the crack precursor image varies depending on the type of crack pattern, even effects that display similar crack precursor images can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 21-2]
The gaming machine of form 21-2 is
The boundary between the predetermined range and the specific range can be displayed with a third visibility higher than the first visibility and the second visibility (see the enlarged view of FIG. 104(C) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect of the second predetermined effect can be enhanced.

[Form 21-3]
The gaming machine of form 21-3 is
A corresponding image corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
When the crack precursor image is displayed in the second crack mode, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed on a predetermined range and is not displayed superimposed on a specific range (see FIG. 104(C) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the corresponding image can be suitably displayed even during execution of the second predetermined performance.

[Form 21-4]
The gaming machine of form 21-4 is
The display period of the crack precursor image of the second crack form is longer than the display period of the crack precursor image of the first crack form (see FIG. 121 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the way in which the crack precursor image is displayed can be made different between the first and second predetermined effects, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 22-1]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a first crack type,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a second crack type,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The visibility of the background image is different when the crack precursor image of the first crack aspect is displayed and when the crack precursor image of the second crack aspect is displayed,
The crack precursor image of the second crack type has a longer display period than the crack precursor image of the first crack type,
There are multiple types of crack precursor images for the second crack type.
The expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher when a crack precursor image of the second type of the second crack mode is displayed than when a crack precursor image of the first type of the second crack mode is displayed (see Figures 101 to 103, 119, and 120).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display crack precursor images with different crack patterns, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times, and furthermore, the player will be drawn to the type of crack precursor image with the second crack pattern, so that even effects that display similar crack precursor images can give a suitably different impression, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 22-2]
The gaming machine of form 22-2 is
When a crack precursor image of the first type of the second crack form is displayed, the visibility of the background image displayed below the predetermined display layer is different from that when a crack precursor image of the second type of the second crack form is displayed (see Figures 102 and 101).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the crack precursor image can be displayed differently, which can enhance interest.

[Form 22-3]
The gaming machine of form 22-3 is
The first and second predetermined effects can display an effect image of a specific color in common,
The display pattern of the effect image is different between the first predetermined performance and the second timing predetermined performance (see FIG. 102 and FIG. 101).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide differences in the display patterns of the effect images, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 23-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
A change effect can be executed to change the display mode of the corresponding image corresponding to the variable display,
The predetermined performance includes a first predetermined performance and a second predetermined performance,
The display means is
A corresponding image corresponding to a variable display can be displayed in the special display layer;
The first crack precursor image can be displayed in a first predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
The second crack precursor image can be displayed on a second predetermined display layer having a lower priority than the special display layer,
A special display layer having a higher priority than the first predetermined display layer can display special information related to the variable display,
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a first crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a second crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
When the first crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases,
When the second crack precursor image is displayed, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease,
When the first predetermined performance is executed, the change performance is not executed,
When the second predetermined performance is executed, a change performance can be executed (see FIGS. 102 to 104, 120, 121, and 148).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first predetermined effect displaying the first cracking precursor image and the second predetermined effect displaying the second cracking precursor image can be executed at different timings, thereby allowing the player to be surprised at a variety of times; furthermore, even in effects that similarly display a cracking precursor image, the presence or absence of a display layer or a change effect differs, thereby giving a suitably different impression and increasing interest in the game.

[Form 23-2-1]
The gaming machine of form 23-2-1 is
The change effect is an effect in which a predetermined object image is displayed and the predetermined object image performs an action that acts on the corresponding display, thereby changing the display mode of the corresponding display;
The predetermined object image can be displayed on a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see FIG. 148 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the change presentation can be executed without reducing the presentation effect of the second predetermined presentation to a minimum.

[Form 23-2-2]
The gaming machine of form 23-2-2 is
In response to the action of a predetermined object image, a change emphasis image can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image in a display layer higher than the special display layer (see FIG. 148 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the change presentation can be preferably executed even during execution of the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
A first predetermined effect that suggests that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state can be executed,
A second predetermined effect that suggests that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state can be executed.
After the second predetermined performance is performed, a special performance can be performed.
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The first predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a first crack type and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The second predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a crack precursor image of a second crack type and displaying a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The first and second predetermined effects have different execution timings,
The display mode of the fragment image in the first predetermined performance is different from that of the fragment image in the second predetermined performance,
The fragment image in the second predetermined performance includes an image in a suggestive state suggesting that a special performance will be executed,
The display period of the fragment image in the second predetermined performance is longer than the display period of the fragment image in the first predetermined performance (see FIG. 102, FIG. 120, FIG. 125, FIG. 149, FIG. 150).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first and second predetermined effects, which display the crack precursor image and the fragment images, can be executed at different times, making it possible to surprise the player at various times; furthermore, the display manner of the fragment images differs between the first and second predetermined effects, and it is possible to increase the correlation between the fragment images in the second predetermined effect and the effect executed thereafter, so that even effects which similarly display fragment images can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 24-2]
The gaming machine of form 24-2 is
There are two special effects: the first special effect and the second special effect.
When the second special effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the first special effect is executed,
The suggestion mode includes a first suggestion mode suggesting that a first special performance will be executed and a second suggestion mode suggesting that a second special performance will be executed (see FIGS. 149, 150, and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-3-1]
The gaming machine of form 24-3-1 is
The fragment image in the second predetermined performance includes a suggestive mode and a transparent mode in which at least a part of a background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer can be seen,
The transparent fragment images are displayed more frequently than the suggestive fragment images (see FIG. 151 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-3-2]
The gaming machine of form 24-3-2 is
The fragment image is capable of performing a rotational movement;
In the second predetermined performance, the transparent fragment image has a larger rotation amount than the suggestive fragment image (see FIG. 151 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 24-4]
The gaming machine of form 24-4 is
The second predetermined performance includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part,
In the first predetermined part, a plurality of fragment images in a suggestive mode are displayed, and a plurality of fragment images in a transparent mode are displayed;
In the second predetermined part, a single fragment image in a suggestive mode is displayed, and a plurality of fragment images in a transparent mode are displayed (see FIG. 150 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the level of attention to the fragment image in the second predetermined presentation.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the pre-stage performance (FIG. 109(C)) can be executed.
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 137(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIGS. 137(B2) to (B5)),
The execution period of the first stage performance is longer than the display period of the cracked image of the first mode (see FIG. 125 and FIG. 137 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the preliminary effects create a build-up to the crack, and the crack image of the first mode gives a sense of speed, thereby achieving a suitable crack pattern.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
Before the predetermined performance is executed, the pre-stage performance (FIG. 109(C)) can be executed.
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 137(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIGS. 137(B2) to (B5)),
The combined period during which the cracked image is displayed in the first mode and the second mode is longer than the execution period of the first stage performance (see FIG. 125 and FIG. 137).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the period during which the cracked image is in the first and second modes is made longer than the execution period of the first stage performance, thereby making the cracked pattern more memorable.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
A third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer can display special information related to the variable display;
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image at least partially overlap each other,
The display period of the effect image is shorter than that of the cracked image,
During a display period of the effect image, it is difficult to visually recognize the cracked image over a first period, and the cracked image is visually recognized over a second period after the first period has elapsed;
The second period is longer than the first period (see Figures 118 to 128 and Figures 75 to 138).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image has a role of hiding the initial display portion of the cracked image, and while fulfilling this role, it prevents the effect image from being emphasized more than the cracked image.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
A third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer can display special information related to the variable display;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first aspect and then changing the cracked image from the first aspect to a second aspect,
The display means displays an effect image when displaying the cracked image of the first mode, and makes the effect image invisible at a timing before displaying the cracked image of the second mode (see FIGS. 118 to 128 and 75 to 138 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving an unnatural feeling.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 136(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIGS. 136(B2) to (B5)),
The transmittance of the cracked image of the second aspect is different between the first timing and the second timing in the display period of the cracked image of the second aspect (see FIG. 124 and FIG. 136 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the dramatic effect when the cracked image of the second aspect is displayed can be enhanced.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first aspect (FIG. 75(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first aspect to a second aspect (FIGS. 75(B2) to (B5)),
The specific effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of the third mode (FIG. 136(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third mode to a fourth mode (FIGS. 136(B2) to (B5)),
The transmittance of the cracked image at a predetermined timing after the display of the cracked image of the second aspect starts is different from that of the cracked image at a specific timing after the display of the cracked image of the fourth aspect starts (see FIGS. 120, 124, 75, 136, and 140(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced when the cracked image of the second aspect is displayed and when the cracked image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of embodiment 31 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect is an effect that can be executed in a normal state, and includes displaying a cracked image of a first mode (FIG. 75(B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the first mode to a second mode (FIGS. 75(B2) to (B5)),
The specific effect is an effect that can be executed in a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state, and includes displaying a cracked image of a third mode (FIG. 136 (B1)), and then changing the cracked image from the third mode to a fourth mode (FIGS. 136 (B2) to (B5)).
The transmittance of the cracked image at a predetermined timing after the display of the cracked image of the second aspect starts is different from that of the cracked image at a specific timing after the display of the cracked image of the fourth aspect starts (see Figures 87 to 89, 120, 124, 75, 136, and 140(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect can be enhanced when the cracked image of the second aspect is displayed and when the cracked image of the fourth aspect is displayed.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
A background image can be displayed on a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The light emission control means includes:
When the cracked image is displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is controlled using the specific brightness data table;
A specific luminance data table is used to control the light emission of the light-emitting means until a specific timing during the display period of the cracked image, and after the specific timing, a luminance data table corresponding to the background image is used to control the light emission of the light-emitting means (see FIGS. 118 to 120 and 123 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably control the light emission of the light emitting means when a broken image is displayed.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of embodiment 33 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
A third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer can display special information related to the variable display;
The display period of the effect image and the display period of the cracked image at least partially overlap each other,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image at the timing when the effect image is displayed (see FIGS. 118 to 124 ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can enhance the dramatic effect when the cracked image is displayed.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
the sound output means, when a cracked image is displayed in the first pattern, outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 118), while, when a cracked image is displayed in the second pattern, does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 125);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed in a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of embodiment 35 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The sound output means outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image when the cracked image is displayed in the first pattern (see FIG. 118), and outputs a sound notifying the player that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state when the cracked image is displayed in the second pattern (see FIG. 128).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed in a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions according to the gaming status.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of embodiment 36 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
the crack precursor image is an image that can be displayed at a timing before the crack image is displayed when the crack image is displayed in the first pattern;
the sound output means, when a cracked image is displayed in the first pattern, outputs a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 118), while, when a cracked image is displayed in the second pattern, does not output a sound corresponding to the cracked image (see FIG. 125);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the cracked image can be displayed in a plurality of display patterns that give different impressions.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of embodiment 37 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The sound output means is
A predetermined sound can be output when the crack precursor image is displayed,
A specific sound can be output when a cracked image is displayed.
The specific sound output by the sound output means is a sound louder than the predetermined sound (see FIG. 145 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a contrast between when the crack precursor image is displayed and when the cracked image is displayed, and to favorably create an impression when the cracked image is displayed.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of embodiment 38 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A sound output means,
The display means is
The object image can be displayed in the special display layer;
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer,
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
It is possible to display a cracking precursor image in conjunction with the motion display of the object image,
The sound output means is
When the cracking precursor image is displayed, a sound corresponding to the object image can be output;
When a cracked image is displayed, a sound corresponding to the cracked image can be output (see FIG. 145).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to provide a contrast between when the crack precursor image is displayed and when the cracked image is displayed, and to favorably create an impression when the cracked image is displayed.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of embodiment 39 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the fragment image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
In the first pattern, the amount of variation is a specific value, so that the motion speed of the fragment image of a first size in the first pattern is different from that of the fragment image of a second size smaller than the first size,
In the second pattern, the amount of variation is 0, so that the motion speed of the fragment image of the third size in the second pattern is the same as that of the fragment image of a fourth size smaller than the third size (see FIGS. 130 and 131 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first pattern is a cracking pattern in which the animation effect varies depending on the size, with small fragment images flying quickly and large fragment images being somewhat slower and falling quickly, and can be used when it is desired to show realistic movement, while the second pattern is a cracking pattern in which all fragments are affected by the animation in the same way regardless of size, flying and falling in the same way, allowing the appropriate cracking pattern to be selected depending on the scene.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The image of the debris is displayed in a falling manner from the beginning of the display,
The display pattern of the fragment image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The gravity value is set differently between the first pattern and the second pattern, so that the speed at which the image fragments fall is different (see FIGS. 130 and 131 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by varying the parameter value and varying the speed at which the fragment images fall, a variety of patterns can be created, enhancing the dramatic effect.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the fragment image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
Since the gravity direction is set differently between the first pattern and the second pattern, the moving direction of the fragment images when they are displayed is different (see FIGS. 130 and 131 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by varying the parameter values and changing the direction in which the fragment images move, a variety of patterns can be created, enhancing the dramatic effect.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The fragment image display patterns include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern,
the first pattern includes a first parameter related to displaying the fragment image and a second parameter related to displaying the fragment image;
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern have a common value of the first parameter and different values of the second parameter (see FIGS. 130 and 131 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the value of the first parameter is fixed, creating common parts for the fragment images, while the value of the second parameter is varied to create a variety of patterns, thereby making it possible to create a stable and diverse display pattern for the fragment images.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The fragment image display patterns include a first pattern, a second pattern, and a third pattern,
the first pattern includes a first parameter related to displaying the fragment image and a second parameter related to displaying the fragment image;
The second pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The third pattern includes a first parameter and a second parameter,
The first pattern and the second pattern have a common value of a first parameter and different values of a second parameter,
The second and third patterns have different values of the first parameter and have a common value of the second parameter (see FIGS. 130 and 131 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by creating common parts for the image fragments in each pattern while configuring them with different parameter values, it is possible to construct stable and diverse display patterns for the image fragments.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
before the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and after the cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different;
The type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see FIGS. 87, 89, 102 to 104).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the cracked image is displayed in the normal state and when the cracked image is displayed in the special state, different impressions are given, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
A third display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer can display special information related to the variable display;
The predetermined effect is an effect including displaying a cracked image of a first aspect and then changing the cracked image from the first aspect to a second aspect,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state;
An effect image is displayed when the cracked image of the first mode is displayed, and the effect image is made non-displayed at a timing before the cracked image of the second mode is displayed (see Figs. 87, 89, 102, and 103).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving an unnatural feeling.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The crack image displayed by the first pattern and the crack image displayed by the second pattern are commonly displayed in a manner of moving in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction and a specific direction,
The moving speed of the crack image displayed by the first pattern is different from that of the crack image displayed by the second pattern (see FIGS. 87, 89, 102 to 104).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect during the special state can be enhanced by using a display pattern of the cracked images that does not disrupt the tempo of the special state.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The cracked image according to the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state,
The cracked image according to the second pattern can be displayed in a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The degree of expectation that is controlled to be in an advantageous state when a cracked image is displayed by the first pattern is different from the degree of expectation that is controlled to be in an advantageous state when a cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 84, 86(C), 87, and 89).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the display pattern of the cracked image, so that the display pattern of the cracked image can draw attention.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed on a predetermined display layer;
A second type of fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
a display period of the first type of fragment image and a display period of the second type of fragment image at least partially overlap each other;
The first type of fragment image is in a form in which a character is drawn,
The second type of fragment image is in a transparent state that allows recognition of at least a part of a background image displayed on a display layer lower than the specific display layer (see FIGS. 137 and 151 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by overlapping the display periods of two types of fragment images having different display modes, it is possible to provide a memorable presentation.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of embodiment 49 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A plurality of first type fragment images can be displayed on a predetermined display layer;
A second type of fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer;
a display period of the first type of fragment image and a display period of the second type of fragment image at least partially overlap each other;
The first type of fragment image and the second type of fragment image have different display modes,
The display period of the first type of image fragment is longer than the display period of the second type of image fragment (see FIGS. 137 and 151 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by overlapping the display periods of two types of fragment images having different display modes, it is possible to provide a memorable presentation.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
the movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing the display area of the display means;
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap each other,
The fragment images displayed in the first area, which is a display area where the movable body is not overlapped, are displayed in a larger amount than the fragment images displayed in the second area, which is a display area where the movable body is overlapped (see Figures 137 and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the fragments can be displayed appropriately while the movable body overlaps with the display area of the display means.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of embodiment 51 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
the movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing the display area of the display means;
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap each other,
a first fragment image of the plurality of fragment images is displayed in a manner of moving from a first region, which is a display region where the movable object is not overlapped, to a second region, which is a display region where the movable object is overlapped;
A second image fragment of the plurality of image fragments is displayed in a manner moving within the first area so as not to enter the second area (see FIGS. 137 and 151 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a fragment image that does not enter the area where the movable body overlaps allows the viewer to recognize that the object has broken, while a fragment image that passes through the area where the movable body overlaps provides a dynamic presentation.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means,
The display means is
A plurality of fragment images can be displayed in a specific display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
the movable body is capable of performing an operation of superimposing the display area of the display means;
The display period of the fragment image and the operation period of the movable body at least partially overlap each other,
Even after the movable body overlapping the display area of the display means is moved to a position where it is not overlapped with the display area, the fragment image continues to be displayed (see Figs. 137 and 151).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while the movable body overlaps with the display area of the display means, the image of the fragment can be displayed in an appropriate manner so that the image of the fragment is not overlooked.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of embodiment 53 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A performance execution means,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The display means is
A crack precursor image can be displayed in a predetermined display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays a cracking precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a first type of fragment image corresponding to the cracking precursor image,
the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of second type fragment images when the crack precursor image is displayed;
The second type of fragment image takes a shorter period of time to disappear from the display area of the display means than the first type of fragment image (see FIGS. 106 and 107 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation effect of displaying the fragment images can be improved.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A specific character can be displayed in the special display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with an action of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character,
before the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of cracked image is displayed by the first pattern, the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different;
The type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 102, 103, and 108).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the specific character appears in common in the display patterns of the multiple cracked images, the specific character attracts more attention.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of embodiment 55 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
An effect image can be displayed in the first display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed on a second display layer having a lower priority than the first display layer,
A specific character can be displayed on a third display layer having a lower priority than the second display layer,
A fourth display layer having a higher priority than the first display layer can display special information related to the variable display;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed when the specific character makes an action;
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed when the specific character makes an action,
The display means is
When the first type of cracked image is displayed according to the first pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with an action of a specific character, and the effect image is made non-displayable at a predetermined timing after the first type of cracked image is displayed;
When the second type of cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character, and the effect image is made non-displayable at a specific timing after the second type of cracked image is displayed (see Figs. 102, 103, and 108).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the effect image hides the initial display portion of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving an unnatural feeling.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of embodiment 56 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A specific character can be displayed in the special display layer;
The fragment image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the fragment image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of fragment image is displayed in multiple images in response to an action of a specific character;
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of fragment image is displayed in multiple numbers in conjunction with the action of a specific character,
the first type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that changes and moves from a first speed to a second speed over a display period of the first type of fragment image,
The second type of fragment image is displayed in a manner that moves without any change in speed throughout the display period of the second type of fragment image (see Figs. 102, 103, and 108).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the speed at which the fragment images move can be changed depending on the type of display pattern of the fragment images, thereby improving the dramatic effect.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57 is
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means is provided,
The display means is
A specific character can be displayed in the special display layer;
A cracked image can be displayed in a specific display layer having a higher priority than the special display layer;
Special information regarding the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer;
The display pattern of the cracked image includes a first pattern and a second pattern,
The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with an action of a specific character,
The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of cracked image is displayed in conjunction with the action of a specific character,
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state is different when a cracked image is displayed by the first pattern and when a cracked image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 102, 103, 106, and 107).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the expectation for the specific character is heightened, and interest is enhanced by drawing attention to the display pattern of the cracked image after the specific character is displayed.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 58 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by being shot from a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

In addition, a display area 5S is provided at the top left of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small pattern corresponding to the decorative pattern, and the small pattern is displayed variably in response to the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the reserved display, the small symbol, the error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the right-hit notification image that encourages the player to perform a right-hit operation, the time-saving remaining display that indicates the number of times the time-saving function is remaining, etc. may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer) the presentation images (object images) such as characters to prevent the presentation images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the small symbol, and the error display, while the decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer) the presentation images to prevent the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the presentation images.

The small pattern is also called the fourth pattern. The fourth pattern is displayed variably by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 as a pattern indicating that the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) are variably displayed. By variably displaying the fourth pattern, it is possible to recognize whether or not the decorative pattern is currently being variably displayed even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when the performance content including the variable display of the decorative pattern disappears from the screen for a moment, or when the movable body 32 covers all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the first special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Also, the performance control CPU 120 performs the variably display of the fourth pattern corresponding to the second special pattern by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there are provided display areas (special pattern reserved memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying reserved displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are being executed. The reserved displays and active displays are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding to variable displays. In this embodiment, a special pattern reserved memory display area 5U common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided, but a first special pattern reserved memory display area in which a first reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the first special pattern is pending is displayed, and a second special pattern reserved memory display area in which a second reserved display representing a variable display whose execution of the second special pattern is pending may be provided separately. In this embodiment, the special pattern reserved memory display area 5U is a display area that displays a reserved display corresponding to the first special pattern when the game state is in a normal state, and is a display area that displays a reserved display corresponding to the second special pattern when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state. Furthermore, the active display area 5F is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the first special symbol when the game state is in the normal state, and is a display area that displays an active display corresponding to the second special symbol when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability bonus state.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 59). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric device having a movable piece that can be opened and closed, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in an upright position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the above, as long as it can be changed between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 58, three locations at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are general winning openings 10 that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 59), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 58). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and side lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area, and a button lamp 9e is provided below the game board 2. The main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 58), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided, and a movable body lamp 9d is provided on the movable body 32. An attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f provided on the game board 2 are also called "board lamps." The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, button lamp 9e, and decorative lamp 9f are composed of LEDs (see FIG. 93). The various lamps will be described later.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 59).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 59).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss".

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times, 2 times, etc.) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 59. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The payout control board 006SG030 is connected to a payout device 006SG031 that is driven to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to a player based on receiving a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor 006SG032 that is provided in a payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls paid out by the payout device 006SG031 pass, and it is possible to stop driving the payout device 006SG031 depending on the state of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor 006SG032.

The payout control board 006SG030 is also connected to a handle sensor 006SG034 for detecting the amount of operation by the player, and a touch ring 006SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting that the player is gripping the ball-hitting operation handle 30. Based on signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 006SG030 controls a launching device 006SG033 capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2. A signal indicating whether the touch ring 006SG35 is being detected and a signal indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launching device 006SG033 are input from the payout control board 006SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. It also performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area assigned as the drawing area in one V blank, and then switched to the display image creation area in the next V blank, so that the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output, while drawing is performed in the other area during that time.

As shown in FIG. 60, the display control unit 123 generates images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by superimposing (compositing) multiple layers, so the VRAM area is provided with a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating images to be displayed on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (compositing) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer image drawing area has the concept of upper, middle, and lower, and the higher the layer image drawing area, the higher the display priority is set on the image display device 5, and the lower the layer image drawing area, the lower the display priority is set on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 61, the VRAM area includes a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image as an image of layer 1, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a decorative pattern as an image of layer 2, a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an object image such as a character as an image of layer 3, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a precursor image of a crack (such as a glass plate image 006SG301) as described later as an image of layer 4, a glass plate image 006SG301A as an image to be broken that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a fragment image 006SG301A that will be generated when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken as an image of layer 5. 302, a layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an action effect image described later as an image of layer 6, a layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a whiteout image 006SG303 described later as an image of layer 7, a layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an operation prompt image described later as an image of layer 8, a layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a variable display compatible display (reserved display and active display) as an image of layer 9, and a layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a small pattern (fourth pattern), the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a right hit notification image as an image of layer 10. In addition, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

The glass plate image 006SG301 drawn and placed in the layer 4 image drawing area is an image that makes the player realize that the display area of the image display device 5 has been cracked by the action of the character or movable object 32, and the glass plate image 006SG301A drawn and placed in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image that makes the player realize that the display area of the image display device 5 has been broken. The broken piece image 006SG302 is an image in which a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is changed and displayed to emphasize to the player that the display area of the image display device 5 has been broken by the action of the character or movable object 32.

The glass plate image 006SG301 is an image that is not displayed at the start timing (the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A) of the cracking effects in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, which will be described later. The glass plate image 006SG301A is also an image (the image to be cracked) that is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 at the start timing (the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A) of the cracking effects in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, which will be described later.

Furthermore, as described below, the start timing of the cracking effects in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect is such that the switching between the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not visible to the player due to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, in this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 with the crack displayed can be switched to the glass plate image 006SG301A without the player noticing, so it is possible to realize a crack (moving display of the fragment image 006SG302) that would not be expected from the crack displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301, and it is possible to make a strong impression of the cracking effect on the player.

In this embodiment, an image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the images drawn and arranged in these layer 1 image drawing area to layer 10 image drawing area. Also, as shown in Figures 61 and 62, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is set to the lowest display priority, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is set to a higher display priority than the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 5 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 6 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 7 image drawing area, images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 8 image drawing area, and images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 9 image drawing area. Also, if a Layer 11 image drawing area is further placed in the VRAM area, images drawn in the Layer 11 image drawing area are set to have a higher display priority than images drawn in the Layer 10 image drawing area.

That is, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image displayed at the lowest level in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is the image displayed (priority displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area. The image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area in the image display device 5, and the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area in the image display device 5. Furthermore, if a layer 11 image drawing area is further disposed in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 11 image drawing area is an image displayed (preferentially displayed) above the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area in the image display device 5. Also, while it has been explained that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image, a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a layer 1-3 image drawing area may be provided instead of the layer 1 image drawing area. In this case, the layer 1-1 image drawing area can draw a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image) described later, the layer 1-2 image drawing area can draw a chance background image (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), a normal reach background image, a super reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088), and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) described later, and the layer 1-3 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG322), a large It is possible to draw a hit notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085), and the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area.

In this embodiment, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the upper image makes the overlapping area of the lower image invisible to the player; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transmittance (transparency) of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images may be displayed transparently on the display screen of the image display device 5 or temporarily hidden.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 60 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 60 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 63(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 63(B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the determination result of which of several types of jackpot type should be selected when the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 63(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stopping (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on designation command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been cold started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed (power-on with initialization)). Note that a cold start refers to a state in which the data is initialized when the power is turned on, without restoring the data before the power is turned on, and the gaming machine is in a state in which various processes can be executed. Command 9200H is a power outage recovery designation command that specifies that the pachinko gaming machine has been hot started (the power has been turned on with the clear switch 92 not pressed (power-on without initialization)). Note that a hot start refers to a state in which the gaming machine is in a state in which various processes can be executed based on the backed-up data when the power is turned on. A hot start is also called a power-on without initialization, since no initialization is involved. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor high probability control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but high probability control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state), and command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability control are performed (high probability high base state, high probability state). Note that the high probability high base state may simply be referred to as the "high probability state".

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "0" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a design specification command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, and the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden jackpot). Command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, whether the random number value used to judge the variation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other (normal reach)".

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 63(A) are just an example, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning slot to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 64 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 64, on the main board 11 side, numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the change pattern is a random number value used to determine the change pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "0" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 65 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result judgment table 22, when the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" when the pachinko game rr is in a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 66 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 66 (B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", and "Probable variable jackpot C", in which after the jackpot gaming state ends, probable variable control and time-saving control are executed to transition to a high-probability, high-base state, and "non-probable variable jackpot", in which after the jackpot gaming state ends, only time-saving control is executed to transition to a low-probability, high-base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The variable probability control and time-saving control that are started after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A to the variable probability jackpot C are ended on the condition that the state is controlled to the jackpot game state. In addition, the time-saving control that is started after the end of the non-variable probability jackpot game state is ended on the condition that 100 variable displays are ended, or that the state is controlled to the jackpot game state before the 100 variable displays are ended. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is any of the variable probability jackpot A to the variable probability jackpot C, the variable probability control and time-saving control are executed again after the jackpot game state ends, so that the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is called a consecutive state. In other words, the variable probability state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result becomes a jackpot regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays unless the variable display result becomes a jackpot. For this reason, the time-saving state is also the game state that is controlled when a winning streak may end.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 66(A), the allocation of the determination values for the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, while when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 66(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A", which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

67(A) and 67(B) show the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state (low probability low base state) and when the time-saving state or the probability change state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and for the case where the variable display result is "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called the non-reach variation pattern (also called the "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called the reach variation pattern (also called the "reach miss variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the miss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: normal reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a super reach is executed.

In this embodiment, when the game state is normal (low probability low base state), the following super reach variation patterns are provided: a pseudo consecutive performance including a temporary stop of the decorative symbol and a re-variable display is executed once during the variable display, and then the reach performance of Super Reach α is executed via a normal reach, and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2-2, PB1-2); a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed and the reach performance of Super Reach β is executed via a normal reach, and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2-3, PB1-3); and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, and then the reach performance of Super Reach β is executed via the reach performances of normal reach and Super Reach α, and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot (PA2-4, PB1-4). In this embodiment, the reach effect of Super Reach α corresponds to the Weak S reach effect described below, and the reach effect of Super Reach β corresponds to the Strong S reach effect A and Strong S reach effect B described below.

When the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), the super reach variation pattern includes a variation pattern (PA2-6, PB1-6) in which the reach effect of the super reach γ is executed via the normal reach, and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot, and a variation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-7) in which the reach effect of the super reach δ is executed via the normal reach, and the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot. In addition, the reach effect of the super reach γ in this embodiment corresponds to the weak S reach effect described later, and the reach effect of the super reach δ corresponds to the strong S reach effect A and the strong S reach effect B described later.

As shown in FIG. 67, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is set to have a higher chance of becoming a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the chance of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 68 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 68(A) to 68(D), when the game state is normal (low base state) and the variable display result is a miss, if the reserved memory number (same type reserved memory number) of the special symbol that executes the variable display is one or less, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table A and the value of the random number MR3, if the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is two, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number MR3, and if the reserved memory number of the special symbol that executes the variable display is three, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table C and the value of the random number MR3. Also, when the game state is time-saving state or high probability state (high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, the variation pattern is determined based on the miss variation pattern determination table D and the value of the random number MR3. Then, as shown in FIG. 68(E) and FIG. 68(F), when the game state is normal (low base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the value of the random number value MR3, and when the game state is time-saving state or high probability state (high base state) and the variable display result is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B and the value of the random number value MR3.

For example, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 660, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 661 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and if the value of random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern after executing one pseudo consecutive performance. If the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that goes through a normal reach and ends up with a Super Reach β miss, and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) that goes through a normal reach and Super Reach α after executing two pseudo consecutive performances and then ends up with a Super Reach β miss.

Also, as shown in FIG. 68(B), when the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 700, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 701 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once and then a normal reach results in a super reach α miss, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which a normal reach results in a super reach β miss, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice and then a normal reach and a super reach α results in a super reach β miss.

Also, as shown in FIG. 68(C), when the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 750, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a shortened non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once and then a normal reach results in a super reach α miss, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 971 to 990, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which a normal reach results in a super reach β miss, if the value of the random number value MR3 is within the range of 991 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice and then a normal reach and a super reach α results in a super reach β miss.

Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), when miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 300, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a short non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 301 to 550, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5), and if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 551 to 750, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA1-6), If the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 751 to 900, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-5); if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 901 to 970, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach followed by a super reach gamma miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-6); if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 971 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach followed by a super reach delta miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-7).

Also, as shown in FIG. 68(E), when the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 1 to 30, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 31 to 200, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) that results in a super reach α jackpot after one pseudo consecutive performance via normal reach, if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 201 to 500, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) that results in a super reach β jackpot via normal reach, and if the value of the random number MR3 is within the range of 501 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) that results in a super reach β jackpot after two pseudo consecutive performances via normal reach and super reach α.

Also, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), when jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 1 to 100, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5), if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 101 to 400, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) that results in a super reach γ jackpot via a normal reach, and if the value of random number value MR3 is within the range of 401 to 997, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) that results in a super reach δ jackpot via a normal reach.

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined at a rate of 1 regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of multiple variable patterns for jackpots may be different depending on the type of jackpot. In this way, the player can pay attention to which variable display of the variable pattern resulted in a jackpot, which can increase the interest in the game.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 59 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a specified period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 006SG150 as shown in FIG. 69 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 006SG150 shown in FIG. 69 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 006SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 006SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 006SG151C, a game control flag setting section 006SG152, a game control timer setting section 006SG153, a game control counter setting section 006SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 006SG155.

The first special symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151A stores the reserved data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started but in which a start winning (first start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, in the order of winning.

The second special symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151B stores the reserved data of special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, in which a start winning (second start winning) has occurred when a game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, but which have not yet started.

As an example, the first special chart reserve memory unit 006SG151A associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game balls) at the first start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In addition, the second special chart reserve memory unit 006SG151B associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) at the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of winning, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters) as reserved data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 006SG151A and the second special chart reserved memory unit 006SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart or a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display results (special chart display results) in these special chart games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port are stored in separate reserved memory units in association with the reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved memory information is executed in priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 006SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 006SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 006SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 006SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 006SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 59 stores not only a performance control program, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to make various judgments, decisions, and settings, pattern data constituting various performance control patterns, and the like.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is displayed variably, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 59 is provided with a performance control data holding area 006SG190 as shown in FIG. 70(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 006SG190 shown in FIG. 70(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 006SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 006SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 006SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 006SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 006SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 006SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 006SG194A as shown in FIG. 70 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 006SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 006SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special chart reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special chart being variably displayed. The start winning time receiving command buffer 006SG194A also has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special chart reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special chart being variably displayed. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), a pattern designation command, and a variable category command, are sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 006SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation command, reserved memory number notification command, pattern designation command, and variable category command separately in the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A in this embodiment, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a hold display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold memory display is set, and a continuous break effect flag that can identify whether or not the player is the target of the continuous break effect described below can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart hold memory and the second special chart hold memory.

In addition, in the hold display effect determination process described later, if the execution of the hold display effect is not determined, the hold display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal hold display display pattern, and if the execution of the hold display effect is determined, "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special form (e.g., square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display form is set. After the hold display effect determination process is executed, the hold display update process described later is executed, so that the active display and hold display are displayed in a display form according to each hold display flag (e.g., if the hold display flag value is "0", a white circle (○), if the hold display flag value is "1", a square (◇), and if the hold display flag value is "2", a star (☆). In addition, the value of the continuous break effect flag is set in the continuous break effect setting process (see FIG. 83) described later.

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 006SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 006SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command, the reserved memory number notification command, the pattern designation command, and the variable category command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command, the reserved memory number notification command, the pattern designation command, and the variable category command are stored in sequence in the storage areas corresponding to the last "0" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory or the second special symbol reserved memory.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A shown in FIG. 70(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that was just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 70(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations in the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 71, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by random number circuit setting processing (step S8). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was fluctuating, it is sufficient if the fluctuating special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S8), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, the process enters into a loop. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 72 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and if necessary, it is possible to issue a warning according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 72. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set for transmission in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 72.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In this embodiment, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the start winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. 73. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (006SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (006SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (006SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts in 006SGS102 is not the upper limit (006SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is set to "0" (006SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 006SGS101 (006SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 006SGS102 (006SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start entry port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (006SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (006SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (006SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in 006SGS105 (006SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 is set to "2" (006SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of 006SGS103 and 006SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (006SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (006SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 006SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 006SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 006SG154 (006SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the random numbers extracted in this way and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserved information at the top of the empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit (006SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 006SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 006SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (006SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "0", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 72 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of 006SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step 006SGS112), and then performs settings for sending a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (006SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 72 after the special pattern process process has ended.

After executing the process of 006SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (006SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is started. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 006SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (006SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. In this way, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

(Random value judgment process when winning)
FIG. 75(A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed in step 006SGS112 of FIG. 74 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 006SG, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, a determination is made by a special symbol normal process described later as to whether or not the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) is controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In addition, in a variable pattern setting process described later, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning hole (the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process of step 006SGS112 to determine whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns based on the detection of a gaming ball entering the starting winning hole begins, in other words, before it is decided whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special pattern display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on the result of this determination, the performance control CPU 120 or the like will execute a preview performance such as a pre-reading preview performance, as will be described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 75(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the probability variable flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 006SG152 (step 006SGS121). When the probability variable flag is on, the CPU 103 identifies the probability variable state (high probability, high base state), when the probability variable flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, the time-saving state (low probability, high base state), and when both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are off, the normal state (low probability base state).

Following the processing of step 006SGS121, the special chart display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 65 is selected and set (step 006SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for the special chart display result judgment extracted in step 006SGS109 of FIG. 74 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 006SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table selected by the processing of step 006SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 006SGS123 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 006SGS123; N), the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss" (step 006SGS128), is executed, and it is determined whether the time-saving flag is on or not, i.e., whether the current game state is either the time-saving state or the guaranteed bonus state (step 006SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS129; N), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS129; Y), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected and set (step 006SGS131).

In this embodiment, in addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, miss fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C are prepared in advance according to the number of reserved memories. As shown in FIG. 68, among these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, a determination value of 1 to 660 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern from the range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and in miss fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C, a determination value of 1 to 700 and 1 to 750 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern from the range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. On the other hand, in miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, a determination value of 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern from the range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination.

For this reason, in step 006SGS126, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, and the determination of non-reach and super reach will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so the determination at the time of the initial winning is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Also, if it is determined in step 006SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 006SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 75(A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 006SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

In addition, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type is executed (step 006SGS133), i.e., the second symbol designation command in the case of a sure jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the case of a sure jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command in the case of a sure jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command in the case of a non-variable jackpot, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set according to the game state as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 006SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS138. In addition, in the processing of step 006SGS135, if the game state is a normal state (low probability low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and if the game state is a time-saving state or a sure jackpot state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is set.

In the processing of step 006SGS138, the variable category is determined according to the range of determination values that includes the random number value MR3, using each variable pattern determination table set in each step and numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variable pattern (step 006SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that has a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved memories, a variable category that has a variable display mode of "super reach", and an "other" variable category that has a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), are provided, and it is sufficient to be able to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 006SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS132), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

(Special pattern normal processing)
Fig. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Fig. 73 as the normal special symbol process. In the normal special symbol process shown in Fig. 76, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory number is "0" or not (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read and judged whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; N), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out as reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the second special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 006SGS144), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "0" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 006SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "0" in the first special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry (step 006SGS147).

Then, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 006SGS148), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 65 is selected and set as a table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006SGS150). In addition, in this step 006SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability of winning is low and the probability flag is off (in this embodiment, the probability is low and the probability is high), if the random number value MR1 used to determine the result of the special chart display falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result judgment table selected in step 006SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to a "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 006SGS150, whether or not to set the special chart display result as a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, a "jackpot" is judged (determined) with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 006SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 66(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot type the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 006SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as a variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is to be controlled to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or a probability variable state (high probability high base state) which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by setting, for example, a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 006SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable A" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "0", if it is a "probability variable B" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot B, it is set to "2", and if it is a "probability variable C" corresponding to a probability variable jackpot C, it is set to "3". After processing step 006SGS155, proceed to step 006SGS156.

Also, if step 006SGS150 determines that the result is a miss (step 006SGS150; N), step 006SGS156 is executed without executing steps 006SGS152 to 006SGS155.

In step 006SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in response to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determined jackpot type in the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being a "miss", a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "high probability jackpot A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "high probability jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 006SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 73 as the variable pattern setting process. In the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 77, the CPU 103 selects a variable pattern determination table according to the state (step 006SGS161). For example, when the variable display result is a miss, if the game state is a normal state and the reserved memory number of the special pattern that executes the variable display is one, the miss variable pattern determination table A is selected, if the game state is a normal state and the reserved memory number of the special pattern that executes the variable display is two, the miss variable pattern determination table B is selected, if the game state is a normal state and the reserved memory number of the special pattern that executes the variable display is three, the miss variable pattern determination table C is selected, and if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the miss variable pattern determination table D is selected. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the game state is a normal state, the jackpot variable pattern determination table A is selected, and if the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the jackpot variable pattern determination table B is selected.

Then, based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in a fluctuation random number buffer, the selected (set) fluctuation pattern determination table is referenced to determine the fluctuation pattern as one of multiple types (step 006SGS162).

After the variation pattern is determined in step 006SGS162, settings are made to start the variation of the special patterns so that either a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B is started according to the variable special pattern designation buffer value (step 006SGS163). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 006SGS163, settings are made to send various commands for when the special symbol starts to change (step 006SGS164). For example, when the special symbol change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 in order to sequentially send the game state designation command, the first change start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 006SG155 in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the process of step 006SGS164, the special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern according to the result of the determination of the variation pattern, is set (step 006SGS165). The special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special pattern in the special pattern game to the fixed special pattern, which is the variable display result (special pattern display result), being displayed stationary. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special pattern variation process (step 006SGS166), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS166, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 72 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 73 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol by turning on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S113 (step 006SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the big win flag is turned on (step 006SGS182).

When the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step 006SGS182; Y), if the special probability flag or time-saving flag is in the ON state, the CPU 103 clears the special probability flag and time-saving flag to turn them OFF (step 006SGS184), and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (special probability jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (special probability jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (special probability jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-special probability jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 006SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 006SGS187). The number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 006SGS188). The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "4", which corresponds to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 006SGS189).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS191, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS191). If the time-saving flag is off (step 006SGS191; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the time-saving flag is on (step 006SGS191; Y), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0". If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS192; Y), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 006SGS192; N), that is, if the time-saving counter is in a high base state with remaining time-saving counts, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS193). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 006SGS194). If it is not "0" (step 006SGS194; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS194; Y), the process clears the time-saving flag to turn it off (step 006SGS195) to end the time-saving control, and then sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 006SGS195), and then proceeds to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the sending of a game state designation command is set according to the state of the probability bonus flag and time-saving flag. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of the special symbol, and the special symbol stop processing is terminated (step 006SGS197).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S117 of FIG. 73 as the jackpot end processing.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 006SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 006SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the variable jackpot flag and the time-saving flag are turned on (step 006SGS207, step 006SGS208). In addition, the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 006SGS209), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), steps 006SGS211 and 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is set to be sent according to the type of jackpot (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting up the sending of a game state designation command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 006SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of special patterns, and the jackpot end processing is terminated (step 006SGS216).

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a supply of power voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 80. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 80 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, the operation of displaying the performance image on the display screen of the image display device 5, the operation of outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the operation of lighting the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the operation of driving the movable body 32 are controlled to operate various performance devices. In addition, the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices are judged, determined, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Furthermore, after the performance random number value update processing (step S77), a demo performance control processing (step S78) for executing a demo performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a background display update processing (step S79) for updating the background display displayed on the image display device 5 to another background display are executed. Then, the processing returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

In addition, in the background display update process of this embodiment, control can be executed to update the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the execution of a specific effect (for example, a background change effect or a reach effect, which will be described later) during the variable display or a change in the game state.

The menu display process not only displays a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, but also includes a process for adjusting the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R and a process for adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9 in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed.

In the demo performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer such as a customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command until the customer waiting demo performance starts, and may start the customer waiting demo performance based on the timer expiring without the variable display starting. In addition, if the variable display starts while the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer is operating or while the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the customer waiting demo performance start waiting timer may be cleared, the customer waiting demo performance may be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 may be switched to a variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process)
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 80 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 81, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a reserved display performance determination process that determines the display mode of the reserved display displayed in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U and the active display displayed in the active display area 5F (step S160). In addition, a reserved display update process (step S161) that updates the display mode of the reserved display in the special chart reserved memory display area 5U and the display mode of the active display in the active display area 5F is executed. The reserved display update process is also a process for newly starting the display of the reserved display or the active display whose display mode has been newly determined in the reserved display performance determination process. After the reserved display update process is executed, for example, one of the processes in steps S170 to S175 as follows is selected and executed according to the value of the performance process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Hold display performance determination process)
Fig. 82 is a determination ratio of the display mode of the reserved display and active display in the reserved display performance shown in Fig. 81. In the reserved display performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first refers to the start winning time reception command buffer 006SGS194A shown in Fig. 70 (B) and identifies the presence or absence of an entry in which the reserved display flag is not set. If there is an entry in which the reserved display flag is not set, the variable display result is identified from the pattern designation command in the entry, and the variable category is identified from the variable category command in the entry, and based on these identified variable display results and variable category, the presence or absence of the reserved display performance and the performance pattern, i.e., the display mode of the reserved display and active display are determined.

For example, as shown in FIG. 82, when the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 5% chance that the reserved display effect will not be executed, a 25% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern α, and a 70% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern β. Also, when the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the reserved display effect will not be executed, a 5% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern α, and a 0% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern β. Also, when the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), there is a 75% chance that the reserved display effect will not be executed, a 20% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern α, and a 5% chance that the reserved display effect will be executed in presentation pattern β. In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, there is a 65% chance that the hold display effect will not be executed, there is a 25% chance that the hold display effect will be executed in effect pattern α, and there is a 10% chance that the hold display effect will be executed in effect pattern β.

After determining whether or not to execute the hold display effect and the effect pattern as described above, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "0" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will not be executed, sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "1" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed with effect pattern α, and sets the value of the hold display flag for that entry to "2" if it has been determined that the hold display preview effect will be executed with effect pattern β.

In this embodiment, as described above, after setting a value between 0 and 2 to the pending display flag corresponding to each entry in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, the performance control CPU 120 executes the pending display update process (step S61). When the pending display flag value is set to "0", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white circle (○), when the pending display flag value is set to "1", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white square (◇), and when the pending display flag value is set to "2", the pending display or active display corresponding to the pending display flag is displayed as a white star (☆).

With these settings, when the pending display or active display is displayed as a white square in display pattern A or a white star in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the pending display or active display is displayed as a white circle, and when the pending display or active display is displayed as a white star in display pattern B, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when the pending display or active display is displayed as a white square in display pattern A, so that the display mode of these pending displays and active displays, i.e., whether or not a pending display effect is executed and the effect pattern, can be used to draw the player's attention.

(Variable display start setting process)
Fig. 83 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Fig. 81. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on or not (step 006SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 006SGS272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 006SGS271 (step 006SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 006SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 006SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 006SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 006SGS272 or step 006SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 006SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 006SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to "7" as the stopping symbol. Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from among multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Also, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to even symbols as the stopping symbol. Furthermore, if the received variable display result designation command is a first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, then depending on the variation pattern, a combination of three mismatched symbols as the stopping symbols or a combination that results in a reach miss (missing symbol) such as "767" is determined.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

After executing step 006SGS276, the performance control CPU 120 executes a continuous breaking performance setting process (step 006SGS277) for executing a continuous breaking performance during the variable display, a dialogue preview performance setting process (step 006SGS278) for executing a dialogue preview performance during the variable display, a background change performance setting process (step 006SGS279) for executing a background change performance during the variable display, a reach suggestion performance setting process (step 006SGS280) for executing a reach suggestion performance during the variable display, and a cut-in performance setting process (step 006SGS281) for executing a cut-in performance during the variable display.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (step 006SGS282), and starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 006SGS283).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 006SGS284). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 006SGS285). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 006SGS286). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 006SGS287).

(Continuous Breaking Effects Setting Processing)
Fig. 84 (A) is a flow chart showing the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS277) in the variable display start setting process shown in Fig. 83. In the continuous break effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first judges whether the game state is normal or not (step 006SGS311). If the game state is normal (step 006SGS311; Y), it refers to the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A, identifies the presence or absence of an entry in which the value of the continuous break effect flag ("0" or "1") is not set (step 006SGS312), and judges whether there is an entry in which the value of the continuous break effect flag is set (step 006SGS313).

If there is no entry with the value of the continuous break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; N), proceed to step 006SGS318. If there is an entry with the value of the continuous break effect flag set (step 006SGS313; Y), determine whether or not to execute the continuous break effect based on the designation command and variable category command stored in the entry (step 006SGS314). Note that in the normal state in this embodiment, the continuous break effect is an effect that suggests that the variable display result of the target variable display will be a jackpot by executing it over multiple variable displays on a variable display that has not yet been executed (see FIG. 87).

When the game state is normal, in step 006SGS314, as shown in FIG. 84(B), if the variable display result is a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 20% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 80%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 80% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 20%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is other (normal reach), the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 60% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 40%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 50% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation with a probability of 50%.

Also, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability change state, in step 006SGS314, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 30% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 70%. If the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a non-reach, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 70% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 30%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a normal reach, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 50% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 50%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is a super reach, the presentation control CPU 120 decides not to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 40% and decides to execute the continuous break presentation at a rate of 60%. Thus, in this embodiment, the rate at which the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state when the continuous break presentation is executed, that is, the expectation of a jackpot, is different between the normal state and the time-saving state/probability change state.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute the continuous break effect in the processing of step 006SGS314 (step 006SGS315). If it has decided to execute the continuous break effect (step 006SGS315; Y), the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the continuous break effect flag for the entry to "1" and proceeds to step 006SGS318. If it has decided not to execute the continuous break effect (step 006SGS315; N), the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the continuous break effect flag for the entry to "0" and proceeds to step 006SGS318.

Next, in step 006SGS318, the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether there is an entry with the value of the consecutive break presentation flag set to "1", that is, whether the execution of the consecutive break presentation has been decided (step 006SGS318). If there is no entry with the value of the consecutive break presentation flag set to "1" (step 006SGS318; N), the consecutive break presentation setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry with the value of the consecutive break presentation flag set to "1" (step 006SGS318; Y), it further determines whether the entry with the value of the consecutive break presentation flag set to "1" is an entry corresponding to the variable display, that is, whether it is an entry stored in the storage area of buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" of the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A (step 006SGS319).

If the entry in which the value of the continuous break effect flag is set to "1" is not an entry corresponding to the variable display (step 006SGS319; N), the execution setting of the first continuous break effect is performed in response to the fact that the variable display is not a target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS320). If the entry in which the value of the continuous break effect flag is set to "1" is an entry corresponding to the variable display (step 006SGS319; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display is a variable display due to a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS321). If the variable display is a variable display due to a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS321; Y), the continuous break effect setting process is terminated, and if the variable display is a variable display due to a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 006SGS321; N), the execution setting of a second continuous break effect is performed in accordance with the variable display being a target variable display for the continuous break effect, and the continuous break effect setting process is terminated (step 006SGS322).

In other words, in this embodiment, if it is decided to execute a continuous break effect when the game state is normal, the first continuous break effect is executed in the variable display prior to the variable display that is the target of the continuous break effect. Then, in the variable display that is the target of the continuous break effect, if the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach or normal reach variable pattern, the second continuous break effect is not executed, whereas if the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variable pattern, the second continuous break effect is executed.

If the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state (step 006SGS311; N), the presentation control CPU 120 executes the continuous break effect according to the variable display fluctuation pattern and ends the continuous break effect setting process (step 006SGS323). For example, in step 006SGS323, the presentation control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the continuous break effect according to the variable display fluctuation pattern. At this time, if the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous break effect is determined at the lowest rate, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern, the continuous break effect is determined at the highest rate (execution rate of the continuous break effect for each fluctuation pattern: super reach > normal reach > non-reach). Then, when it is decided to execute the consecutive break effect, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach, the variable display is set to execute the consecutive break effect (first consecutive break effect) once or twice, and if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a normal reach or super reach, the variable display is set to execute the first consecutive break effect twice and one second consecutive break effect after the two first consecutive break effects.

In other words, the continuous breaking effect during the time-saving state or the probability bonus state in this embodiment is an effect that can be executed multiple times within one variable display, and it is an effect that suggests a reach depending on the number of times it is executed.

(Dialogue preview performance setting process)
Fig. 85 (A) is a flow chart showing the dialogue preview performance setting process (step 006SGS278) in the variable display start setting process shown in Fig. 83. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach (step 006SGS331; Y), the dialogue preview performance setting process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach without shortening, a normal reach, or a super reach (step 006SGS331; N), the presence or absence of execution of the dialogue preview performance and the performance pattern are determined according to the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result (step 006SGS332).

For example, as shown in FIG. 85(B), when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach and the variable display result is a miss, the dialogue preview performance is determined not to be executed at a rate of 70%, and the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern A at a rate of 30%. Also, when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach and the variable display result is a miss, the dialogue preview performance is determined not to be executed at a rate of 60%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern A at a rate of 35%, and the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern B at a rate of 5%. Also, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach and the variable display result is a miss, the dialogue preview performance is determined not to be executed at a rate of 40%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern A at a rate of 10%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern B at a rate of 20%, and the dialogue preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern C at a rate of 30%. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the dialogue preview performance is determined not to be performed at a rate of 10%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be performed in performance pattern A at a rate of 5%, the dialogue preview performance is determined to be performed in performance pattern B at a rate of 10%, and the dialogue preview performance is determined to be performed in performance pattern C at a rate of 75%.

As shown in FIG. 85(C), presentation pattern A is a presentation pattern in which the line "Chance?!" is displayed in an area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in a cracking performance executed as part of a line preview performance, presentation pattern B is a presentation pattern in which the line "Hot!" is displayed in an area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in a cracking performance executed as part of a line preview performance, and presentation pattern C is a presentation pattern in which the line "Super hot!" is displayed in an area generated in the display area of the image display device 5 in a cracking performance executed as part of a line preview performance.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85(B), when the dialogue preview performance is executed during variable display, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the dialogue preview performance is not executed (not executed). Furthermore, when the dialogue preview performance is executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set highest when the dialogue preview performance is executed in performance pattern C, and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set lowest when the dialogue preview performance is executed in performance pattern A (jackpot expectation depending on whether the dialogue preview performance is executed and the performance pattern: performance pattern C > performance pattern B > performance pattern A > not executed).

(Background change effect setting process)
Next, the background change effect setting process (step 006SGS279) shown in Fig. 83 will be described. In the background change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7. If the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA1-6, PA1-7, PA2-1, PA2-2, PA2-3, PA2-4, PA2-7, PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, or PB1-7, the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A is referenced.

When the game is in the normal state, if the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A does not store a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot, that is, if there is no reserved memory for a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will not be executed with a probability of 60%, and the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will be executed with a failure pattern (if the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the background change effect will be executed with a failure pattern of background change effect A, and the change of the variable display will be executed with a failure pattern of background change effect B). The execution of a background image change and a successful pattern of the background change performance (if the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, the successful pattern of background change performance A is executed; if the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, PB1-4, the successful pattern of background change performance B is executed) is determined at a rate of 10%. Also, when the game state is in the time-saving state/probable bonus state, if the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A does not store a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot, in other words, if there is no reserved memory for a jackpot, it will decide not to change the background image and not to perform the background change effect 50% of the time, not to change the background image and to perform the background change effect in a failure pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, it will perform the background change effect in a failure pattern A) 45% of the time, and to perform the background image change and to perform the background change effect in a success pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, it will perform the background change effect in a success pattern A) 5% of the time.

In addition, when the game is in the normal state, if a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot is stored in the start winning reception command buffer 006SG194A, that is, if there is a reserved memory for a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will not be executed with a probability of 30%, and the background image will not be changed and the background change effect will be executed with a failure pattern (if the change pattern of the variable display is PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, or PB1-3, the background change effect A will be executed with a failure pattern, and the variable display The execution of a change in the background image and a successful pattern of the background change performance (if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, execution of the successful pattern of background change performance A; if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, PB1-4, execution of the successful pattern of background change performance B) is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of a change in the background image and a successful pattern of the background change performance (if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, PB1-3, execution of the successful pattern of background change performance A; if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of PA2-2, PA2-4, PB1-2, PB1-4, execution of the successful pattern of background change performance B) is determined at a rate of 70%. Also, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability-changing state, if the start winning time reception command buffer 006SG194A stores a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot, that is, if there is a reserved memory for a jackpot, the game determines not to change the background image and not to execute the background change effect at a rate of 20%, not to change the background image and to execute the background change effect in a failure pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, execute the background change effect in a failure pattern A) at a rate of 0%, and execute the background image change and execute the background change effect in a success pattern (if the variable display change pattern is PB1-7, PA1-5, PA1-6, or PA2-7, execute the background change effect in a success pattern A) at a rate of 80%. In this way, in this embodiment, the rate at which the game state is controlled to a jackpot when the background change effect is executed is different between the normal state and the time-saving state/probability-changing state, i.e., the probability of winning.

When it is decided to execute a background change effect using one of the effect patterns, an execution setting according to the effect pattern of the background change effect is made, and the background change effect is executed in the variable display effect processing according to the execution setting. When it is decided to change the background image (when it is decided to execute a background change effect using a successful pattern), a background image change setting is made. The background image change is executed in the background display update processing (step S79) shown in FIG. 80.

(Reach suggestion performance setting process)
Next, the reach suggestion effect setting process (step 006SGS280) shown in Fig. 83 will be described. In the reach suggestion effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3. If the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-1, PA2-3, PB1-1, and PB1-3, it determines whether or not to execute the reach suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the reach suggestion effect according to the change pattern of the variable display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86(B), when the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, the reach suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 80% of the time, and the reach suggestion effect is determined to be executed in a failure pattern 20% of the time. When the variable display fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, the reach suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 30% of the time, and the reach suggestion effect is determined to be executed in a success pattern 70% of the time. In other words, in this embodiment, when the reach suggestion effect is executed, the reach (normal reach or super reach reach effect) is set to be executed at a higher rate than when the reach suggestion effect is not executed. Furthermore, when the reach suggestion effect is executed, the player is notified that the reach will not be reached because the reach suggestion effect is executed in a failure pattern, while the player is notified that the reach suggestion effect will be reached because the reach suggestion effect is executed in a success pattern.

When it is decided to execute one of the reach suggestion effect patterns, an execution setting is made according to the effect pattern of the reach suggestion effect, and the reach suggestion effect is executed in the variable display effect processing according to the execution setting.

(Cut-in effect setting process)
Next, the cut-in effect setting process (step 006SGS281) shown in Fig. 83 will be described. In the cut-in effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, and PB1-7. If the change pattern of the variable display is any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4, PA2-7, and PB1-7, it determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect according to the variable display result of the variable display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 86(C), when the game state is normal, if the variable display result is a miss, the cut-in effect is determined not to be executed 65% of the time, the cut-in effect is determined to be executed with presentation pattern X 30% of the time, and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed with presentation pattern Y 5% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the cut-in effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the cut-in effect is determined to be executed with presentation pattern X 20% of the time, and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed with presentation pattern Y 70% of the time.

That is, in this embodiment, when the cut-in effect is executed, it is set to be controlled to a jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is not executed. Furthermore, when the cut-in effect is executed, it is set to be controlled to a jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern Y (whether or not the cut-in effect is executed and the jackpot expectation of the effect pattern: effect pattern Y> effect pattern X> no cut-in effect). Also, when the game state is in the time-saving state/probability change state, if the variable display result is a miss, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 70%, the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern X at a rate of 30%, and the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern Y at a rate of 0%. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the cut-in effect is not executed at a rate of 10%, the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern X at a rate of 15%, and the cut-in effect is executed in the effect pattern Y at a rate of 75%. In this embodiment, the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state when a cut-in effect is executed, i.e., the jackpot expectation rate, differs between the normal state and the time-saving/high probability state.

The cut-in effect in this embodiment is an effect that displays different images (for example, an image of the letters "Hot!!" or an image of the letters "Chance!") depending on the effect pattern, and the proportion of the effect that is controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on which image is displayed (which effect pattern is executed) (in this embodiment, effect pattern X is an effect pattern that displays an image of the letters "Chance!", and effect pattern Y is an effect pattern that displays an image of the letters "Hot!!").

When it is decided to execute a cut-in effect using one of the effect patterns, an execution setting corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is made, and the cut-in effect is executed in the variable display effect processing according to the execution setting.

In this embodiment, the cut-in effect is exemplified as an effect accompanied by a cracking effect (see FIG. 88 and FIG. 112), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cut-in effect may have an effect pattern accompanied by a cracking effect and an effect pattern not accompanied by a cracking effect. For example, the effect pattern Y with a high expectation of a jackpot may be an effect pattern accompanied by a cracking effect, and the effect pattern X with a low expectation of a jackpot may be an effect pattern not accompanied by a cracking effect. Furthermore, when the effect pattern X is set as an effect pattern not accompanied by a cracking effect in this way, when the effect pattern X of the cut-in effect is set as an effect pattern not accompanied by a cracking effect, the display mode of the strip-shaped image displayed on the image display device 5 may be determined from a plurality of modes according to the variable display result (for example, the display color of the image may be determined in different proportions from blue, green, and red depending on whether the variable display result is a jackpot or not). In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the cut-in effect is accompanied by a cracking effect, and when the cut-in effect is not accompanied by a cracking effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the image that is further displayed.

(Description of the production)
As described above, in this embodiment, at the start of the variable display, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the cut-in effect. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the continuous breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect, the reach suggestion effect, and the cut-in effect, multiple effects can be executed during the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, when the game state is in the normal state, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect can be executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89, when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the background change effect A, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect can be executed. Note that the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the cut-in effect may be set as effects that cannot be executed in the normal state and can be executed only in the time-saving state or the probability change state. In this case, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the cut-in effect are executed according to the determination ratios in FIG. 84 (B) and FIG. 86 (C). In this way, different types of crack effects can be performed in the normal state, the time-saving state, and the special state.

As shown in Figures 87 to 89, the first continuous cracking effect is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 as the image to be cracked, is cracked from the start timing of the variable display, and cracks occur in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack has occurred is cracked (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). The first continuous cracking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the target area of the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. Furthermore, while the first consecutive break effect is an effect that may be executed in a variable display prior to the variable display that is the pre-read target, in a time-saving state or a probability-change state, it is an effect that may be executed multiple times during the execution of one variable display, and depending on the number of times it is executed, it is also an effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

The second continuous cracking effect is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked is executed from the start of the variable display, and a crack occurs in the glass plate image 006SG301 regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack occurs is cracked (the cracked area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). The second continuous cracking effect is also an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the target area of the cracking effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the cracking effect) and the other display areas. Furthermore, the second continuous cracking effect is an effect that may be executed in the variable display of the pre-read target.

The dialogue preview performance is a performance in which an operation promotion image urging the player to operate push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) of the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation promotion performance, and then in response to the operation of push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking performance is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, regardless of the movement of the movable body or the action of the character, and only the part where the crack occurred breaks (the broken area is only a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301). The line preview effect is an effect in which the visibility of the background image differs between the area subject to the crack effect (a part of the display area of the image display device 5 that is cracked by the crack effect) and the other display areas, and one of the lines "Chance!", "Hot!", or "Super Hot!" is displayed in the cracked area (area subject to the crack effect), and the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state differs depending on the line displayed (the displayed line suggests the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state (the expected probability of a jackpot)).

The background change performance A is a performance that may change the background image by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5 and executing a crack performance in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. Note that the background change performance A may be executed in a successful pattern in which the character's action causes cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the background image to change as the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks in its entirety, or in a failed pattern in which the character does not appear and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break), and the background image does not change.

The background change effect B is an effect in which a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, thereby changing the background image. Background change performance B may be performed in a success pattern in which two stages of cracks appear on the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 to crack, changing the background image, or in a failure pattern (failure pattern 1 and failure pattern 2) in which the first stage of cracks appears on the glass plate image 006SG301 but the second stage of cracks does not occur and the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack, or the first and second stage of cracks appear on the glass plate image 006SG301 but the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack, so the background image does not change.

The pseudo consecutive performance is a performance in which, when the decorative symbols temporarily stop in a specific combination during execution of the variable display, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a crack performance is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked in its entirety. In addition, in this embodiment, the pseudo consecutive performance is executed up to two times during one variable display, and the color of the pieces of the glass plate image 006SG301A broken in the first pseudo consecutive performance is different from the color of the pieces of the glass plate image 006SG301A broken in the second pseudo consecutive performance. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 67 and 68, the more times the pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the probability that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state). In other words, in the pseudo consecutive performance of this embodiment, it is possible to suggest to the player the probability that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (the probability of winning) depending on the color of the pieces of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the broken performance executed as part of the pseudo consecutive performance.

The reach suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the achievement of a reach during variable display, and may result in the achievement of a reach when a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. The reach suggestion effect may be executed in a successful pattern in which a reach is achieved by causing a crack to appear in the glass plate image 006SG301 due to the action of a character, causing the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 to break, or in a failed pattern in which a reach is not achieved because the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break) despite the crack occurring due to the action of a character.

The weak development effect is an effect in which, after a normal reach reach effect, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and a glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, thereby informing the player of the transition to a Super Reach α reach effect if the game state is in a normal state, and informing the player of the transition to a Super Reach γ reach effect if the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability variable state. The weak development effect is also an effect in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken without any cracks being generated by the action of the character.

When the game state is in the normal state, the strong development effect A is an effect that notifies the transition to the reach effect of the super reach β by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5 after the reach effect of the super reach α, and executing a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks in response to the movement of the movable body 32.When the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state, the strong development effect A is an effect that notifies the transition to the reach effect of the super reach δ by displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% in the display area of the image display device 5 after the reach effect of the normal reach, and executing a breaking effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks in response to the movement of the movable body 32.

The strong development performance B is also a performance in which cracks occur without the action of a character, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks. During the reach performance of Super Reach α, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a breaking performance is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, thereby notifying the transition to the reach performance of Super Reach β. This is a performance in which the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks without cracks occurring regardless of the movement of the movable body 32 or the action of a character.

The cut-in effect is an effect in which, after an operation prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (for example, the center of the display area) of the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in response to the operation of the push button 31B, and a cracking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked without any cracks occurring due to the movement of the movable body or the action of the character. In addition, the cut-in effect is an effect in which different cut-in images are displayed according to the effect pattern from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state differs depending on the cut-in image displayed (the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state (the expected probability of a jackpot) is suggested by the cut-in image displayed).

The result notification effect is an effect in which an operation prompting image is displayed in a predetermined position (e.g., the center of the display area) of the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect, urging the player to operate the push button 31B, and then in response to the operation of the push button 31B, a glass plate image 006SG301 with a transmittance of less than 100% is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a breaking effect is executed in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, thereby notifying the player that the game has been controlled to a jackpot game state. The result notification effect may be executed in a success pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 after the movable body has been moved is cracked, thereby notifying that the game is in a jackpot game state, or in a failure pattern in which the movable body does not move, the glass plate image 006SG301 does not crack, and the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed (the glass plate image 006SG301A does not crack), thereby notifying that the game is in a jackpot game state, i.e., that the variable display result is a miss. The result notification effect of this embodiment may be executed exceptionally in the variable display of PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach jackpot or non-reach miss variable patterns, when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability change state (see FIG. 93).

(Performance timing for each variation pattern)
Next, the rough execution timing and execution period of each variation pattern of the effects in this embodiment will be explained. First, the variable display when the game state is normal will be explained. As shown in Fig. 90 (A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-1, which is a variation pattern of no shortening and no reach loss, the first continuous break effect, the dialogue advance notice effect, the background change effect A, and the reach suggestion effect can be executed individually without overlapping in the performance period from the start timing of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 90(B), when the variable display is executed in PA1-2 and PA1-3, which are shortened non-reach missed variable patterns, the first consecutive break effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

As shown in Figure 90 (C), when the variable display is executed in PA2-1 or PB1-1, which are the variable patterns for a normal reach jackpot or a normal reach miss, a short time after the start of the variable display, the dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, reach suggestion effect, and normal reach reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping in the performance period.

As shown in FIG. 90(D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-2 and PB1-2, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach α jackpot and the Super Reach α miss, the second consecutive break effect, background change effect B, the first pseudo consecutive effect, the normal reach reach effect, the weak development effect, and the Super Reach α reach effect can be executed individually from the start timing of the variable display without overlapping in the performance period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach α reach effect, the result notification effect is executed overlapping with the Super Reach α reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 91(A), when the variable display is executed in PA2-3 and PB1-3, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach β jackpot and the Super Reach β miss, the following can be executed individually from the start timing of the variable display in the order of the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect, the normal reach reach effect, the weak development effect, the Super Reach α reach effect, the strong development effect A, and the Super Reach β reach effect, without overlapping in the performance period. During the execution period of the Super Reach β reach effect, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β reach effect.

In particular, the characters displayed in the background change effect A begin to be displayed after the dialogue in the dialogue preview effect (display of the cracked area of the display area of the image display device 5) has gone invisible, so a new crack effect will not occur when a new crack effect has already occurred, preventing a decrease in the effect of each crack effect caused by the player's attention being dispersed among multiple crack effects.

As shown in FIG. 91(B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-4 and PB1-4, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach β jackpot and the Super Reach β miss, the second consecutive break effect, background change effect B, first pseudo consecutive effect, second pseudo consecutive effect, normal reach reach effect, weak development effect, Super Reach α reach effect, strong development effect B, and Super Reach β reach effect can be executed individually from the start timing of the variable display without overlapping in the performance period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach β reach effect, the cut-in effect and the result notification effect are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach β reach effect.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 90 to 92, the variable display in which the background change performance B is executed and the variable display in which the dialogue preview performance are executed are different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the background change performance B and the dialogue preview performance may be executable during the same variable display. Furthermore, in this case where the background change performance B and the dialogue preview performance are executable during the same variable display, when the execution of the background change performance B is decided, the execution period of the background change performance B and the dialogue preview performance may not overlap. In this way, for example, it is possible to prevent the player who has executed the crack performance as the background change performance B from mistaking it for the crack performance as the dialogue preview performance to be executed while a crack is occurring as the background change performance B, that is, the player from mistaking it for the background image to be changed.

Next, we will explain the variable display when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state. As shown in Figures 92(A) and 92(B), when the variable display is executed in PA1-5, which is a non-reach miss variable pattern, if it is decided to execute the continuous break effect for PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss and non-reach jackpot variable patterns, the first continuous break effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display, and if it is decided to execute the background change effect as a pre-read for PB1-7, which is a super reach δ jackpot variable pattern, the background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

In addition, for the variable display of PB1-5, which is a variable pattern for a non-reach jackpot, a performance in which cracks gradually expand in the display area of the image display device 5 from the variable display prior to the variable display as a pre-reading preview performance may be executed, and a performance in which a cracking performance is executed at the start of the variable display of PB1-5 and a jackpot pattern is displayed (a so-called instant win performance, special continuous cracking performance) may be executed. In addition, since this performance is an instant win performance, the moving speed of the fragments displayed as the cracking performance may be made faster than the fragments displayed as other cracking performances.

As shown in Figures 92(C) and 92(D), when variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern, if it is decided to execute a continuous break effect targeting PA1-6 and PB1-5, which are non-reach miss and non-reach jackpot fluctuation patterns, the first continuous break effect can be executed twice individually from the start timing of the variable display, and when it is decided to execute a background change effect as a pre-reading targeting PB1-7, which is a super reach δ jackpot fluctuation pattern, background change effect A can be executed from the start timing of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 93(A), when the variable display is executed in PA1-6, which is a non-reach miss variable pattern, if it is subject to the consecutive break effect, when the execution of the background change effect has not been determined as a pre-read for PB1-7, which is a super reach δ jackpot variable pattern, and when the variable display is executed in PB1-5, which is a non-reach jackpot variable pattern, the first consecutive break effect is executed three times individually from the start timing of the variable display, and then the result notification effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 93(B), when the variable display is executed in PA2-5, which is a variable pattern for a normal reach miss, no effects are executed except for the variable display of the decorative pattern from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing, and only the reach effect of the normal reach is executed from the reach timing.

As shown in FIG. 93(C), when the variable display is executed in PA2-6, PB1-6, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach γ jackpot or the Super Reach γ miss, no effects are executed except for the variable display of the decorative pattern from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing, and from the reach timing, the normal reach reach effect, the weak development effect, and the Super Reach γ reach effect can be executed individually without overlapping in the performance period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach γ reach effect, the result notification effect is executed overlapping with the Super Reach γ reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 93(D), when the variable display is executed in PA2-7, PB1-7, which are the variable patterns of the Super Reach δ jackpot or the Super Reach δ miss, the background change performance A can be executed during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing. In addition, from the reach timing, the normal reach reach performance, the strong development performance A, and the Super Reach δ reach performance can be executed individually without overlapping in the performance period. Furthermore, during the execution period of the Super Reach δ reach performance, the cut-in performance and the result notification performance are executed individually, overlapping with the Super Reach δ reach performance.

(Super Reach Alpha presentation flow)
Next, the flow of presentation in Super Reach α will be described with reference to Figures 94 to 96. Figure 94 is a diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. Figure 95 is a diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α. Figure 96 is a diagram showing the flow of presentation in Super Reach α.

As shown in FIG. 94 (A1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when the variable display of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach α starts, the first background image (for example, an image showing a daytime cityscape) is displayed as the background image, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display started, the second continuous cracking performance starts. Specifically, when the second continuous cracking performance starts, a cracking precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack is displayed in a cracked form by displaying a crack in a part of the cracking precursor image (see FIG. 94 (A2)), a part of the crack target image that replaces the cracking precursor image is cracked, and a cracking performance in which a plurality of fragment images scatter is executed. In addition, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed on the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking performance starts. After that, a character image (object image) is displayed in the partially cracked area (specific range) of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image, and the type of character image displayed suggests that the variable display result may be a jackpot (see FIG. 94 (A3)). After the second continuous crack performance ends, the variable display is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the second consecutive crack performance, the dialogue preview performance begins. Specifically, at a predetermined timing after the dialogue preview performance begins, an operation prompting image that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed (see FIG. 94 (A4)). The operation prompting image is composed of a button image that resembles the push button 31B, a text image that reads "PRESS!!", an indicator image that indicates the valid operation period, and an effect image.

Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the effective operation period ends without the push button 31B being operated, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and after a crack is displayed in part of the crack precursor image, the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form (see FIG. 94 (A5)), a part of the target image to be broken that replaces the crack precursor image breaks, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect starts. After that, a text image saying "Chance!?" is displayed in a partially cracked area (specific range) of the target image to be broken that replaces the crack precursor image, and the content of the displayed text image suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a jackpot (see FIG. 94 (A6)). After the dialogue preview effect ends, the variable display is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the dialogue preview performance ended, the background change performance A starts. Specifically, after an effect image is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 94 (A7)), if the appearance of a character has been determined, a character image (object image) is displayed (see FIG. 94 (A8)). Next, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed according to the action of the character image (for example, the action of the character kicking), and after a crack is displayed in a cracked form by displaying a crack in a part of the crack precursor image (see FIG. 94 (A9)), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack performance in which a plurality of fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 94 (A10)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack performance starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a second background image (for example, a special zone image showing a wilderness landscape) different from the first background image is displayed as the background image (see FIG. 94 (A11)). After background change performance A ends, the variable display will be performed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect begins. Specifically, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 94 (A12)). Next, a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in response to the action of the character image (for example, the action of the character hitting the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a mallet), and a crack is displayed on the left side of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to be displayed in a first crack state (see FIG. 94 (A13)). Then, a crack is displayed on the right side of the crack precursor image in response to the action of the character image (for example, the action of the character hitting the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a mallet), causing the crack precursor image to change from the first crack state to a second crack state (see FIG. 94 (A14)). Furthermore, in response to the action of the character image (for example, the action of the character hitting the area corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C with a mallet) (FIG. 94 (A15)), if a crack has been determined, the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see FIG. 94 (A16)).

In addition, after the cracking effect starts, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a specified period of time. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, decorative symbols of the same number are temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the N reach effect begins.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the N reach effect, the weak development effect starts. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 94 (A17)), a breakage precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the character image's action (for example, the character moves toward the front side of the display screen to punch the glass plate) (see FIG. 95 (A18)), and the entire area of the break target image that replaces the breakage precursor image is broken without any cracks being displayed in a part of the breakage precursor image, and a breakage effect is executed in which multiple fragment images are scattered (see FIG. 95 (A19)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breakage effect starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a weak S reach effect A (for example, a bowling match between a friendly character and an enemy character) starts (see FIG. 95 (A20) to (A22)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach performance, the strong development performance A starts. Specifically, after the development pattern with the word "development" displayed in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 95 (A23)), a breakage precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed in response to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a performance position overlapping with the approximately center position of the display screen), and a breakage performance in which the entire area of the break target image replacing the breakage precursor image is broken without any cracks being displayed in a part of the breakage precursor image, and multiple fragment images are scattered is executed (see FIG. 95 (A24)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breakage performance starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a reach title image is displayed and a strong S reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) starts (see FIG. 95 (A25) to (A27)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the strong S reach performance, the cut-in performance begins. Specifically, an operation prompting image that prompts the operation of the push button 31B is displayed at a predetermined timing after the start of the strong S reach performance (see FIG. 95 (A28)). Next, when the push button 31B is operated, or when the operation effective period ends without the push button 31B being operated, a cracking precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a cracking performance is executed in which the entire area of the cracking target image that replaces the cracking precursor image is cracked without any cracks being displayed in a part of the cracking precursor image, and multiple fragment images are scattered. Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking performance begins. After that, a text image that reads "Heat!!" is displayed in the cracked area (specific range), and the content of the displayed text image suggests that the variable display result may be a jackpot (see FIG. 95 (A29)). After the cut-in performance ends, the strong S reach performance is executed again.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the cut-in effect ended, the result notification effect begins. Specifically, first, an image of an ally character delivering a final blow is displayed (see FIG. 96 (A30)), and then the ally character's movement is displayed in slow motion and the image is faded out (see FIG. 96 (A31)).

If the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an image of an ally character's attack hitting an enemy character is displayed (see FIG. 96 (A32)), and then a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed in response to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to a predetermined performance position between the origin position and the performance position), and a crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to be displayed in a cracked form (for example, a form in which a crack appears downward from the movable body 32), and a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see FIG. 96 (A33)).

Next, in response to the movement of the movable body (for example, a return-to-origin movement in which the movable body 32 rises from a predetermined performance position above the display screen to the origin position), the entire area of the target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack performance is executed in which multiple fragment images scatter (see FIG. 96 (A34)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack performance begins. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, the determined decorative patterns of the jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and it is announced that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character. In addition, the background image is displayed as the fifth background image 006SG085 for a jackpot (e.g., a rainbow-style image), the movable lamp 9d is lit in a predetermined light color (e.g., rainbow), a predetermined sound effect is output, and it is announced that the jackpot game state has been controlled (see FIG. 96 (A35)), after which the background image returns to the first background image and the fixed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is displayed stationary (see FIG. 96 (A36)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss display result, an image of an enemy character's punch hitting an ally character is displayed (see FIG. 96 (A37)), and then a crack precursor image (such as a glass plate) is displayed without the movable body 32 moving, and a crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, causing the crack precursor image to be displayed in a cracked form (for example, a form in which a crack appears in the center of the display screen), and a gray image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen (see FIG. 96 (A38)).

Next, after a white-out image (effect image) is displayed (see FIG. 96 (A39)), the transparency of the white-out image increases, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-jackpot combination is temporarily stopped, and it is announced that the friendly character has been defeated in a battle with the enemy character (FIG. 96 (A40)). In addition, after it is announced that the game state will not be controlled to a jackpot, the background image returns to the first background image, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-jackpot combination is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 96 (A41)).

(Super Reach β performance flow)
Next, the flow of the presentation in the super reach β will be described with reference to Figures 97 and 98. Figure 97 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation in the super reach β. Figure 98 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation in the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 97 (B1), in the normal state (low probability low base state), when the variable display of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach β starts, the first background image is displayed as the background image, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. When a predetermined time has passed since the variable display started, the background change performance B starts. Specifically, when the background change performance B starts, a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and a crack display area consisting of cracks including a small crack area is displayed at the bottom left of the crack precursor image, so that the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked state (see FIG. 97 (B2)), and then two crack display areas are displayed on the right side of the crack precursor image, so that the crack state of the crack precursor image changes stepwise (see FIG. 97 (B3)), and if a crack is determined, the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack performance in which multiple fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 97 (B4)). In addition, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect begins. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a second background image different from the first background image is displayed as the background image (see FIG. 97 (B5)).

After the background change performance A ends, the variable display is executed again, and after a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 97 (B6)), a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, causing the variable display mode to become a reach mode (see FIG. 97 (B7)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect begins. Specifically, in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, a pseudo consecutive pattern with the word "NEXT" displayed, indicating that the re-variable display will begin, is displayed decelerating just before the stopped display position (see FIG. 97 (B8)).

Next, after the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 97 (B9)), a crack precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack appears in part of the crack precursor image, the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form (see FIG. 97 (B10)), and then, in response to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position above the display screen to the performance position overlapping with the approximately center position of the display screen), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the crack precursor image is cracked, and a crack performance in which multiple fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 97 (B11)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the start of the crack performance. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a text image such as "x2" indicating the number of times of re-variable display is displayed, and then the variable display is resumed (see FIG. 97 (B12) to (B13)).

In addition, in the case of a variable display in which a pseudo consecutive prediction is not executed, the pseudo consecutive pattern passes through the stop display position in the center decorative pattern display area 5C, and a decorative pattern with a number one larger than the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R is displayed, and a losing variable display result is displayed (see Figure 97 (B9A)).

After the variable display of the decorative symbols is resumed, in the case of a pseudo-consecutive performance of a triple pattern, the pseudo-consecutive performance with the word "NEXT" indicating the start of the pseudo-consecutive performance is decelerated and displayed in front of the stop display position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 97 (B14)). After the pseudo-consecutive performance is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C (see FIG. 97 (B15)), a cracking prediction image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed, and after a crack is displayed in part of the cracking prediction image, the cracking prediction image is displayed in a cracked form (see FIG. 97 (B16)), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the cracking prediction image is cracked according to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, the movement of the movable body 32 falling from the origin position at the top of the display screen to the performance position overlapping with the approximately center position of the display screen), and a cracking performance in which a plurality of fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 97 (B17)). After the cracking effect starts, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed across the entire display screen for a certain period of time. As the transparency of the whiteout image increases, a text image such as "x3" is displayed, indicating the number of times the variable display can be resumed, and then the variable display resumes (see Figure 98 (B18)-(B19)).

After the variable display is resumed for the second time in the case of a pseudo consecutive performance of a two-row pattern, or for the third time in the case of a pseudo consecutive performance of a three-row pattern, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped (see Figure 98 (B20)), and a decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is temporarily stopped in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in an N reach (see Figure 98 (B21)), and the N reach performance begins.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the N reach effect, the weak development effect starts. Specifically, after a character image (object image) is displayed in the center of the display screen (see FIG. 98 (B22)), a breakage precursor image (glass plate, etc.) is displayed (see FIG. 98 (B23)) in response to the character image's action (for example, the character moves toward the front side of the display screen to punch the glass plate), and a breakage effect is executed in which the entire area of the break target image that replaces the breakage precursor image breaks without any cracks being displayed in a part of the breakage precursor image, and multiple fragment images scatter (see FIG. 98 (B24)). Note that a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breakage effect starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a weak S reach effect (for example, a bowling match between a friendly character and an enemy character) starts (see FIG. 98 (B25) to (B26)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach performance, the strong development performance B starts. Specifically, when the strong development performance B starts, a cracking premonition image (such as a glass plate) is displayed, and after a crack is displayed in part of the cracking premonition image, the cracking premonition image is displayed in a cracked state (see FIG. 98 (B27)), the entire area of the crack target image that replaces the cracking premonition image is cracked, and a cracking performance in which multiple fragment images scatter is executed (see FIG. 98 (B28)). In addition, a whiteout image (effect image) is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking performance starts. As the transmittance of the whiteout image increases, a development pattern with the word "development" displayed in the middle decoration pattern display area 5C is temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 98 (B29)), and then a reach title image is displayed, and the strong S reach performance B (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) starts (see FIG. 98 (B30)). Furthermore, the Strong S reach performance B is an S reach performance with a higher expectation than the Strong S reach performance A. Also, since the Strong S reach performance B is an S reach performance with a higher expectation than the Strong S reach performance A, the cut-in performance described below is more likely to be executed in performance pattern Y. In other words, the Strong S reach performance B is a performance in which the fragment image 006SG302 described below is more likely to be displayed than the Strong S reach performance A.

Strong S Reach Performance B is almost the same as Strong S Reach Performance A of Super Reach α, except for the types of enemy characters, etc., so we will not go into detail about the flow up until the end of the variable display.

(Examples of various effects)
Next, examples of the operation of the cracking effects in various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to Figures 99 to 115.

In addition, the following explanation will explain an example of the expression used to indicate the display mode.

A "fade-out display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image increases over time, whereas a "fade-in display" is a display in which the transmittance (transparency) of the displayed image decreases over time.

An "animation display" is, for example, a dynamic display (moving image display) that gives movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame earlier, and visibility can be changed by making at least one of the position, size, color, and transparency of the displayed image different from that of the image one frame earlier. In other words, an "animation display" includes not only displays that involve image displacement, such as "moving display", "rotating display", "enlarged display", "reduced display", "frame-in display", and "frame-out display", but also displays that do not involve image displacement, such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display", in which the display mode, such as color tone, changes. In this embodiment, the number of still images (number of frames) displayed in a one-second moving image is 30, that is, the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of animation display, and refers to a non-dynamic display (still image display) in which the visibility of the image does not change compared to the previous image, and the display mode does not change at all.

As shown in Figures 99 to 115, the decorative patterns (for low base state) displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R when the game state is in the low base state are composed of a number display section consisting of a circular number base section when viewed from the front and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section, a character display section displaying 10 types of characters (not all characters are shown) corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" on the number display section, an information display section consisting of a rectangular information base section when viewed from the front and information about the character (for example, the character's name) displayed on the front of the information base section, and a roughly rectangular base display section displayed so as to surround the periphery of the number display section, character display section, and information display section (see Figure 58, etc.).

Although no detailed explanation will be given, when the game state is a high base state or in other presentation modes, decorative patterns with a different display mode from the decorative patterns for the low base state described above may be variably displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. In addition, as an example of the variable display mode of the decorative patterns for the low base state, a vertical scrolling display from the top to the bottom of the display screen has been given, but other variable display modes may be used, or the variable display mode may differ depending on the game state or presentation mode.

The display area 5S provided in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, and a small pattern (fourth pattern) corresponding to the decorative pattern. The small pattern consists of the numbers "0" to "9" displayed in each of the small pattern display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, and each number corresponds to a decorative pattern. In this embodiment, the numbers of the decorative pattern and the numbers of the small pattern correspond to each other, but it is not necessary that all the numbers of both patterns correspond. For example, the numbers of the small pattern may be numbers "1" to "5", which are fewer than the numbers "0" to "9" of the decorative pattern, or may be symbols or figures different from the numbers of the decorative pattern.

The special pattern pending memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 displays the first pending display 006SG101 (see FIG. 148) and the second pending display (not shown) corresponding to the variable display whose execution is pending, and the active display area 5F provided at the bottom of the screen displays the active display 006SG103 corresponding to the variable display being executed. Note that the first pending memory number, the second pending memory number, the small pattern, the special pattern pending memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in common in all performance modes.

<First consecutive break effect and second consecutive break effect>
Details of the operation example of the first and second consecutive break effects will be described with reference to Fig. 99 and Fig. 100. Fig. 99 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the first consecutive break effect. Fig. 100 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the second consecutive break effect.

As shown in Figure 99 (A), when the game state is normal, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative patterns is executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R and the second continuous cracking performance is started, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and cracks are displayed radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility which is lower than the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thereby making the crack pattern stand out (see Figure 99 (B)). In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability-changing state, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R and the second continuous cracking performance starts, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a cracking precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area higher than the sixth background image, which is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability-changing state, and cracks are displayed to radially expand from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state. In addition, the decorative symbols displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the sixth background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while they are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the cracking state is displayed prominently.

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken (the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken state), and a broken effect is executed in which a plurality of broken images 006SG302 larger than the small broken image 006SG302A scatter. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the break effect starts (see FIG. 99(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the broken image 006SG302 displayed in a layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 become visible (see Figure 99 (D)), and when the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see Figure 99 (E)).

Thereafter, the character image 006SG305 and background effect image 006SG314, which are displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A, are displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is completed (see Figure 99 (F)), and then the glass plate image 006SG301A, character image 006SG305, and background effect image 006SG314 are hidden (see Figure 99 (G)). Here, the background effect image 006SG314 when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed is displayed with the second visibility in a predetermined range other than the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, and is displayed with the first visibility, which is higher than the second visibility, in the crack display area 006SG304 (specific range). In other words, because the visibility differs between the non-cracked area and the part visible through the cracked area, it becomes easier to recognize that part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100, the second continuous breaking effect is almost the same as the first continuous breaking effect in other respects except for the type of character that appears, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. Note that in this embodiment, the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect are illustrated as being almost the same in operation, but the first continuous breaking effect and the second continuous breaking effect may be different in operation.

For example, the first and second consecutive cracking performances may use the same cracking pattern D, and the manner in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions may be the same, but the position at which the fragment image 006SG302 begins to display when cracking begins may be different, for example, by displaying the crack on the right side in FIG. 99(B) and the crack on the left side in FIG. 100(B). In this way, it is possible to create a difference in how the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the first and second consecutive cracking performances.

In addition, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the cracks (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image can indicate whether the first or second continuous breaking effect will be executed. Also, the crack patterns can be made different between the first and second continuous breaking effects. In particular, for the second continuous breaking effect, the amount of fragment image 006SG302 displayed can be increased, or the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed in slow motion to increase attention to the variable display.

In addition, it is possible to output a character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the first continuous cracking effect, and a character voice corresponding to the character image 006SG305 in the second continuous cracking effect, and either may be output together with the cracking sound when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the character voice may be output after the cracking sound has been output when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the cracking sound may be limited.

<Dialogue preview performance>
Details of an operation example of the dialogue preview performance will be described with reference to Fig. 101. Fig. 101 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the dialogue preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 101(A), when the dialogue preview performance starts while the decorative pattern is being displayed variably in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, an operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081 (see FIG. 101(B)).

Next, when push button 31B is operated, or when the effective operation period ends without push button 31B being operated, the operation prompting image 006SG310 is hidden and a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a precursor image of cracking in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and cracks are displayed radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked form. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the crack pattern is displayed prominently (see FIG. 101(C)).

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken, and a broken effect is executed in which a plurality of broken images 006SG302 larger than the small broken image 006SG302A scatter in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the broken effect starts (see FIG. 101(D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the broken image 006SG302 displayed in a layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and the character image 006SG305 become visible (see FIG. 101(E)), and when the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 101(F)).

Thereafter, in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A, until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is finished, a text image 006SG306 indicating the likelihood of a jackpot, and a dialogue background image 006SG087 that serves as the background for the text image 006SG306 are displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301A (see FIG. 101(F)). Here, the dialogue background image 006SG087 and the text image 006SG306 displayed in the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed with the first visibility, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the area other than the crack display area 006SG304 in the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed with the second visibility that is lower than the first visibility. In other words, because the visibility differs between the uncracked area and the portion visible through the cracked area, it becomes easier to recognize that part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked. Next, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the serif background image 006SG087, and the text image 006SG306 are hidden (see FIG. 101 (H)).

101(C), for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a portion corresponding to the cracks (e.g., a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image can indicate which of the dialogue text images 006SG306, "Chance!?", "Hot!", or "Super Hot!", will be displayed. Also, the crack pattern can be made different depending on the type of dialogue text (such as the amount of display of the fragment image 006SG302. In particular, when "Super Hot!" is displayed, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed in slow motion to increase the level of attention), and the position of the crack (e.g., the higher the expectation, the closer to the center) or the range of the crack (e.g., the higher the expectation, the wider the range of the crack) can be changed while using a common crack pattern. Additionally, it is possible to output a character voice corresponding to the type of character image 006SG305, and either may be output together with a crackling sound when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the character voice may be output after the crackling sound has been output when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, or the output of the crackling sound may be limited.

<Background change effect A>
Details of an operation example of the background change presentation A will be described with reference to Fig. 102 and Fig. 103. Fig. 102 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the background change presentation A. Fig. 103 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the background change presentation A.

As shown in Figure 102 (A), when the game state is normal, when background change performance A is initiated while variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, an effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081 and is gradually enlarged (see Figures 102 (B) and (C)), after which the effect image 006SG320 is faded out and the character image 006SG305 is displayed (see Figure 102 (D)). Also, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability change state, when the background change performance A starts while the decorative pattern is being displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the 6th background image, which is the normal background image for the time-saving state/probability change state, and after gradually enlarging, the effect image 006SG320 is faded out and the character image 006SG305 is displayed.

The effect image 006SG320 displayed in FIG. 102(B) is a presentation that teases whether or not the character image 006SG305 will be displayed in FIG. 102(D). In the case of a successful pattern, the display moves to FIG. 102(C). In the case of an unsuccessful pattern, the display does not move to FIG. 102(C), and the effect image 006SG320 is displayed in a reduced size and then becomes hidden, suggesting that the character image 006SG305 will not be displayed.

Next, when the game is in a normal state, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a precursor image to cracking in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and then, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 kicking towards the front, cracks are displayed spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a pre-crack state (see Figure 102 (E)), after which the cracks gradually spread radially and change into a cracked state (see Figure 102 (F)). In addition, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility which is lower than the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, thereby making the crack pattern stand out. Furthermore, when the game state is a time-saving state/high probability state, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the sixth background image, and then, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 kicking toward the front, cracks are displayed spreading radially from a position slightly to the right of approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that after the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state, the cracks gradually spread radially and change into a crack state. In addition, the character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the sixth background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the crack pattern is displayed prominently.

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, when the game state is in the normal state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a cracking effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scatter in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts (see FIG. 102 (G)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIG. 102(H) and FIG. 103(I)). As the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 103(J)), and then the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 103(K)). In this way, the crack effect is executed when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, so that the change from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 can be made to look natural, and the background change can be made to look natural. In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability change state, the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken in its entirety, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area, in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, in a breaking effect that is executed. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the breaking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the seventh background image, which is a chance background image for the time-saving state/high probability state, increases. Then, when the transmittance reaches 100%, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and then the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends. In this way, by executing the crack effect when the background image changes from the sixth background image to the seventh background image, the change from the sixth background image to the seventh background image can be made to look natural, and the background change can be made to look natural.

For example, a third background image (not shown) that is more advantageous when displayed as a background image than the second background image 006SG082 may be displayed, and the action mode of the character image 006SG305 (action such as punching or kicking) may suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed. Also, by making it possible to display a character other than the character image 006SG305, it may be possible to suggest whether the second background image 006SG082 or the third background image will be displayed.

<Background change effect B>
Details of an operation example of the background change presentation B will be described with reference to Fig. 104. Fig. 104 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the background change presentation B.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), when background change performance B is started while the decorative pattern is being displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the first background image 006SG081, and a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small cracked areas is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state (see FIG. 104(B)). After that, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, so that the crack state of the glass plate image 006SG301 changes stepwise (see FIG. 104(C)).

In this way, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in a cracked state, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, so that the cracked state is displayed prominently.

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Also, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 104(C), the first background image 006SG081 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed with the second visibility in areas other than each crack display area 006SG324, while being displayed with the first visibility, which is higher than the second visibility, in each crack display area 006SG324. In other words, since the visibility differs between the uncracked area and the part visible through the cracked area, it becomes easier to recognize that part of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked.

Next, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area, in a broken effect. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the broken effect starts (see FIG. 104 (D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIG. 104(E)). Then, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends as the transmittance reaches 100% (see FIG. 104(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 104(G)). In this way, by executing the crack effect when the background image changes from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082, the change from the first background image 006SG081 to the second background image 006SG082 can be made to look natural, and the background change can be made to look natural.

Also, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the cracks may be displayed in a portion corresponding to the cracks displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image may suggest the expected degree of development of the performance. Specifically, when the display color of the effect image is blue, it is likely to end at the first stage (see FIG. 104(B)), and when the display color of the effect image is green, it is likely to end at the second stage (see FIG. 104(C)), and it is preferable that red is most likely to develop into a cracked performance compared to blue and green. Also, as shown in FIG. 121(B), when the effect image ends at the first stage in failure pattern 1, the transparency gradually increases and the display becomes invisible (fade-out display) 1500 ms after the start of the background change performance B, and as shown in FIG. 121(C), when the effect image ends at the second stage in failure pattern 2, the transparency gradually increases and the display becomes invisible 3000 ms after the start of the background change performance B.

In addition, while background change performance B is being executed, it is possible to restrict the change performance for the active display and pending display, which are images displayed in the layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, while not restricting the performance using images (such as mini character images) displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301. By doing this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the performance effect of the cracking performance.

<Pseudo consecutive performance>
Details of an operation example of the pseudo consecutive performance will be described with reference to Fig. 105. Fig. 105 is a diagram showing details of a part of an operation example of the pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in FIG. 105 (A), after the pseudo consecutive performance has begun, when the pseudo consecutive pattern with the word "NEXT" displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, indicating that the re-variable display will begin, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the stopped display position, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and cracks are displayed radially from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state. In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 and the second background image 006SG082 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the crack pattern is displayed prominently (see FIG. 105 (B)).

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then it goes out of the frame and becomes hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

After the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the movable body 32 begins to fall from the origin position to the performance position, and in response to this action, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see Figure 105 (C)), after which the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads around, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack performance begins (see Figure 105 (D)). Additionally, as the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area.

The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see Figure 105 (E)). Then, when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends due to the transparency reaching 100%, an action effect image 006SG321 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area, which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area, so as to extend from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area, in order to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the performance position, and a background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, so as to extend from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area (see Figures 105 (F) and (G)).

Next, after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 has ended, the movable body 32 starts moving from the performance position toward the origin position while the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see FIG. 105(G)), and then stops at the performance position after all of the fragment images 006SG302 are no longer displayed, completing the return operation to the origin position (see FIG. 105(H)).

The return operation of the movable body 32 from the performance position to the origin position may be started after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 has ended and then the display of the background effect image 006SG322 has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped and the re-variable display begins in the pseudo consecutive performance, but the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the first variable display may be blue, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the second variable display may be green, and the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the third variable display may be red, for example. Also, the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 may be different, for example, the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 may become gradually larger each time the re-variable display is performed.

In this case, the display color of the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the number of times the re-variable display is performed, but it is preferable that the crack pattern is common. In this way, by making the crack pattern common in gaming machines that perform a variety of crack effects, it is possible to accurately indicate that a pseudo consecutive performance has been performed. In addition, while the operation pattern of the movable body 32 is common between the first re-variable display, the second re-variable display, and the third re-variable display, the display mode of the crack pattern may be different between the first re-variable display, the second re-variable display, and the third re-variable display, for example, the size of the fragment image 006SG302 may be different, the number of fragment images 006SG302 displayed may be different, or the movement speed of the fragment images 006SG302 may be different.

<Reach suggestion effect>
Details of an operation example of the reach suggestion effect will be described with reference to Fig. 106 and Fig. 107. Fig. 106 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the reach suggestion effect. Fig. 107 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the reach suggestion effect.

As shown in Figure 106 (A), when the reach suggestion performance is initiated while variable display of decorative patterns is being executed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R, a decorative pattern is temporarily displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 106 (B)), and then a character image 006SG305 is displayed in the center of the display screen (see Figure 106 (C)). Next, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the second background image 006SG082, and in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the left decorative pattern display area 5L with a mallet, a crack appears on the left side of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in the first crack form, and an action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see FIG. 106 (D)).

Next, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the right decorative pattern display area 5R with a mallet, a crack appears on the right side of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to change to a second crack state, and an action effect image 006SG323 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figure 106 (E)).

Furthermore, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the middle decoration pattern display area 5C with a mallet (see FIG. 106(F)), a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 106(G)), and then the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads around, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 106(H)).

Also, as shown in Figures 106 (D) and (E), when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then it goes out of the frame and becomes hidden. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Also, as shown in Figure 106 (H), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 is hidden, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. Next, as the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern, the fragment image 006SG302, and the second background image 006SG082 increases (see FIG. 107(I)). Then, the transmittance reaches 100%, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and the decorative patterns temporarily displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R are enlarged and highlighted (see FIG. 107(J)), after which the decorative patterns are reduced in size, and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 107(K)).

In the various effects that accompany a cracking effect in this embodiment, for example, as shown in the flow of Figures 107(J) to 107(K), the effect progresses after the fragment image 006SG302 is completely removed from the display area of the image display device 5 and becomes invisible during the cracking effect (for example, progressing from a reach suggestion effect that accompanies a cracking effect to a reach effect that does not accompany a cracking effect).

In addition, for example, an effect image that emphasizes the crack may be displayed in a portion corresponding to the crack displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 (for example, a layer image drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301), and the display mode of the effect image may indicate the likelihood of a reach developing. Specifically, if the effect image has display modes of blue and red, it is sufficient if the effect image is displayed in red, making it more likely to result in a reach than when it is displayed in blue.

In the case of a failure pattern, after a white-out image 006SG303 is displayed in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 hitting the area corresponding to the middle decoration pattern display area 5C with a mallet (see Figures 106 (G) and (H)), a character image 006SG305 looking disappointed is displayed in the area corresponding to the middle decoration pattern display area 5C, after which the character image 006SG305 and the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 are no longer displayed, the losing pattern stops, and the variable display ends.

<Weak development performance>
Details of an operation example of the weak development performance will be described with reference to Fig. 108. Fig. 108 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the weak development performance.

As shown in FIG. 108(A), regardless of whether the game state is normal or time-saving/probable bonus, when the variable display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R becomes a reach state and the weak development effect starts, a background effect image 006SG322 is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, and a character image 006SG305 is displayed in the approximate center of the layer 6 image drawing area above it (see FIG. 108(B)). After the punching character image 006SG305 is displayed, it is displayed in slow motion while expanding as if it is moving toward the front of the display screen (see FIG. 108(C)). The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R move to the upper right corner of the display screen and are displayed in a reduced size.

Next, when the game state is normal, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked state, but the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a crack effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack effect starts (see FIG. 108 (D)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 increases (see FIG. 108(E)). After the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends (see FIG. 51(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again (see FIG. 108(G)). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the image 006SG088 for the weak S reach effect is displayed, and the game transitions to the weak S reach effect (see FIG. 108(H)). In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state/probability change state, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the normal reach background image, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in a cracked state, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a cracking effect is executed in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A scatter in the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the entire display screen for a predetermined period after the cracking effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to visually recognize the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer below the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 and the character image 006SG305 increases. When the transmittance reaches 100% and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 is displayed, and the weak S reach effect is displayed. In addition, in FIG. 117 and FIG. 130 described later, the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development performance is non-transparent, but this is the final display mode of the fragment image 006SG302, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development performance is displayed in a transparent mode with transparency (for example, a transmittance of 70% or more) in FIG. 136 (B1) to (B3) described later, and then in FIG. 136 (B4) and (B5) it is displayed in a non-transparent mode with no transparency (for example, a transmittance of less than 10%). In other words, at the first timing corresponding to FIG. 136 (B3), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a transparent mode, and at the second timing corresponding to FIG. 136 (B4), the fragment image 006SG302 can be viewed in a non-transparent mode.

In this way, by executing the crack effect when the N reach effect progresses to the weak S reach effect, the change from the N reach effect image to the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 can be made to look natural, so the change in effect can be made to look natural.

<Strong Development Performance A>
Details of an operation example of the strong development effect A will be described with reference to Fig. 109. Fig. 109 is a diagram showing details of a part of an operation example of the strong development effect A.

As shown in FIG. 109(A), in the weak S reach performance, a development symbol with the word "Development" displayed is temporarily stopped and when the strong development performance A starts, the movable body 32 starts to fall from the origin position to the performance position, and when this falling action starts, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in approximately the center of the layer 7 image drawing area, and the movable body 32 falls (see FIG. 109(B)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the crack performance starts.

In addition, as a preliminary effect before the cracking effect, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position, and when the movable body 32 moves to the effect position, a glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the weak S reach effect image 006SG088, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked form, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, and a cracking effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area (see FIG. 109 (C)).

The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and since the transmittance remains at 0% until the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 109(C)). As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see FIG. 109(D)). Next, when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends as the transparency becomes 100%, an action effect image 006SG325 is displayed in the layer 6 image drawing area, which is lower than the layer 7 image drawing area, so as to extend from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area, in order to emphasize that the movable body 32 has moved to the performance position, and a background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, so as to extend from the movable body 32 to the surrounding area (see FIG. 109 (E)).

Next, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and the fragment image 006SG302 goes invisible, after which the movable body 32 starts moving from the performance position to the origin position (see FIG. 109(F)). Then, the return operation to the origin position ends, and the reach title image 006SG326 is displayed, progressing to a strong S reach performance (see FIG. 109(G)).

＜Strong Development Performance B＞
Details of an operation example of the strong development performance B will be described with reference to Fig. 110 and Fig. 111. Fig. 110 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the strong development performance B. Fig. 111 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the strong development performance B.

As shown in FIG. 110(A), when a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the weak S reach performance and the strong development performance B starts, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the weak S reach performance image 006SG088, and cracks are displayed radially from the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state (see FIG. 110(B)). In addition, the decorative pattern displayed in the layer 2 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the weak S reach performance image 006SG088 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, while when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, they are displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, so that the cracked state is displayed prominently.

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then it goes out of the frame and becomes hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 110(C)), after which the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads around, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 110(D)).

Also, as shown in Figure 110 (D), at the timing when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the entire glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, is shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect begins. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 increases (see FIG. 110(E)). Next, the transmittance becomes 100%, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends. After the decorative pattern, which is a development pattern with the word "development" displayed in a temporary stop, is displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 110(F)), the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends (see FIG. 110(G)).

Next, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed approximately in the center of the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 110(H)), after which the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads around and is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time, with the development pattern being hidden (see FIG. 111(I)). Then, as the transparency gradually increases over time, the visibility of the reach title image 006SG326 corresponding to the strong S reach performance increases (see FIGS. 111(J) and (K)).

In this way, by executing a cracking effect when progressing from a weak S reach effect to a strong S reach effect, it is possible to make it appear as if the weak S reach effect image 006SG088 has cracked and changed into the reach title image 006SG326, making the change in reach effect look natural.

<Cut-in effects>
Details of an operation example of the cut-in effect will be described with reference to Fig. 112. Fig. 112 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 112(A), when a cut-in effect starts a predetermined period of time after the start of the strong S reach effect, an operation prompting image 006SG310 is displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area above the fourth background image 006SG084 for the strong S reach effect (see FIG. 112(B)).

Next, when the push button 31B is operated (or when the operation valid period ends without the push button 31B being operated), the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area above the fourth background image 006SG084, and instead of the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked state, the entire glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and a cracking effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered in the layer 5 image drawing area. In addition, the operation prompt image 006SG310 is displayed as if the button had been pressed by operation, and an operation effect image 006SG327 is displayed around it, and is enlarged over time (see Figures 112 (C) and (D)).

In addition, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the cracking effect starts. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and when the display starts, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the broken piece image 006SG302 displayed in a layer lower than the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 112 (C)). Note that the operation prompt image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 are displayed in the layer 8 image drawing area higher than the whiteout image 006SG303, and therefore are displayed while maintaining the same first visibility as the first visibility when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed.

As time passes, the transmittance gradually increases, making it possible to see the fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 112(D)). Furthermore, the operation prompt image 006SG310 and the operation effect image 006SG327 are hidden, while the text image 006SG307 saying "Heat!!" is visible (see FIG. 112(E)). After the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends as the transmittance reaches 100% (see FIG. 112(F)), the fragment image 006SG302 is no longer visible (see FIG. 112(G)).

In this embodiment, both cut-in effect patterns X and Y are described as effect patterns that include a cracking effect, but as a cut-in effect effect pattern, the effect pattern Y with a high probability of winning may be a chance effect pattern that includes a cracking effect, and the effect pattern X with a low probability of winning may be an effect pattern that does not include a cracking effect. In such a case, in the effect pattern that does not include a cracking effect, a band-shaped cut-in image (not shown) may be displayed on the fourth background image 006SG084.

＜Result notification (jackpot)＞
Details of the operation example of the result notification effect (jackpot) will be described with reference to Fig. 113 and Fig. 114. Fig. 113 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot. Fig. 114 is a diagram showing details of the operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 113(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the cut-in effect ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification effect begins. Then, the movement speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and the image fades out in slow motion, after which a whiteout image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed across the entire display screen (see FIG. 113(B)).

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot display result, an object image 006SG308 is displayed in which an attack from an ally character hits an enemy character (see FIG. 113 (C)), and then the movable body 32 starts to fall from the origin position to a predetermined performance position, and in response to this falling motion, a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image in the layer 4 image drawing area above the object image 006SG308, and cracks are displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 so as to spread downward from the movable body 32, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked state. In addition, the object image 006SG308, which is displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301, is displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but is displayed with the second visibility, which is lower than the first visibility, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, so that the crack pattern is displayed prominently (see FIG. 113 (D)).

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then is hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Next, a whiteout image 006SG303 begins to be displayed in a position adjacent to the bottom of the movable body 32 in the layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 113 (E)). In response to the start of a return-to-origin operation in which the movable body 32 rises from a predetermined performance position to the origin position, the whiteout image 006SG303 spreads downward, and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 113 (F)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 113(F), when the return-to-origin operation of the movable body 32 is started and the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen, the glass plate image 006SG301 becomes invisible, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area above the glass plate image 006SG301 in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is entirely shattered, and a shattering effect is executed in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 larger than the small fragment image 006SG302A are scattered across the layer 5 image drawing area. Note that the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen for a predetermined period of time after the shattering effect is started. The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it is difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area. As the transmittance gradually increases over time, the visibility of the decorative pattern and the fragment image 006SG302 becomes higher (see Figure 113 (G)).

Next, the transparency becomes 100%, and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, and the fifth background image 006SG085 and the fixed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination are displayed (see FIG. 113(H)), after which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state (see FIG. 114(I)), and the background image returns to the first background image 006SG081, and the fixed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is displayed in a static state (see FIG. 114(J)).

In addition, after the cracking effect starts in response to the start of the upward movement of the movable body 32 to return to the origin, the upward movement of the movable body 32 returning from the specified effect position to the origin position ends before the display of the fragment image 006SG302, which has become visible due to the increased transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303, ends (becomes invisible), allowing the player to be notified quickly that a jackpot has been hit.

<Result announcement (loss)>
Details of an operation example of the result notification effect (loss) will be described with reference to Fig. 115. Fig. 115 is a diagram showing details of an operation example of the result notification effect when the variable display result is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 115(A), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the cut-in effect ended, a character image 006SG305 showing an ally character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and the result notification effect begins. Then, the movement speed of the character image 006SG305 gradually decreases and the image fades out in slow motion, after which a whiteout image with a transmittance of 0% (opaque) is displayed across the entire display screen (see FIG. 115(B)).

Next, if the variable display result is a miss-display result, the movable body 32 does not move and a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed across the entire display screen in the layer 7 image drawing area for a predetermined period of time (see FIG. 115(C)). The whiteout image 006SG303 is a white image displayed in the layer 7 image drawing area with a transmittance of 0% (opaque), and at the start of display, it becomes difficult to see the glass plate image 006SG301 and character image 006SG305 displayed in layers lower than the layer 7 image drawing area.

Then, in the layer 4 image drawing area above the character image 006SG305, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed as a crack precursor image, and cracks are displayed radially from approximately the center of the glass plate image 006SG301, causing the glass plate image 006SG301 to be displayed in a cracked form. The character image 006SG305 displayed in the layer 3 image drawing area below the glass plate image 006SG301 and the gray background image 006SG313 displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, but with the second visibility lower than the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, causing the cracked form to be displayed prominently (see FIG. 115(D)).

When the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed as if it is falling downward from the part where the crack is displayed, and then it goes out of the frame and becomes hidden. The small fragment image 006SG302A may be displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area or the layer 4 image drawing area.

Thus, although the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the cracked state is maintained and no cracking effect is performed in which the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, which indicates that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the glass plate image 006SG301 was displayed in a cracked form, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed again over the entire layer 7 image drawing area (see FIG. 115(E)), and then the eye-catching image 006SG309 is displayed (see FIG. 115(F)), after which the background image reverts to the first background image 006SG081 and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-jackpot combination is displayed stationary (see FIG. 115(G)).

(Details of the performance)
Next, detailed explanations will be given for each of the effects that can be executed in this embodiment. As shown in Fig. 116, Fig. 118, Fig. 99, and Fig. 100, in the first and second continuous crack effects, first, a first stage crack is displayed for 500 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (first stage crack display period). Next, when the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack comes, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). Also, after a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken (whiteout display early period), a whiteout image 006SG303 having a higher transmittance than that of the whiteout display early period is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display late period). Therefore, in the first and second continuous broken effects of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to view the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 600 ms period including the later whiteout display period following the earlier whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is visible to the player as this is the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

Furthermore, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, second-stage cracks are displayed around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (target area for the break effect) for 3000 ms (second-stage crack display period). Note that the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first and second continuous break effects are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the first and second continuous cracking effects, the cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms, which is the crack display period described above, and the cracking sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking (crack sound output period). Note that the types of cracking sound and cracking effect sound output are the same in the first and second continuous cracking effects, but in the first continuous cracking effect, a first character voice corresponding to the character in FIG. 99(E) is output together with the cracking effect sound, and in the second continuous cracking effect, a second character voice corresponding to the character in FIG. 100(E) is output together with the cracking effect sound. This makes it easy to distinguish between the first and second continuous cracking effects. Furthermore, the cracking sound is louder than the cracking sound and is easier for players to recognize, but the first character voice and the second character voice are output at an even louder volume than the cracking sound and have a longer output period than the cracking sound, making them easier for players to recognize than the cracking sound.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image illumination data table until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination is not primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), and for the 800 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the timing of the end of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination is primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the breaking presentation by using the illumination data table for the breaking presentation (whiteout 800 ms). After the illumination in the manner corresponding to the breaking presentation ends, illumination is again performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) by using the normal background image illumination data table. The light emission data table for the cracked effect (whiteout 800 ms) is a data table for making the game effect lamp 9 emit white light at high brightness for 400 ms, which corresponds to the early period of the whiteout display, and for making the game effect lamp 9 emit white light alternately at high and low brightness for 400 ms, which corresponds to the later period of the whiteout display.

As shown in Figures 116, 119 and 101, the dialogue preview performance begins with an operation promotion image being displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 3000 ms to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B (operation promotion performance execution period). When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation promotion performance or when the operation promotion performance execution period ends, a first stage crack is displayed for 500 ms from that timing (first stage crack display period). Next, when the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break arrives, a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, causing the fragment image 006SG302 to be displayed for 1000 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 400 ms (whiteout display late period). Therefore, in the dialogue preview performance of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period 400 ms from the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to view the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 600 ms including the whiteout display late period after the whiteout display early period, the player can view the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

Furthermore, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, second-stage cracks are displayed for 5000 ms around the broken area of the glass plate image 006SG301A (the area targeted by the break effect). The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the dialogue preview effect are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the dialogue preview performance, cracking sounds corresponding to the display of the cracks are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms, which is the crack display period of the first stage described above (crack sound output period), and cracking effect sounds corresponding to the cracking effect are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks (cracked effect sound output period). Note that the types of cracking sounds and cracking effect sounds output are the same in the dialogue preview performance and the first and second continuous cracking effects, and in the dialogue preview performance, after the cracking effect sound is output (when the cracking effect sound output period has elapsed), a dialogue voice sound corresponding to the type of text image 006SG306 is output. This prevents the dialogue voice sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the cracking effect sound.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, the normal background image illumination data table is used until the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, and illumination that does not mainly emit white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) is performed, and for the 800 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the timing when the whiteout display latter period ends, the illumination data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 800 ms) is used, and illumination that mainly emits white light in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect is performed. After the illumination in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect ends, the normal background image illumination data table is used again to emit illumination in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081).

As shown in Figures 116, 120(A), 120(B), 102, and 103, the background change performance A of the successful pattern is as follows: first, as a pre-stage action, a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed for 2000 ms (pre-stage action period). From the end of the pre-stage action (character action), a crack is displayed for 2000 ms (crack display period).

As shown in FIG. 120(B), the 2000 ms crack display period is made up of a 1000 ms early crack display period and a 1000 ms late crack display period following the early crack display period. During the early crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the character's action is displayed for 100 ms from the start of the early crack display period, and a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed for 200 ms.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that was displayed at that time is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see FIG. 103). Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the background change presentation A of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 2000 ms period that includes the late whiteout display period following the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as this is the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed during background change presentation A in a successful pattern are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the background change performance A in the successful pattern, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the pre-crack display period described above (cracking sound output period), and a character voice corresponding to the character's action is output, and a cracking performance sound corresponding to the cracking performance is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 2500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (cracked performance sound output period). The cracking effect sound in the background change effect A is a sound exclusive to the background change effect A, and is composed of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect of notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image. During the output period of 2500 ms, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and the sound effect of notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image are output for 1000 ms, and then the sound effect of notifying that the background image has been switched to a chance background image is continuously output for 1500 ms. In addition, the output period of the cracking sound is set to 500 ms, but it may be set to 2000 ms corresponding to the crack display period, or a sound according to the progress of the cracking may be output for 2000 ms. In addition, the action effect sound is output for 100 ms corresponding to the action effect display period, overlapping with the cracking sound. The action effect sound is a sound that is output at a louder volume than the crackling sound, and the crackling sound is difficult to hear when the action effect sound is output, but because the output period of the action effect sound is shorter than that of the crackling sound, the crackling sound can be heard after the action effect sound is output.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, a normal background image illumination data table is used until the start of the crack display period, and illumination is not primarily white light in a manner that corresponds to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081), and for the 2000 ms from the start of the crack display period to the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, an illumination data table for the crack display period that mainly causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit white light is used, and illumination is in a manner that corresponds to the display of a crack. Furthermore, for the 1000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked to the end of the later whiteout display period, an illumination data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is used, and illumination is primarily white light in a manner that corresponds to the crack effect. After the light emission in the mode corresponding to the cracking effect is finished, the light emission is performed in a mode corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) without mainly white light emission by using the light emission data table for the chance background image. The light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000ms) is a data table for making the game effect lamp 9 emit white light at high brightness for 500ms corresponding to the early period of the whiteout display, and for 500ms corresponding to the late period of the whiteout display, the game effect lamp 9 emits white light alternately at high brightness and low brightness. Although an example of using the light emission data table for the normal background image in the early operation period has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light using the light emission data table for the early operation that mainly emits green light corresponding to the character in FIG. 102(D) during the early operation period. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits green light corresponding to the character in Fig. 102(D) until the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, but after the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 mainly emits white light corresponding to the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A. In this way, a difference is created between before the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed and when the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed, so that the presentation effect of the background change presentation A can be further enhanced. Both the light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) are light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack display period is executed without a blinking pattern.

As shown in FIG. 120(C), in the background change performance A in the failure pattern, the character is not displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-stage operation. In other words, in the background change performance A in the failure pattern, the character is not displayed, so the cracking performance is not executed, and the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 102(B) and (C), although a teasing performance is performed as to whether or not the character will be displayed, since neither the character nor the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the normal background image light emission data table is used as the light emission data table.

As shown in Figures 116, 121(A), and 104, in the background change presentation B of the successful pattern, first, a first-stage crack is displayed for 3000 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (first-stage crack display period). During the first-stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed for 200 ms from the start timing of the first-stage crack display period.

In addition, from the timing when 1500 ms have elapsed in the first-stage crack display period, second-stage cracks are displayed in a wider area of the display area of the image display device 5 than during the first-stage crack display period for 1500 ms (second-stage crack display period). Note that even during the second-stage crack display period, a small fragment image 006SG302A, which is smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, is displayed for 200 ms from the start timing of the second-stage crack display period. Note that the small fragment image 006SG302A during the first stage crack display period and the small fragment image 006SG302A during the second stage crack display period have different parameter values for "strength" and "repetition" shown in FIG. 130, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image, but because the parameter value for "gravity" is the same, they are both displayed out of the frame downwards.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) that was displayed at that time is updated to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) (see FIG. 104). Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1250 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the background change presentation A of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 750 ms including the late whiteout display period following the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as this is the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change presentation B in the successful pattern are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the background change performance B in the successful pattern, a first stage crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the first stage crack display period (first stage crack sound output period), a second stage crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the second stage crack display period (second stage crack sound output period), and a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 150 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks (crack effect sound output period). The cracking effect sound in the background change performance B is a sound exclusive to the background change performance B, and is composed of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect notifying that the background image has switched to a chance background image. During the output period of 1250 ms, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and the sound effect notifying that the background image has switched to a chance background image are output for 1000 ms, and then the sound effect notifying that the background image has switched to a chance background image is output continuously for 250 ms. The volume of the cracking in the background change performance B is the loudest for the cracking effect sound, and the volume of the first stage cracking sound and the second stage cracking sound may be the same, or the second stage cracking sound may be louder than the first stage cracking sound.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, the illumination is not primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) until the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, by using the illumination data table for the normal background image, and for the 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the timing when the whiteout display latter period ends, the illumination is primarily white light in a manner corresponding to the cracking effect, by using the illumination data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000 ms). After the illumination in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect ends, the illumination is in a manner corresponding to the display of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) by using the illumination data table for the chance background image.

As shown in Figures 121 (B) and 121 (C), the background change presentation B in failure pattern 1 is a presentation pattern in which a first-stage crack is displayed for 1500 ms and a small fragment image corresponding to the first-stage crack is displayed for 200 ms, but a second-stage crack is not displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, while the background change presentation B in failure pattern 2 is a presentation pattern in which a first-stage crack is displayed for 3000 ms and a small fragment image is displayed for 200 ms, and a second-stage crack is displayed for 1500 ms from the timing when 1500 ms has elapsed during the first-stage crack display period and a small fragment image corresponding to the second-stage crack is displayed for 200 ms, but the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break. In these failure patterns, in background change performance B, the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break, so the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) continues to be displayed.

As shown in Figures 116, 122, and 105, the pseudo consecutive performance first temporarily stops the "left" decorative pattern, the "right" decorative pattern, and the "middle" decorative pattern in that order in the display area of the image display device 5. Then, from the timing when the pseudo consecutive pattern, which is the "middle" decorative pattern, stops, cracks are displayed for 1500 ms (crack display period). During the crack display period, the movable body 32 falls for 1500 ms as a pre-stage operation (movable body fall period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (1500 ms has passed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to crack. Note that the cracks during the crack display period of the pseudo consecutive performance and the cracks during the crack display period of the background change performance A are designed to appear differently. For example, the cracks in the background change effect A are displayed in such a way that the cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301 progress in stages over the pre-crack display period and the post-crack display period, whereas the cracks in the pseudo consecutive effects are displayed in such a way that the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks all at once.

Next, when the time comes for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1000 ms from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (fragment image display period). Also, from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms to hide the fragment image 006SG302 from the player (early whiteout display period), after which a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the early whiteout display period is displayed for 500 ms (late whiteout display period). For this reason, in the pseudo consecutive performance of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the later whiteout display period of 500 ms, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period. In addition, the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 3000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the pseudo consecutive performance are not transparent, and the player cannot see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, for 3000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the speakers 8L and 8R output a breaking sound corresponding to the breaking effect (breaking sound output period). In addition, the breaking sound in the pseudo consecutive performance is a sound dedicated to the pseudo consecutive performance, and is a sound composed of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32. During the output period of 3000 ms, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking and the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 are output for 1000 ms, and then the sound effect of the action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 is output continuously for 2000 ms. After that, after the output period of the breaking sound ends, BGM corresponding to the normal background image or the chance background image is output, so that various sounds are output during the rising period of the movable body 32. Furthermore, from the end of the later whiteout display period, i.e., the end of the display of the fragment image 006G302, the movable body 32 rises to its initial position over a period of 3000 ms (movable body rise period).

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table until the start timing of the crack display, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and for the 2000 ms from the start timing of the crack display to the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking, illumination that mainly consists of white light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the crack display by using the illumination data table for the crack display. And for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking to the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination that mainly consists of white light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the crack display by using the illumination data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms). After the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect, the illumination is performed in the manner corresponding to the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is performed, by using the illumination data table for the pseudo consecutive performance corresponding to the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is performed, for 2000 ms. For example, when the first pseudo consecutive performance is performed, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in green in response to the first pseudo consecutive performance, and when the second pseudo consecutive performance is performed, the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in red in response to the second pseudo consecutive performance. After the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is performed, the illumination data table for the normal background image or the illumination data table for the chance background image is used again to illuminate in the manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082). Both the light emission data table for the crack display period and the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) are light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack display period is executed without a blinking pattern.

As shown in Figures 120 and 122, the present embodiment illustrates an example in which the crack display period is different between background change performance A and pseudo consecutive performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the length of the crack display period may be the same between background change performance A and pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in Figures 116, 123 (A), 106 and 107, the reach indication performance for a successful pattern is as follows: first, as a pre-stage operation, a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, an image acting on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and an image acting on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed in sequence over a period of 10,000 ms (pre-stage operation period). During the first stage operation period, from the moment the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 8000 ms (left crack display period), and further, from the moment the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 4000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and small fragment images 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start of the right crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100 ms, and small fragment images 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. In addition, the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the small fragment images 006SG302A displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R have different parameter values for "strength" and "repetition" shown in FIG. 130, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image, but because the parameter value for "gravity" is the same, they are both displayed out of the frame in a downward direction.

When the previous operation period ends due to the character acting on the "medium" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301 during the previous operation period, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that was displayed up until that time is updated to a normal reach background image corresponding to the reach performance of the normal reach. Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2000 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, after the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). Therefore, in the reach suggestion performance of the successful pattern of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period of 500 ms from the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to view the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 1500 ms including the whiteout display late period after the whiteout display early period, the player can view the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 viewable period.

Furthermore, from the end of the later whiteout display period, the decorative symbols are highlighted for 3000 ms to inform the player that a win has been reached, for example by temporarily enlarging the decorative symbols (decorative symbol highlighting period).

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed during the reach suggestion performance in a successful pattern are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, in the reach suggestion performance in the successful pattern, a left crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the left crack display period described above (left crack sound output period) and a first character voice corresponding to the character's first action action is output, a right crack sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 500 ms from the start of the right crack display period described above (right crack sound output period) and a second character voice corresponding to the character's second action action is output, and a crack effect sound corresponding to the crack effect is output from speakers 8L, 8R for 2000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (crack effect sound output period). In addition, the cracking effect sound in the reach suggestion effect (success pattern) is a sound dedicated to the reach suggestion effect, and is composed of a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking and a sound effect of highlighting the decorative pattern to inform the player that the reach has been reached by temporarily enlarging the decorative pattern, etc., and the highlighting sound effect is output together with the cracking sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A for 1000 ms out of the output period of 3000 ms, and then the highlighting sound effect is output continuously for 2000 ms. After that, after the output period of the cracking effect sound ends, the BGM corresponding to the normal reach background image is output. In addition, when an action effect corresponding to the action of the character is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output, and this sound effect is used both when the action effect is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and when it is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

Furthermore, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the normal background image illumination data table or the chance background image illumination data table until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is performed, and for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the timing of the end of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination that mainly consists of white light in a manner corresponding to the breaking presentation is performed by using the illumination data table for the breaking presentation (whiteout 1000 ms). After the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the breaking presentation, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image is performed by using the normal reach background image illumination data table.

As shown in FIG. 123(B), the reach suggestion performance in the failure pattern is performed as a preliminary operation in which a character is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the character acting on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, an image of the character acting on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and an image of the character acting on the "center" decorative pattern display area 5C are displayed in sequence for 14,000 ms (preliminary operation period). During the preliminary operation period, from the timing when the character acts on the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 12,000 ms (left crack display period), and further, from the timing when the character acts on the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 8,000 ms (right crack display period).

During the left crack display period, from the start of the left crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 100 ms, and small fragment images 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks are displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L for 200 ms, and from the start of the right crack display period, action effects corresponding to the character's actions are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 100 ms, and small fragment images 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the time the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks are displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R for 200 ms. Furthermore, the small fragment images 006SG302 in failure patterns are displayed based on the same parameter values as the small fragment images 006SG302 in success patterns, so the player cannot tell whether it is a success pattern or a failure pattern by looking at the speed at which the small fragment images 006SG302 scatter or the size and number of each small fragment image, so it is possible to favorably infer whether a normal reach will be executed or not.

In addition, in the reach suggestion performance of the failure pattern, a left cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the left crack display period described above (left cracking sound output period), and a right cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the right crack display period described above (right cracking sound output period). Furthermore, from the same timing as the cracking timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A in the reach suggestion performance of the success pattern (the timing when 10,000 has passed from the start of the reach suggestion performance of the failure pattern), a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1000 ms (whiteout display period). The whiteout display period is a period during which other images displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 are made invisible to the player by the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Furthermore, when an action effect corresponding to a character's action is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the action effect is output, and this sound effect is used both when the action effect is displayed around the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and when it is displayed around the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

In the reach suggestion performance of the failure pattern, until the start timing of the whiteout display period, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) or the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) using the light emission data table for the normal background image or the chance background image, and then during the whiteout display period, light is emitted mainly in white in a manner corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 using the light emission data table for whiteout. Then, from the end timing of the whiteout display period, light is emitted mainly in white in a manner corresponding to the notification that the reach will not be reached (the reach suggestion performance is a failure pattern) using the light emission data table for failure notification. In addition, light emission in a manner corresponding to the notification that the reach will not be reached (the reach suggestion performance is a failure pattern) ends when the variable display stops. The light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms), the light emission data table for the whiteout, and the light emission data table for the failure notification are all light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the whiteout and the light emission data table for the failure notification is executed without a blinking pattern. Also, while the game effect lamp 9 is emitting light based on the light emission data table for the failure notification (until the variable display ends due to the stopping of the variable display), no effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figures 117, 124, and 108, the weak development presentation is first performed by displaying a character in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-stage operation, and displaying an image of the character acting on the center of the display area of the image display device 5 for 4000 ms (pre-stage operation period). Note that although the pre-stage operation period is set to 4000 ms, a separate pre-stage operation period (2000 ms) pattern may be set, and when indicating to the player that there is a high probability of a jackpot, it may be determined that the weak development presentation is executed more frequently using the pre-stage operation period (2000 ms) pattern than the pre-stage operation period (4000 ms) pattern.

Next, when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the normal reach background image corresponding to the reach effect of the normal reach that had been displayed up until that point is updated to a weak development effect background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the weak development effect, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks, causing the display of the fragment image 006SG302 for 3,500 ms (fragment image display period). Also, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), after which a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than that in the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the weak development effect of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 because it is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303. On the other hand, during the 3000 ms including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period. Then, when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the weak development effect background image corresponding to the weak development effect that was displayed up until that time is updated to the Super Reach α background image corresponding to the reach effect of the Super Reach α.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the weak development effect are not transparent, and the player cannot see other images (e.g., background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Although the fragment images 006SG302 in the weak development effect are not transparent, this is the final display mode of the fragment images 006SG302, and the fragment images 006SG302 in the weak development effect are displayed in a transparent mode with transparency (e.g., a transmittance of 70% or more) for 1500 ms from the start of display during the fragment image display period of 3500 ms, and then gradually change to a non-transparent mode with no transparency (e.g., a transmittance of 70% to 10%) for 1000 ms, and then are displayed in a non-transparent mode with no transparency (e.g., a transmittance of less than 10%) for 1000 ms.

In addition, in the weak development effect, a cracking effect sound corresponding to the cracking effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A cracks (cracked effect sound output period). In addition to the cracking effect sound, a weak development effect sound is also output for 3500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image cracks. Note that the cracking effect sound is louder than the weak development effect sound, making it easier for players to recognize.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the illumination data table for the normal reach background image until the start timing of the previous stage operation, illumination is not primarily white in a manner corresponding to the display of the normal reach background image, and for the 4000 ms from the start timing of the previous stage operation to the timing of the breaking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, illumination is not primarily white in a manner corresponding to the weak development presentation by using the illumination data table for the weak development presentation, and for the 1000 ms from the timing of the breaking of the glass plate image 006SG301A to the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination is primarily white in a manner corresponding to the break presentation by using the illumination data table for the break presentation (whiteout 1000 ms), and for the 2500 ms from the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display to the end timing of the fragment image display period, illumination is again in a manner corresponding to the weak development presentation by using the illumination table for the weak development presentation. Furthermore, after the light emission in the manner corresponding to the cracking effect has ended, the light emission data table for the Super Reach α background image is used to emit light that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (Weak S Reach effect image 006SG088).

In the weak development performance of this embodiment, the background image is updated from the weak development performance background image to the Super Reach α background image from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the background image is updated from the weak development performance background image to the Super Reach α background image, the image display device 5 may display a whiteout image 006SG303 to make the update from the weak development performance background image to the Super Reach α background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. In this way, when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5 when the background image is updated from the weak development performance background image to the Super Reach α background image, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout illumination data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. Furthermore, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed from a timing before the fragment image display period ends (for example, 500 ms before the end), in which case the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 will start before the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed out of the frame.

As shown in Figures 117, 125, and 109, in the strong development performance A, first, as a preliminary operation, the moving body 32 falls for 1000 ms (movable body falling period). When the falling operation of the moving body 32 is completed (1000 ms has passed), it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break.

Next, when the time comes for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) that has been displayed up until that point in time and corresponds to the Super Reach α reach effect is updated to the Strong Development Effect A background image (background effect image 006SG322) that corresponds to the Strong Development Effect A, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1500 ms (fragment image display period).

After the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 1500 ms from the timing of the falling of the movable body 32 to hide the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player (whiteout display early period), a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the strong development performance A of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period 1500 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 500 ms of the whiteout display late period following the whiteout display early period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance A are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

And when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the strong development performance A background image corresponding to the strong development performance A that was displayed at that time is updated to the Super Reach β background image corresponding to the reach performance of the Super Reach β. The movable body 32 that fell as the previous operation is placed at the falling position during the fragment image display period described above, and rises to the initial position of the movable body 32 for 1500 ms from the end timing of the fragment image display period (movable body rising period). Note that from the timing when the movable body 32 starts to rise (start timing of the movable body rising period), a sound corresponding to the strong development performance A (strong development performance A performance sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 2500 ms. Note that in the strong development performance A, unlike the weak development performance, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is not output, so you can enjoy the breakage performance unique to the strong development performance A. Also, in the strong development performance A, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the strong development performance A performance sound high.

In addition, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the Super Reach α background image illumination data table until the timing of the falling of the movable body 32, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is produced in a manner that corresponds to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach presentation image 006SG088), and by using the Strong Development Presentation A illumination data table for 2500 ms from the timing when the movable body 32 starts to fall to the timing when the fragment image display period ends, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is produced in a manner that corresponds to the Strong Development Presentation A. In addition, from the timing when the movable body 32 starts to rise (the timing when the fragment image display period ends), illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is produced in a manner that corresponds to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) by using the Super Reach β background image illumination data table.

In the present embodiment, the strong development performance A shows an example in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed as the early whiteout display period of 1500 ms from the timing of the falling of the movable body 32, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the early whiteout display period of the strong development performance A may be a period in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed for 500 ms or 400 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking.

As shown in Figures 117, 126, 110, and 111, in the strong development performance B, first, cracks are displayed for 1500 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 without any movement of the movable body 32 or action of the character (crack display period). From the start timing of the crack display period, small fragment images 006SG302A, which are smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, are displayed for 200 ms. Note that the small fragment images 006SG302A in the strong development performance B and the small fragment images 006SG302A in the reach suggestion performance, etc. have different parameter values for "strength" and "repetition" shown in Figure 130, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image.

When 1500 ms has passed and the crack display period has ended, it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break. When it is time for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach performance that has been displayed up until that time is updated to Strong Development Performance B corresponding to the Strong Development Performance B. Furthermore, from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 3000 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). Therefore, in the strong development performance B of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to view the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 2500 ms including the whiteout display late period after the whiteout display early period, the player can view the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance B are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images, etc.) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development performance B are displayed in slow motion after starting to be displayed at the normal moving speed, normal rotating speed, and normal falling speed.

And when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, the strong development performance B background image (background effect image 006SG322) corresponding to the strong development performance B that was displayed at that time is updated to the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the reach performance of the Super Reach β. In addition, in the strong development performance B, a cracking sound corresponding to the display of the crack is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the start timing of the crack display period described above (crack sound output period), and a sound corresponding to the strong development performance B (strong development performance B performance sound) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R for 3000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking to the end timing of the fragment image display period. In addition, in the strong development performance B, unlike the weak development performance, the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A cracking is not output, so you can enjoy the cracking performance unique to the strong development performance B. Additionally, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output during strong development performance B. In this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the strong development performance B sound high.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach α background image until the start timing of the crack display, illumination is not primarily white in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (image 006SG088 for weak S reach presentation), and by using the illumination data table for the strong development presentation B for the 1500 ms from the start timing of the crack display to the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination is not primarily white in a manner corresponding to the strong development presentation B, and by using the illumination data table for the break presentation (whiteout 1000 ms) for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination is primarily white in a manner corresponding to the break presentation, and by using the illumination data table for the strong development presentation B for the 2000 ms from the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display to the end timing of the fragment image display period, illumination is in a manner corresponding to the strong development presentation B. Furthermore, after the illumination in the manner corresponding to the strong development performance B has ended, the illumination data table for the Super Reach B background image is used to illuminate the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) in a manner that does not primarily consist of white light.

In the strong development performance B of this embodiment, the background image is updated from the strong development performance B background image to the Super Reach β background image from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the background image is updated from the strong development performance B background image to the Super Reach β background image, the image display device 5 may display a whiteout image 006SG303 to make the update from the strong development performance B background image to the Super Reach β background image difficult or impossible for the player to see. When the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5 when the background image is updated from the strong development performance B background image to the Super Reach β background image in this way, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated using a whiteout illumination data table corresponding to the display of the whiteout image 006SG303. In this case, the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000 ms) and the light emission data table for the whiteout are both light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the cracking effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the whiteout is executed without a blinking pattern. Also, although the crack display period for the strong development effect B is set to 1500 ms, the crack may be displayed for a period longer than 1500 ms until the cracking timing. For example, the crack may be displayed so that the crack gradually expands at the first timing, second timing, and third timing between the start timing of the super reach α and the cracking timing.

As shown in Figures 117, 127, and 112, the cut-in effect first involves displaying an operation prompting image for 3000 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B (operation prompting effect execution period). In particular, during the execution period of the operation prompting effect in this embodiment, the operation prompting image is displayed as a pre-operation state image in which the push button 31B is in a protruding state before being operated by the player (pre-operation state image display period).

When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation prompting effect, or when the execution period of the operation prompting effect ends, the timing is set as the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 2500 ms (fragment image display period). In addition, from the timing for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break until the timing for the end of the cut-in effect (for 5000 ms from the timing for the break), a suggestive image according to the effect pattern is displayed, and after a whiteout image 006SG303 for hiding the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the cut-in performance of this embodiment, during the early whiteout display period of 500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image. On the other hand, during the 2000 ms including the late whiteout display period after the early whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 and the suggestive image as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period. In addition, the background effect image 006SG322 is also displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302 for 5000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the cut-in effect are transparent, allowing the player to see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through the fragment images 006SG302. Furthermore, the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in effect are displayed in slow motion after starting to be displayed at the normal moving speed, normal rotating speed, and normal falling speed.

Furthermore, from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, a post-operation state image, which is the state after the push button 31B is operated by the player, is displayed for 1000 ms (post-operation state image display period). Since the post-operation state image is an image that is displayed with priority over the whiteout image 006SG303, the player can view the operation state image for 1000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks.

In addition, in a cut-in performance, a cut-in performance sound corresponding to the cut-in performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 3000 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (cut-in performance sound output period). Note that, unlike weak development performances, the cut-in performance does not output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, so you can enjoy the breaking performance that is unique to cut-in performances. Also, a sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be output in the cut-in performance, in which case the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the cut-in performance sound high.

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the illumination data table for the Super Reach β background image until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) is performed, and for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display, illumination data table for the breaking effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is used, and for the period from the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display to the end timing of the suggestive image display period, illumination data table for the cut-in effect is used, and for the period from the end timing of the later period of the whiteout display to the end timing of the suggestive image display period, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the cut-in performance is used. Furthermore, after the light emission in the manner corresponding to the cut-in performance ends, the light emission data table for the Super Reach β background image is used again to emit light that does not primarily consist of white light in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084).

As shown in Figures 117, 128(A), 113, and 114, the result notification performance of the successful pattern begins with a preliminary operation in which the movable body 32 falls for 500 ms (movable fall resistance period). When the falling operation of the movable body 32 is completed (500 ms has passed), a crack is displayed for 500 ms in the display area of the image display device 5 (crack display period). During this crack display period, from the start of the crack display period, an action effect corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 is displayed for 100 ms, and a small fragment image 006SG302A smaller in size than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking is displayed for 200 ms. In addition, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (success pattern/failure pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the reach suggestion performance, etc. have different parameter values of "strength" and "repetition" shown in FIG. 130, so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image. In addition, the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (success pattern) and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (failure pattern) have different parameter values of "strength" and "repetition", so they are designed to have different scattering speeds and different sizes and numbers for each small fragment image.

Next, when the time comes for the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) corresponding to the Super Reach α reach performance or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) corresponding to the Super Reach β reach performance that had been displayed up until that time is updated to a jackpot notification background image (fifth background image 006SG085) indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot, and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for 1,500 ms (fragment image display period). Although not specifically shown in FIG. 128(A), the jackpot notification background image is displayed for 10,000 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and is updated to the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) after 10,000 ms has elapsed (before the variable display of the variable display stops), and then is updated to the jackpot game background image according to the jackpot game status from the time when the variable display of the variable display stops.

After the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, a whiteout image 006SG303 for concealing the above-mentioned fragment image 006SG302 from the player is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display early period), and then a whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than the whiteout display early period is displayed for 500 ms (whiteout display late period). For this reason, in the result notification performance of the successful pattern of this embodiment, during the whiteout display early period of 500 ms from the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, the player is blocked by the whiteout image 006SG303 and is unable to see the fragment image 006SG302. On the other hand, during the 1000 ms including the whiteout display late period after the whiteout display early period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 as the fragment image 006SG302 visible period.

The fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the result notification performance for successful patterns are transparent, and the player can see other images (e.g., background images) displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302.

The rise of the movable body 32 to its initial position takes place over a period of 1,500 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (the movable body rise period).

In addition, in the result notification performance in the success pattern, a jackpot confirmation sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R for 1500 ms from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (jackpot confirmation sound output period) to notify that a jackpot has been confirmed. Note that, unlike the weak development performance, the result notification performance (success pattern) does not output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, so that it is possible to conveniently notify that a jackpot has been confirmed. In addition, the result notification performance (success pattern) may output the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, and in this case, the output of the sound effect of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking may be limited by setting the priority of the jackpot confirmation sound high.

In addition, for the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, by using the Super Reach α background image illumination data table or the Super Reach β background image illumination data table until the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, illumination that does not mainly consist of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and for the 1000 ms from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking to the timing of the end of the whiteout display latter period, illumination that mainly consists of white light is performed in a manner corresponding to the breaking performance by using the illumination data table for the breaking performance (whiteout 1000 ms). Furthermore, after the end of the illumination in the manner corresponding to the breaking performance, illumination in a manner corresponding to the display of the big win notification background image is performed by using the big win notification background image illumination data table. Furthermore, from the timing when the variable display stops, the light emission data table for jackpot play is used to emit mainly rainbow-colored light in a manner that corresponds to the display of the jackpot play background image.

As shown in FIG. 128(B), in the result notification performance in the failure pattern, the movable body 32 does not fall, and no cracks are displayed due to the fall of the movable body 32. Instead, cracks are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 for 5,500 ms from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A in the success pattern breaks (crack display period). Also, from the start of the crack display period, the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) or Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), which had been displayed in color until then, is updated to a monochrome miss notification background image, which is an image indicating that the variable display result is a miss. The display of the miss notification background image continues until the end of the crack display period, at which point it is updated to a color eye-catching image. The display period of the eye-catching image is, for example, 1000 ms, and after the display period of the eye-catching image ends, the display of the normal color background image (first background image 006SG081) starts, which is the same color as the eye-catching image. In other words, in the failure pattern result notification performance in this embodiment, after the variable display result is notified by displaying a monochrome failure notification background image, the eye-catching image, which is a color image, and the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) are displayed.

In addition, in the result notification performance for the failure pattern, crack effect sounds corresponding to the cracks are output from speakers 8L and 8R for 500 ms from the start timing of the crack display period described above (crack effect sound output period).

Furthermore, with regard to the illumination of the game effect lamp 9, until the start timing of the crack display period, the Super Reach α background image illumination data table or the Super Reach β background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the Super Reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088) or the Super Reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and from the start timing of the crack display period to the stop timing of the variable display, the loss notification background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that primarily consists of white light is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the loss notification background image. Furthermore, from the stop timing of the variable display, the normal background image illumination data table is used, and illumination that does not primarily consist of white light is performed in a manner that corresponds to the display of the normal background image (first background image 006SG081). Both the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) and the light emission data table for the miss notification background image are light emission data tables that mainly emit white light, but the white light emission based on the light emission data table for the crack effect (whiteout 1000 ms) is executed with a blinking pattern that alternates between high-luminance white light emission and low-luminance white light emission, whereas the white light emission based on the light emission data table for whiteout is executed without a blinking pattern.

In the present embodiment, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are exemplified as starting to display the whiteout image 006SG303 from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (the timing when the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the whiteout image 006SG303 in each effect may start to be displayed from a timing earlier than the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks (the timing when the fragment image 006SG302 starts to be displayed).

(Speed of the pieces when the shattering effect is performed)
Next, an explanation will be given of the display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed when a breaking effect is executed as the above-mentioned first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, or result notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 129(A), among these effects, the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A that is displayed when the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, and the break effect as the result notification effect are executed is displayed moving at a constant speed V1 (normal motion) throughout the fragment image display period, which includes the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 129 (B), the fragment image 006SG302 of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed when a strong development performance B or a broken performance as a cut-in performance is executed is displayed moving at a speed V1 over the 1000 ms between the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period, while during the fragment image display period after the late whiteout display period (2000 ms for strong development performance B and 1500 ms for a cut-in performance), it is displayed moving at a speed V0 (slow motion) which is slower than speed V1. In addition, FIG. 129 shows the strong development performance B and the cut-in performance as performances in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a speed V0, but as described below, for the background change performance B and the strong development performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 is also displayed moving at a speed V0, and when it is suggested to the player that there is a high probability of a jackpot, it is decided that the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance B and the strong development performance A will be displayed moving at a speed V0 at a rate higher than the speed V1.

(Details of the cracking effect)
Next, details of the cracking effect will be described with reference to Fig. 130 and Fig. 131. Fig. 130 is a diagram showing cracking patterns in the cracking effect. Fig. 131 is a diagram showing display examples of each cracking pattern.

As shown in Figures 130 and 131, in the breaking effect executed in various effects, at a predetermined breaking timing, some kind of impact (force) is applied from the rear to the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area, and the breaking image is animated to show a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 that imitate at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A scattering in the layer 5 image drawing area. In other words, the breaking effect is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area changes to a fragment image 006SG302, so that the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a broken state (fragment state). In this embodiment, the breaking is started by a sphere colliding with the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301A from the rear.

The animation display of a glass plate breaking and scattering fragment images is actually composed of a number of still images (e.g., about 30 to 100 frames) according to the period during which the fragment images are displayed, but in Figure 131, five still images are extracted from the multiple still images that compose the animation display of the fragment images from the start to the end of the breaking performance and arranged in chronological order. Also, in Figure 131, the five frames of images for each breaking pattern are not five consecutive frames, and in reality, multiple frames of fragment images (not shown) are arranged between each frame.

There are various ways in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, and multiple types of breaking patterns (e.g., breaking patterns A to G) are preset, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a breaking performance based on a preset breaking pattern according to the type of performance to be executed.

Specifically, breaking pattern A is a pattern that corresponds to the background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect, breaking pattern B is a pattern that corresponds to the background change effect B and the strong development effect B, breaking pattern C is a pattern that corresponds to the pseudo consecutive effect and the result notification effect (jackpot), breaking pattern D is a pattern that corresponds to the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect and the dialogue preview effect, breaking pattern E is a pattern that corresponds to the weak development effect, breaking pattern F is a pattern that corresponds to the strong development effect A, and breaking pattern G is a pattern that corresponds to the cut-in effect.

Each crack pattern A to G is a pattern that differs in at least one of the following items: "acting agent," "crack type," "crack range," and "fragment image display type." Note that the display period and display timing are as explained in Figures 116 and 117, so explanations will be omitted below.

"Action subject" refers to the subject of action on the glass plate image 006SG301A, with crack patterns A and E resulting in a crack effect in response to the movement of the "character," crack patterns C and F resulting in a crack effect in response to the movement of the "movable body," and crack patterns B and D resulting in a crack effect at a predetermined timing regardless of the action subject. "Crack appearance" refers to whether the glass plate image 006SG301A changes to a crack appearance before it is broken, with crack patterns A to D resulting in a crack appearance after the "crack appearance" is displayed, and crack patterns E to G resulting in a crack appearance without the "crack appearance" being displayed. Note that "crack appearance" includes multiple types of appearances that differ in the display position on the display screen, the number of times displayed, the shape of the crack, etc. "Crack range" refers to the range in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked, with crack patterns A to C and E to G representing the "whole" display screen, and crack pattern D representing "part." "Fragment image display mode" indicates whether fragment image 006SG302 is transparent or not, with part of fragment pattern B and fragment pattern E being "non-transparent" and the other fragment patterns being "transparent."

In this embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301A, the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment image 006SG302 are set to be illuminated with light (illumination) from the front side of the approximate center position of the display screen. Therefore, the "non-transparent" fragment image 006SG302 reflects light, making it difficult to see the lower layer image drawing area, and the "transparent" fragment image 006SG302 does not reflect light at a first angle (for example, a large angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is 45 degrees to 90 degrees) and is therefore easy to transmit, making it easy to see the lower layer image drawing area, while at a second angle (for example, a small angle where the incident angle of the irradiated light on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees), it reflects light and is therefore difficult to transmit, making it difficult to see the lower layer image drawing area (see FIG. 140). For example, among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 at a specific timing within the fragment image display period, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a first angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at a second angle, and then, as the multiple fragment images 006SG302 move over time, the first fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the second angle, and the second fragment image 006SG302 is displayed at the first angle. Note that the type, intensity, color, top/bottom/left/right position, depth position, and other settings of this light can be changed in various ways, and light setting values may be changed depending on the crack pattern.

The multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks include multiple fragment images 006SG302 with different shapes, sizes, thicknesses, etc. Each fragment image 006SG302 moves in various directions while rotating at various speeds in various orientations during the display period from when the display starts to when it ends and becomes non-display. Specifically, some are displayed moving in the X-axis direction (left-right direction), some in the Y-axis direction (up-down direction), and some in the Z-axis direction (front-back direction), and some have different moving speeds, rotation speeds, rotation numbers, display periods, etc. The moving direction includes not only one of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis, but also multiple axial directions (e.g., XY-axis and XY-axis directions) of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis.

In other words, in addition to the above-mentioned items of "acting agent," "crack type," "crack range," and "fragment image display type," each of the crack patterns A to G is a pattern that differs in at least one of the display types of at least some of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 when they scatter, such as the shape, size, rotation speed, number of rotations, movement direction [X-axis (left-right direction), Y-axis (up-down direction), Z-axis (front-back direction)], movement speed, and display period.

Crack patterns A to G are animations of cracks created, for example, using the shutter function of a specific animation creation software, and the created crack patterns A to G have different values for at least some of the multiple parameters shown below.

To briefly explain each parameter shown in Figure 130, "gravity" allows you to set gravity and adjust the acceleration at which the scattered fragments gradually fall. Since it is gravity, it is not constant, but gradually accelerates downward. "Gravity direction" allows you to set the direction in which gravity is applied, and you can specify up, down, left, and right directions based on 0 degrees (upward). "Gravity gradient" allows you to adjust gravity more in the Z-axis direction (front to back), and the value set with this parameter is combined with "gravity direction". All directions in 3D space, including front to back, up, down, left and right, can be specified. Note that values of "-90" and "90" are in the Z-axis direction, so "gravity direction" is essentially disabled. "Strength" allows you to adjust the momentum of the scattered fragments, and increasing the value will increase the speed at which the fragments fly off. "Variation" allows you to adjust the degree to which the size of the fragments affects the animation. Normally, in the real world, when the same physical impact is applied, it takes more energy to move a large, heavy object, so when the same impact is applied, small fragments move and rotate faster, and large, heavy fragments move slower. The difference in physical animation due to the size of the fragments can be adjusted from 0 to 100%. At 0%, size and weight are not taken into account, so small fragments and large fragments move the same without distinction. The default setting of 30% is considered to be a value close to the physical laws of nature. "Repetition" allows you to adjust the size of the fragments that break. Increasing the value will make each fragment smaller and increase the number of fragments. "Viscosity" allows you to set the resistance to the movement of the fragments. Increasing the value will speed up the time it takes for the movement and rotation to stop due to resistance. In addition, resistance is applied to gravity as if it were attached to a sticky substance, so the falling speed will also be slower. In other words, if the "viscosity" value is adjusted to a large value, the movement of the fragments will be in slow motion. Note that Figure 130 shows crack patterns B, E, and F as crack patterns in which the "viscosity" value has been adjusted to be greater than normal, but as described below, the "viscosity" value for crack pattern G has also been adjusted to be greater than normal.

The above parameters are just examples, and other parameters that can be set include "force", which indicates the force applied at the moment that causes the glass plate image 006SG301A to break, "position", which allows adjustment of the position in the X-axis and Y-axis directions in which the force is applied, "depth", which allows adjustment of the position of the force in the Z-axis direction (depth direction), "rotation speed", which allows setting the speed at which each fragment image 006SG302 can rotate, and "randomness", which allows setting the randomness of the movement of each fragment image 006SG302.

Next, we will briefly explain the main characteristics of the movement (mainly the scattering pattern) of the fragment image 006SG302 in each crack pattern.

For example, for crack patterns A, C to F, the "gravity direction" value is set to "180°", so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks, scatters around, and then falls downward naturally, whereas for crack patterns B and G, the "gravity direction" value is set to "0°", so the fragment image 006SG302 breaks, scatters around, and then is less likely to fall downward than crack patterns A, C to F.

In this way, the "gravity direction" setting is different between crack patterns A, C to F (first patterns) and crack patterns B, G (second patterns), and the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves when displayed is different, which is "180°" for crack patterns A, C to F. This allows for a variety of patterns to be created, which adds to the fun.

In addition, for crack patterns A, C to F, the "variation amount" value is set to "30%", so that small fragment image 006SG302 moves and rotates quickly and large, heavy fragment image 006SG302 moves and rotates slowly, while for crack patterns B and G, the "variation amount" value is set to "0%", so that small and large fragments of fragment image 006SG302 move and rotate in the same manner without any distinction, making them crack patterns with a high degree of animation.

In other words, crack patterns A, C to F are affected by the animation differently depending on their size, with small fragment images 006SG302 flying quickly and large fragment images 006SG302 being slightly slower and falling quickly, making them suitable for use when you want to show realistic movement, while crack patterns B and G are all affected by the animation in the same way, flying and falling in the same way regardless of size, allowing you to select the appropriate crack pattern for the scene.

In addition, the "gravity direction" setting is the same for crack patterns A and C (first patterns) and crack patterns D to F (second patterns), but the "gravity value" setting is different, which results in different speeds at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls. By varying the value of the parameter "gravity value" in this way and varying the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls, a variety of patterns can be created, which adds to the fun. More specifically, the numerical value is larger for crack patterns D to F, so the fragment image 006SG302 falls faster.

In addition, in the case of crack patterns A-C, E, and G, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "0" or more, so that the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving in the X-axis and Y-axis directions while moving in the Z-axis direction, i.e., toward the front, while in the case of crack patterns D and F, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "0", so that the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving only in the X-axis and Y-axis directions, without moving in the Z-axis direction. In addition, in the case of crack patterns A-C, E, and G, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed moving toward the front, the fragment image is displayed gradually expanding, so that it is emphasized that it is approaching the front. In particular, in the case of crack patterns B and G, the "gravity gradient" value is set to "90", so that the fragment image is displayed moving even further toward the front.

Furthermore, for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is common to crack pattern A (first pattern), crack pattern B (second pattern), and crack pattern C (third pattern), being "0", while the second parameter of "strength" is different, being "5" for crack pattern A, "3" for crack pattern B, and "7" for crack pattern C. In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for fragment image 006SG302, while varying the second parameter to create a variety of patterns, it is possible to create stable and diverse display patterns for fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, for example, crack pattern E (first pattern), crack pattern F (second pattern), and crack pattern G (third pattern) have a common first parameter of "gravity" of "0" for crack pattern E and a different second parameter of "strength" of "3" for crack pattern E and "5" for crack pattern F, whereas crack pattern F (second pattern) and crack pattern G (third pattern) have a common first parameter of "gravity" of "5" for crack pattern E and "2" for crack pattern F, and a common second parameter of "strength" of "5". In this way, by creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302 in each pattern while being configured with different parameters, a stable and diverse display pattern for the fragment image 006SG302 can be constructed.

In this embodiment, multiple types of breaking patterns A to G with different numerical values of various parameters are stored in advance, and the breaking effect is executed based on the breaking pattern A to G corresponding to the type of effect to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the type of effect to be executed by the effect control CPU 120 is determined based on the start of the variable display, the numerical values of various parameters may be determined according to the determined type of effect and the expected probability of a jackpot, and breaking animation data based on the determined numerical values may be created, and an animation display of a glass plate breaking may be displayed based on the created breaking animation data.

(Example of crack pattern display)
Next, the details of the display examples of the crack patterns A to G will be described with reference to Figs. 75 to 138. Fig. 75 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern A. Fig. 133 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern B. Fig. 134 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern C. Fig. 135 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern D. Fig. 136 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern E. Fig. 137 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern F. Fig. 138 is a diagram showing a display example with and without a whiteout image in the crack pattern G.

In each of Figures 75 to 138, (A1) to (A5) are display examples of crack patterns that display the whiteout image 006SG303, and (B1) to (B5) are display examples of crack patterns that correspond to (A1) to (A5) but do not display the whiteout image 006SG303. In other words, these are figures comparing the case where the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and the case where it is not displayed at the start of the cracking effect. Specifically, in (A1) in each figure, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is set to 0%, and the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 gradually increases in the order of (A1), (A2), and (A3), until the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is 100% in (A4).

As shown in (B1) to (B5) of Figures 75 to 138, in the animation display of a glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, in the frame where the breaking begins (for example, (B1)), the breaking is set to begin when an impact (force) is applied to the glass plate image 006SG301A at approximately the center thereof as if a sphere were colliding with it from behind, so that the glass plate image 006SG301A starts to shatter from the fragment image 006SG302 located approximately near the center thereof, but the many surrounding fragment images 006SG302 have not yet started to shatter. In other words, when the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is displayed across the entire display screen in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 that was hidden at the time of the breakage, begins to change into a broken state, a large number of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed so as to fill up almost the entire display screen, making it almost impossible to see the images displayed in the display layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302.

Therefore, as shown in (B1), when the cracking effect starts, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed to fill almost the entire display screen over several frames, changes to a cracked state and a large number of broken images 006SG302 are displayed, making it difficult to see the image that was displayed before the cracking effect started. In particular, it is fine when the cracking effect starts after the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in a cracked state, as in cracking patterns A to D, but when the cracking effect starts suddenly without the glass plate image 006SG301A being displayed in a cracked state, as in cracking patterns E to G, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which was displayed to fill the display screen, suddenly changes to a cracked state and a large number of broken images 006SG302 are displayed, as if wiping out the image that was displayed before the cracking effect started, which may give the player an unnatural impression.

Therefore, at the beginning of the cracking, as shown in the early whiteout display period of (A1), by displaying a whiteout image 006SG303 in the display layer 7 image drawing area above the fragment image 006SG302 and hiding many of the fragment images 006SG302, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity felt when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Also, as shown in the later period of the whiteout display in (A2) and (A3), by gradually increasing the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 by fading it out rather than suddenly hiding it, the fragmented image 006SG302 becomes visible after it has spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery to a certain extent, so that the fragmented image 006SG302 breaking and scattering can be made to look natural and unnatural.

As shown in Figure 75, in crack pattern A, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 75 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 75 (B2)), then falls downward and is displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 75 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 133, in crack pattern B, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 133 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 move in a normal motion to spread radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 133 (B2)). Since they are unlikely to fall downward, they move radially from the center in slow motion and are displayed out of the frame from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see Figures 133 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Figure 134, in crack pattern C, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 134 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) (see Figure 134 (B2)), then falls downward and is displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figures 134 (B3) to (B5)).

In this embodiment, a common background effect image 006SG322 is displayed as the background image when the pseudo consecutive performance, weak development performance, strong development performance A, or cut-in performance is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not specifically shown, for example, a background image with a different display mode according to the type of performance may be displayed.

As shown in Figure 135, in crack pattern D, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Figure 135 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) or the Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Figure 135 (B2)), then fall downward and are displayed mainly out of the frame from the bottom edge (see Figures 135 (B3) to (B5)).

As shown in Fig. 136, in the crack pattern E, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Fig. 136 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) with normal motion movement (see Fig. 136 (B2)), then falls downward with slow motion movement and is displayed mainly from the bottom edge out of the frame (see Figs. 136 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the "viscosity" parameter value in the crack pattern E is adjusted to "0.4", which corresponds to Figs. 136 (B3) to (B5), and more specifically, the "viscosity" parameter value corresponding to Figs. 136 (B1) and (B2) is adjusted to "0.1". Also, in Fig. 136 (B1), the movable body 32 is not shown in order to make it easier to see when the glass plate image 006SG301A begins to break. Also, since the fragment image 006SG302 in the break pattern E is displayed moving in slow motion from Fig. 136 (B3) and takes time to be displayed out of the frame, in order not to disrupt the tempo of the performance progression, the fragment image 006SG302 may be whited out while it is being displayed moving in slow motion so as to be visible to the player, and a super reach α performance may be performed.

As shown in Fig. 137, in crack pattern F, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Fig. 137 (B1)), and the fragment images 006SG302 move in normal motion and scatter radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., to the right) or Y-axis direction (e.g., to the left) (see Fig. 137 (B2)), then fall downward in slow motion and are displayed out of the frame mainly from the bottom side (see Figs. 137 (B3) to (B5)). Also, the small fragment images 006SG302 move and rotate quickly and therefore fall and are displayed out of the frame first, whereas the large, heavy fragment images 006SG302 move and rotate quickly and therefore are displayed out of the frame later than the small fragment images 006SG302.

In addition, if a cracking effect occurs during a strong S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern in the upper right corner of the display screen for the reach mode may be made invisible for a moment, and then displayed again when the fragment image 006SG302 in that cracking effect becomes invisible. In this way, displays that are not closely related to the cracking effect can be eliminated as much as possible, and the effect of the cracking effect can be enhanced. In addition, if a cracking effect occurs during the execution of other reach effects such as a weak S reach effect, not limited to a strong S reach effect, the reduced decorative pattern for the reach mode may be made invisible for a moment, and then displayed again when the fragment image 006SG302 in that cracking effect becomes invisible.

As shown in Fig. 138, in the crack pattern G, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in the layer 5 image drawing area starts to crack from the center of the screen (see Fig. 138 (B1)), and the fragment image 006SG302 spreads radially in the X-axis direction (e.g., left and right), Y-axis direction (e.g., up and down), and Z-axis direction (e.g., forward) with normal motion movement (see Fig. 138 (B2)). Since it is difficult to fall downward, it moves radially from the center in slow motion and is displayed out of the frame from the top, bottom, left, and right sides (see Figs. 138 (B3) to (B5)). Note that the "viscosity" parameter value in the crack pattern G is adjusted to "0.1", which corresponds to Figs. 138 (B1) and (B2), and more specifically, the "viscosity" parameter value corresponding to Figs. 138 (B3) to (B5) is adjusted to "0.4".

(Details of the debris image)
Next, details of the fragment images will be described with reference to Fig. 139 and Fig. 140. Fig. 139 shows fragment images displayed in a pseudo consecutive performance (A) and a cut-in performance (B). Fig. 140 shows fragment images displayed in a background change performance (A) and a strong development performance (B). Note that the fragment images shown with dotted lines in Fig. 140 indicate that they are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 139(A), the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the pseudo consecutive performance is a non-transparent image (e.g., 0% transparency) that makes it difficult to recognize at least a portion of the overlapping background effect image 006SG322, while as shown in FIG. 139(B), the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is a transparent image (e.g., 100% transparency) that makes it possible to recognize at least a portion of the overlapping background effect image 006SG322 and text image 006SG307. This gives a suitably different impression even in performances where the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 139(B), the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in a cut-in effect is a transparent image (the background is visible) through which at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 can be recognized, the second fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image (the characters are visible) through which at least a portion of the text image 006SG307 (special image) can be recognized, and the third fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image (the background and characters are visible) through which both at least a portion of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a portion of the text image 006SG307 can be recognized. By varying the display mode of the fragment images for each effect, the effect of each effect can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(A), all of the fragment images 006SG302 in the background change performance A are hidden by moving downward toward the outside of the display screen on the display screen of the image display device 5 and being displayed as a frame-out display, while as shown in FIG. 140(B), the first fragment image 006SG302 among the fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is hidden by moving up, down, left, and right toward the outside of the display screen on the display screen and being displayed as a frame-out display, and the second fragment image 006SG302, which is different from the first fragment image 006SG302, is hidden before moving toward the outside of the display screen on the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby creating a difference in how the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, which can increase interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 140(A), when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a first angle (for example, a large angle where the incident angle of the light irradiated on the glass surface is between 45 degrees and 90 degrees, such as an angle where the flat surface faces the front side), it becomes possible to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a second angle smaller than the first angle (for example, a small angle where the incident angle of the light irradiated on the glass surface is less than 45 degrees, such as an angle where the end surface faces the front side), it becomes difficult to recognize at least a portion of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 140(A), when a first fragment image among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, a second fragment image is at a second angle, thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

(Effects of each form)
[Form 1-1]
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, when the special symbols and decorative symbols are variably displayed and a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot is derived as a result of the variably displayed special symbols and decorative symbols, it is possible to control the game to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. The pachinko game machine 1 also includes an image display device 5 for displaying images, and a performance control CPU 120 which is a control means for executing the first consecutive break performance, the second consecutive break performance, the dialogue notice performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo consecutive performance, the reach suggestion performance, the weak development performance, the strong development performance A, the strong development performance B, the cut-in performance, the result notification performance, and the like, which are performances that suggest that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state during the variably displayed state. Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 60 to 62, the pachinko game machine 1 has layer 1 to layer 10 image drawing areas for drawing images with different display priorities in the VRAM area in the display control unit 123 for drawing images to be displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, the VRAM area may include a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image, a layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a decorative pattern as an image of layer 2, a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an object image such as a character as an image of layer 3, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an image of a precursor to cracking (such as glass plate image 006SG301) as an image of layer 4, a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a glass plate image 006SG301A or a fragment image 006SG302 (such as glass fragments) as an image of layer 5, a layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 7 image of a glass plate image 006SG301A or a fragment image 006SG302 (such as glass fragments) as an image of layer 5, a layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 9 image of a glass plate image 006SG301A or a fragment image 006SG302 (such as glass fragments) as an image of layer 6, and a layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a layer 11 image of a glass plate image 006SG301A or a fragment image 006SG302 (such as glass fragments) as an image of layer 7. It has a layer 6 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an action effect image as an image, a layer 7 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a whiteout image 006SG303 as an image of layer 7, a layer 8 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an operation prompt image as an image of layer 8, a layer 9 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a variable display compatible display (reserved display and active display) as an image of layer 9, and a layer 10 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a small pattern (fourth pattern), the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, and a right hit notification image as an image of layer 10. In addition, a layer 11 image drawing area for drawing and arranging an error display may be further arranged.

In addition, except when a layer 11 image drawing area is further arranged in the VRAM area, the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority in the image display device 5, the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area is the image with a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 10 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area is the image with a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 9 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area is the image with a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 8 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area is the image with a higher display priority in the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 7 image drawing area. an image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 6 image drawing area, an image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area, an image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, an image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and an image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area has a lower display priority in the image display device 5 than an image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. Also, although it has been described that there is a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging a background image, there may be a layer 1-1 image drawing area, a layer 1-2 image drawing area, and a layer 1-3 image drawing area instead of the layer 1 image drawing area. In this case, the layer 1-1 image drawing area can draw a normal background image (first background image 006SG081, sixth background image), the layer 1-2 image drawing area can draw a chance background image (second background image 006SG082, seventh background image), a normal reach background image, a super reach α background image (weak S reach performance image 006SG088), and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), and the layer 1-3 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG322), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-4 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG423), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-5 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG524), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-6 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG525), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-7 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG526), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-8 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG527), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-9 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG528), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-10 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG529), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-11 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG529), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-12 image drawing area can draw a background effect image (background effect image 006SG529), a big win notification background image, and the layer 1-13 image drawing area can draw a background effect image It is possible to draw an image (fifth background image 006SG085), and the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-3 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the layer 1-1 image drawing area has a lower display priority on the image display device 5 than the image drawn in the layer 1-2 image drawing area.

Here, as shown in Figures 90 to 93, background change performance A and strong development performance A are performances that can be executed at different times. Also, as shown in Figure 120, background change performance A has a crack display period in which a crack is displayed by the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a fragment image display period in which the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 is broken and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. As shown in Figure 125, strong development performance A is a performance in which the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken by the movement of the movable body 32 in a period shorter than the background change performance, and a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

Furthermore, the background change performance A is a performance in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is different before a crack appears in the display area of the image display device 5 and after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins, and the strong development performance A is a performance in which the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is different before the strong development performance A is executed and after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A begins. In other words, in this embodiment, the background change performance A, in which cracks and fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the strong development performance A, in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed without any cracks appearing in the glass plate image 006SG301, can be executed at different times, allowing the player to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, because the types of background images displayed before and after the fragment image 006SG302 are different in both the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, even though the performance also displays the fragment image 006SG302, different impressions can be given to the player in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 1-2]
In addition, when background change presentation A and strong development presentation A can be executed during variable display 1, the probability of being controlled to a big win game state may be higher when background change presentation A is not executed and strong development presentation A is executed than when background change presentation A is executed and strong development presentation A is executed (for example, see Figures 90 to 93). By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of background change presentation A and strong development presentation A, and to increase interest.

[Form 1-3]
In addition, when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), in addition to the case where the background image changes via the background change performance A, a case where the background image changes via a chance background teasing performance different from the background change performance A may be provided (FIG. 87). Also, when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via the background change performance A, the probability of being controlled to the big win game state may be higher than when the background image changes from the normal background image (first background image 006SG081) to the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) via the chance background teasing performance. In this way, it is possible to draw attention to whether the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) is displayed via the background change performance A or the chance background teasing performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 1-4-1]
In addition, when background change presentation A and strong development presentation A can be executed during variable display of 1, the probability of being controlled to a big win game state may be higher when background change presentation A is executed before strong development presentation A than when background change presentation A is not executed before strong development presentation A (for example, see Figures 90 to 93). By doing so, it is possible to increase interest by making players look forward to both background change presentation A and strong development presentation A being executed during variable display of 1.

[Form 1-4-2]
120 and 125, during the variable display, the background change effect A is an effect executed before the reach timing of the decorative symbol, and the strong development effect A is an effect executed after the reach timing of the decorative symbol. Also, the images displayed as background images in the display area of the image display device 5 include a normal background image (first background image 006SG081), a chance background image (second background image 006SG082) suggesting that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot before the reach, a super reach α background image (weak S reach effect image 006SG088) indicating that the reach effect of the super reach α is being executed, and a super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) indicating that the reach effect of the super reach β is being executed. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is an image displayed together with the chance background image (second background image 006SG082), and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A is an image displayed together with the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084), so that the player can be drawn to the relationship between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 1-4-3]
Also, as shown in Figures 116 and 117, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A has transparency, so that it is possible for the player to recognize at least a part of the chance background image (second background image 006SG082) that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302, and since the background image displayed in the strong development performance A has no transparency, it is impossible for the player to recognize at least a part of the super reach β background image (fourth background image 006SG084) that is superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302 through the fragment image 006SG302, so that the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the performance effect of the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form 1-4-4]
146, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a first angle by the rotation, the player can recognize at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302, whereas when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a second angle by the rotation, the player may have difficulty recognizing at least a part of the background image through the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 1-4-5]
146, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated, when a first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, a second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may be at a second angle. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 1-5]
141, when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that it moves in a plurality of directions including the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the Z-axis direction may take a longer time to become invisible in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 moving in the X-axis direction. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 1-6]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance A are both displayed moving without any change in speed from the timing when the display starts to the timing when the display ends, so that in the background change performance A and strong development performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally and without any awkwardness.

[Form 1-7-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A are both displayed in a manner that moves in multiple directions including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) (see Figures 75 and 137), and the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A take a common period of time before becoming invisible on the display screen, which increases the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, thereby enhancing the performance effects of both.

[Form 1-7-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when the display starts and before it is hidden on the display screen (see Figs. 75 and 137). Specifically, it is difficult to see when the display starts and easy to see before it is hidden, which can enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 1-7-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) takes a longer time to disappear from the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) in background change performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form 1-8]
146, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 is rotated in the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, the number of rotations from when the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the background change performance A is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be the same as the number of rotations from when the second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the strong development performance A is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, the relevance between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A is increased, and the performance effects of both can be improved.

[Form 2-1]
120 and 125, in both the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts. The display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in these background change performance A and strong development performance A is composed of a whiteout display early period in which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303, and a whiteout display late period in which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303. Therefore, since the background change performance A and the strong development performance A can be executed at different timings, it is possible to surprise the player at various timings, and in addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed by the whiteout image 006SG303, and to execute these background change performance A and strong development performance preferably.

[Form 2-2]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 120 and 125, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in the background change performance A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 1000 ms, whereas the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 in the strong development performance A (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is 2500 ms. Therefore, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 enhances the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, and since the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, the performance effects of both the background change performance A and the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form 2-3]
120, the crack display period may be longer than the fragment image display period in the background change performance A, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period) may be shorter than the crack display period and the fragment image display period. In this way, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 can be started without any awkwardness due to the whiteout image 006SG303.

[Form 2-4]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 102 and 109, the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the whiteout image 006SG303 displayed from the start timing of the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A are images displayed in the same manner, so that the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance A, in which the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed in the same manner, can be enhanced, thereby enhancing the performance effects of both.

[Form 3-1]
122 and 127, the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance of this embodiment are different in execution timing in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed moving at a speed V1 regardless of the progress of the performance, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance changes speed from speed V1 to a slow speed V0 according to the progress of the performance, so that even if the performance also displays the fragment image 006SG302, it is possible to give the player a different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 3-2]
90 to 93, in the case where the pseudo consecutive performance can be performed multiple times in one variable display while the cut-in performance can be performed only once, the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed multiple times than when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed only once, and the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the cut-in performance is performed once than when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed multiple times. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution status of the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, and to increase interest.

[Form 3-3]
In the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo consecutive performance changes from a cracked state to a broken state (glass plate image 006SG301A) and in the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is displayed, a whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the first timing, and is displayed over the entire display screen at the second timing (see Fig. 105 (C) and Fig. 112 (C)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, and the interest can be enhanced.

[Form 3-4-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment image 006SG302 in a cut-in performance is displayed and moves at a speed V1 during the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and from the timing when the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, it is displayed and moves at a speed V0 which is slower than the speed V1, thereby enhancing the performance effect of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance.

[Form 3-4-2]
Also, in a case where a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed when a fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a cut-in effect as shown in Fig. 127, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 may overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and moved at a speed V1, but may not overlap with the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and moved at a speed V0, as shown in Fig. 129. In this way, it is possible to prevent the effect of the cut-in effect from being reduced.

[Form 3-5]
146, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance are made rotatable, the number of rotational operations performed from when a first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotational operations performed from when a second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 4-1]
122 and 127, the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance of this embodiment are different in execution timing during variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during variable display. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 116 and 117, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the pseudo consecutive performance are not transparent, so that the player cannot see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302, while the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the cut-in performance are transparent, so that the player can see the background image displayed on the image display device 5 through these fragment images 006SG302. Therefore, even if the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in the same way in the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, the player can be given a different impression and the interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 4-2]
The first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is a transparent image through which at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 can be recognized, the second fragment image 006SG302 is a transparent image through which at least a part of the character image 006SG307 can be recognized, and the third fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is a transparent image through which both at least a part of the background effect image 006SG322 and at least a part of the character image 006SG307 can be recognized (see FIG. 139 ). By thus varying the display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 for each performance, the performance effect of each performance can be enhanced.

[Form 4-3-1]
146, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance and the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance are made rotatable, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a first angle, it may be possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and when the first fragment image 006SG302 is rotated to a second angle, it may be difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 4-3-2]
146, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in effect is made rotatable, when the first fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 is at a first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the plurality of fragment images 006SG302 may be at a second angle in the cut-in effect. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 5-1]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 122 and 127, the pseudo-consecutive effects and cut-in effects of this embodiment have different execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, with regard to these pseudo consecutive performances and cut-in performances, the cut-in performance is a performance in which the display of multiple fragment images 006SG302 begins in a period shorter than the crack display period from when a crack appears in the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo consecutive performance to when a fragment image 006SG302 imitating at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance and the fragment images 006SG302 in the cut-in performance are commonly displayed in a manner moving in multiple directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction (see FIG. 141), and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a manner moving in the Z-axis direction may take a longer period to become hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in a manner moving in the X-axis direction.

[Form 5-2]
The fragment image 006SG302, which is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction), has different visibility when the display starts and before it is hidden on the display screen (see Figs. 134 and 138). Specifically, it is difficult to see when the display starts and easy to see before it is hidden, which can enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 5-3]
By making it so that the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) takes a longer time to disappear from the display screen than the fragment image 006SG302 that moves in a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) in background change performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed naturally.

[Form 5-4]
It is preferable that all of the fragment images 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance are hidden in a manner that moves toward the outside of the display screen (for example, see FIG. 140(A)), and the first fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is hidden in a manner that moves toward the outside of the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302 different from the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden before moving toward the outside of the display screen (for example, see FIG. 140(B)). In this way, the way in which the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be made different between the pseudo consecutive performance and the cut-in performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-1]
In addition, as shown in Fig. 123 and Fig. 124, the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect in this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, for these reach suggestion effects and weak development effects, the right crack display period in the reach suggestion effect may be longer than the previous operation period in the weak development effect, and the length of the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect and the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be different (see Fig. 123 and Fig. 124). In this way, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, it is possible to give a different impression and increase the interest in the game.

[Form 6-2]
In addition, in the reach suggestion effect, the right crack display period may be longer than the period until the right crack display period starts in the left crack display period (see FIG. 123). In this way, it is possible to prevent the interest of the reach suggestion effect from decreasing due to a monotonous presentation configuration.

[Form 6-3]
In addition, the reach suggestion effect in this embodiment can be executed in a success pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks after a crack is displayed, or in a failure pattern in which the glass plate image 006SG301A does not break because the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed after a crack is displayed. When the reach suggestion effect is executed in a failure pattern, cracks are displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R and the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L as the right crack display period for 6000 ms, which is longer than the 2000 ms display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 when the reach suggestion effect is executed in a success pattern, so that it is possible to suitably show the player that the reach suggestion effect is not executed in the success pattern, i.e., that the glass plate image 006SG301A will not break.

[Form 6-4-1]
In addition, while the reach suggestion effect is an effect that notifies the player that a reach will occur when it is executed in a successful pattern, it is an effect that suggests that a reach will not occur when it is executed in a failed pattern, that is, that the probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state is lower than in the case of a reach. Therefore, the reach suggestion effect can draw the player's attention to whether or not it will be executed and whether or not it is executed in a successful pattern, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-4-2]
90 to 93, in the case where both the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect can be executed during the variable display of 1, the weak development effect can be executed after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect starts, and the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect starts before the weak development effect is executed than when it is not. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion effect and increase interest.

[Form 6-5]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the reach suggestion performance changes from a cracked state to a broken state, and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the weak development performance is displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different at the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the first timing, and is displayed over the entire display screen at the second timing (see Fig. 106 (G) and Fig. 108 (D)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the reach suggestion performance and the weak development performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-6]
In the reach suggestion performance, it is possible to highlight the decorative symbols in the reach state, and by making the period during which the decorative symbols in the reach state are highlighted during the fragment image display period longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 107 (I) to 107 (K)), it is possible to appropriately indicate that the reach state has been reached.

[Form 6-7-1]
In the reach suggestion performance, in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305, an action effect image 006SG323 can be displayed in a layer 6 image drawing area higher than the fragment image 006SG302, and by displaying the action effect image 006SG323 at the timing when the display of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 starts (see Figure 106 (D)), the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed to a cracked state without any sense of incongruity.

[Form 6-7-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 123, in the reach suggestion presentation, depending on the action of the character, the timing at which a crack appears in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L of the glass plate image 006SG301, and the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed for a longer period of time than the action effect image 006SG323 from the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R of the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby effectively indicating to the player that a crack has appeared in the glass plate image 006SG301.

[Form 6-7-3]
123, in the reach suggestion effect, when the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts, but when the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the action effect image 006SG323 is not displayed. Therefore, depending on the action of the character, when cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301, and when the character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, the presentation mode of the reach suggestion effect is made different, and it is possible to prevent the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-7-4]
Also, as shown in FIG. 123, in the reach suggestion effect, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (fragment image display period) is longer than the period during which the small fragment image 006SG302A is displayed (small fragment image display period), so that a difference can be made in the presentation mode of the reach suggestion effect between when cracks are displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L or the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R in the glass plate image 006SG301 and when a character acts on the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C in the glass plate image 006SG301, thereby preventing the reach suggestion effect from becoming monotonous.

[Form 6-8]
Also, as shown in Figures 116 and 117, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as reach suggestion effects have transparency, so the player can see the background image through these fragment images 006SG302, whereas the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as weak development effects do not have transparency, so the player cannot see at least a part of the background image through these fragment images 006SG302. Therefore, a difference can be made in the display mode of the fragment images 006SG302 between reach suggestion effects and weak development effects, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 6-9]
Also, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a reach suggestion effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a weak development effect are both displayed moving without changing in speed from the start timing to the end timing of the display, so that these fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed naturally in the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect.

[Form 6-10]
In addition, the fragment image display period in the weak development effect may be longer than the fragment image display period in the reach suggestion effect (see Figs. 123 and 124). In this way, the reach suggestion effect and the weak development effect can be differentiated, and the excitement can be enhanced by the diverse presentation.

[Form 7-1]
120 and 127, the background change effect A and the cut-in effect in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 127, when the cut-in effect is executed, first, a pre-operation image of the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an operation promotion effect, and the cut-in effect is executed when the push button 31B is operated by the player or when the glass plate image 006SG301A is broken, and during the display period of the white-out image 006SG303, the post-operation image of the push button 31B is displayed in priority to the white-out image 006SG303. Here, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance is 2500 ms, the display period of the pre-operation image of push button 31B is 3000 ms, and the display period of the post-operation image of push button 31B is 1000 ms, the same as the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303. In other words, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the cut-in performance (cut-in image display period) is shorter than the display period of the pre-operation image of push button 31B (pre-operation image display period) and longer than the display period of the post-operation image of push button 31B (post-operation image display period), so it is possible to prevent the cut-in performance from becoming monotonous and reducing the interest of the cut-in performance.

[Form 8-1]
Also, as shown in FIG. 120 and FIG. 122, the background change effect A and the pseudo consecutive effect in this embodiment are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. The background change effect A is an effect in which the background image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period. Furthermore, the pseudo consecutive effect may be an effect in which the combination of decorative symbols displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is different before the crack display period and during the fragment image display period (for example, before the crack display period, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a random combination, but after the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in a combination according to the pseudo consecutive effect). In this way, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, a different impression can be given and interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 8-2]
120 and 122, in the case where the first-stage cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then changed to second-stage cracks for display, the period during which the first-stage cracks change to second-stage cracks in the background change performance A and the period during which the first-stage cracks change to second-stage cracks in the pseudo consecutive performance may be different in length. By doing so, the performance effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be improved.

[Form 9-1]
120 and 122, the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance of this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the period during which the cracks are displayed in the background change performance A (crack display period) is 2000 ms, while the period during which the cracks are displayed in the pseudo consecutive performance (crack display period) is 1500 ms, so the lengths are different. In both the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 begins from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins. The display period of these whiteout images 006SG303 is composed of an early whiteout display period during which the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 due to the whiteout image 006SG303, and a late whiteout display period during which the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. Therefore, the whiteout image 006SG303 reduces the sense of incongruity felt when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the background change performance A and pseudo consecutive performance can be executed preferably.

[Form 9-2]
120 and 122, in the case where a first-stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the first-stage crack is changed to a second-stage crack and can be displayed, the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the background change performance A and the length of the period during which the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack in the pseudo consecutive performance may be different. By doing so, the performance effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be improved.

[Form 10-1]
120 and 126, the background change performance A and the strong development performance B of this embodiment are different in execution timing during variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is displayed moving without changing the speed from the start of display to the end of display, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is displayed moving at a speed V1 from the start of display to the end of display of the whiteout image 006SG303, and is displayed moving at a speed V0 slower than the speed V1 during the transition, so that even if the performance in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is similar, a different impression can be given and interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 10-2]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 changes from a cracked state to a broken state in the background change performance A and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the strong development performance B, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different at the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen at the first timing, and is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the second timing (see Fig. 102 (G) and Fig. 110 (H)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-1]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is displayed and moved at speed V0 is longer than the period during which it is displayed and moved at speed V1, so that there is a difference in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 10-3-2]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is displayed and moved at a speed V1 is the same as the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, and since the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed during the period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed and moved at a speed V0, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the performance effect of the strong development performance B.

[Form 10-4]
All of the fragment images 006SG302 in the background change performance A are hidden in a manner that moves toward the outside of the display screen (see FIG. 140(A)), and the first fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B is hidden in a manner that moves toward the outside of the display screen, and the second fragment image 006SG302 different from the first fragment image 006SG302 is hidden before moving toward the outside of the display screen (see FIG. 140(B)). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed differently between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B, which can increase interest.

[Form 10-5]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 116 and 117, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B are both images with transparency, so that the performance effect can be enhanced when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-6-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., the X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., the Z-axis direction) in common (see Figs. 75 and 133), and it is preferable that the period required for the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A to become invisible on the display screen is the same for the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B. In this way, the correlation between the background change performance A and the strong development performance B is increased, and the performance effects of both can be improved.

[Form 10-6-2]
It is preferable that the visibility of the fragment image 006SG302 that is displayed moving in a specific direction (for example, the Z-axis direction) differs between when the display starts and when it is not displayed on the display screen (see Figs. 75 and 133). Specifically, the visibility is difficult when the display starts and easy before it is not displayed, which can enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 10-7-1]
146, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance B are rotated, the number of rotation operations performed from when the first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5 may be greater than the number of rotation operations performed from when the second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance is displayed until it is hidden in the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 10-7-2]
146, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance B are rotated, when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a first angle by the rotation, it may be possible to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302, and when the fragment image 006SG302 reaches a second angle by the rotation, it may be difficult to recognize at least a part of the background image superimposed on the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be improved.

[Form 10-7-3]
146, in the case where the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the strong development performance B are rotated, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 may be at the second angle. In this way, when the first fragment image 006SG302 is at the first angle, the second fragment image 006SG302 among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is at the second angle.

[Form 10-8]
90 to 93, when both background change presentation A and strong development presentation B can be executed during variable display 1, the background change presentation can be executed before the reach and the strong development presentation B can be executed after the reach, and the probability of being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the background change presentation A is executed before the strong development presentation B is executed than when it is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the background change presentation A and increase interest.

[Form 10-9]
120 and 126, in the case where the first stage cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 and then changed to second stage cracks for display, the length of the period during which the first stage cracks change to second stage cracks in the background change performance A and the length of the period during which the first stage cracks change to second stage cracks in the pseudo consecutive performance may be different. By doing so, the performance effect when cracks are displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 can be improved.

[Form 11-1]
120 and 122, the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 116, the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is not transparent, while the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is transparent, so that even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, a different impression can be given and interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 12-1]
120 and 126, the background change performance A and the strong development performance B of this embodiment are different in execution timing during variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during variable display. Furthermore, the length of the crack display period in the background change performance A and the crack display period in the strong development performance B may be made different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance B may be displayed in a manner in which they move in at least a plurality of directions, namely, the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, so that the fragment image 006SG302 moved and displayed in the Z-axis direction takes a longer period to become invisible in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 moved and displayed in the Z-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302 moved and displayed in the Z-axis direction in the strong development performance B takes a longer period to become invisible in the display area of the image display device 5 than the fragment image 006SG302 moved and displayed in the Z-axis direction in the background change performance A. By doing this, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the same way, a different impression can be given, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 13-1]
120 and 123, the background change performance A and the reach suggestion performance in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the right crack display period in the reach suggestion performance is 4000 ms, while the crack display period in the background change performance A is 2000 ms, and the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the reach suggestion performance is 1500 ms, while the display period (fragment image display period) of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is 20000 ms. Therefore, even if the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed, different impressions can be given and interest in the game can be increased.

[Form 13-2]
In the first specified part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a first crack state in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305, and in the fourth specified part, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be changed from the third pre-crack state to the third crack state and displayed (see Figures 106 and 102), thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the crack state.

[Form 14-1]
In addition, the first and second consecutive crack effects of this embodiment shown in FIG. 118 are effects that have different execution timings in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the second consecutive crack effect can be executed at a timing after the first consecutive crack effect, and the first and second consecutive crack effects have the same length of the crack display period and the same length of the fragment image display period. When the second consecutive crack effect is executed after the execution of the first consecutive crack effect, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive crack effect is temporarily hidden, and then the crack display period of the second crack effect begins. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of ...

[Form 14-2]
141, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first continuous cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second continuous cracking effect may be displayed in a manner in which they move in a plurality of directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction, and further, the position at which the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts may be different between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect. In this way, the way in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be made different between the first continuous cracking effect and the second continuous cracking effect, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 14-3]
In both the first and second consecutive breaking performances, a character image 006SG305 (special image) can be displayed together with the fragment image 006SG302. In the first consecutive breaking performance, the character image 006SG305 is displayed in a first manner (e.g., a Jam character image), and in the second consecutive breaking performance, the character image 006SG305 is displayed in a second manner different from the first manner (e.g., a MuMu character image) (see Figures 99 (F) and 100 (F)). This allows for a difference in the way the special image is displayed between the first and second predetermined performances, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 14-4]
118, the length of the fragment image display period is different from that of the first and second cracking effects, while the length of the display period of the character image 006SG305 displayed as a result of the first and second cracking effects may be the same. In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed differently in the first and second cracking effects, which increases the interest.

[Form 14-5]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 84, in this embodiment, there are a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed, and a pattern in which the second continuous breaking effect is not executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed. Since the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the second continuous breaking effect is executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed than when the second continuous breaking effect is not executed after the first continuous breaking effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the execution of the second continuous breaking effect and increase interest.

[Form 14-6]
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 129, the fragment images 006SG302 in the first and second consecutive breaking effects are both displayed moving without changing speed from the display start timing to the display end timing, thereby enhancing the correlation between the first and second consecutive breaking effects and increasing interest.

[Form 14-7-1]
118, a white out image 006SG303 may be displayed in common from the start timing of displaying the fragment image 006SG302, and the display pattern of the white out image 006SG303 displayed in the first consecutive cracking effect and the white out image 006SG303 displayed in the second consecutive cracking effect may be the same. In this way, the relevance between the first consecutive cracking effect and the second consecutive cracking effect is increased, and the effects of both effects can be improved.

[Form 14-7-2]
In addition, since the length of the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period) is the same for the first and second consecutive breaking effects shown in FIG. 118, the correlation between the first and second consecutive breaking effects is strengthened, thereby enhancing the effects of both effects.

[Form 15-1]
120 and 128, the background change effect A and the result notification effect in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as a result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the display area of the image display device 5. And, since the time required for the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change effect A to disappear and the time required for the image of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear during the result notification effect when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state to disappear are different, the player can be appropriately notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state.

[Form 15-2]
Also, as shown in FIG. 120, the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change presentation A takes 2500 ms to disappear, and in the result notification presentation when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, it takes 5500 ms for the image of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 to disappear, so that the player can be properly notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state.

[Form 15-3]
Among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the background change performance A, there is a fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) with the largest display size, and among the multiple fragment images 006SG302 in the result notification performance (miss), there is a small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) with the largest display size, and it is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 (first fragment image 006SG302) has a larger display size than the small fragment image 006SG302A (second fragment image 006SG302) (for example, see FIG. 103(J) and FIG. 115(D)). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed differently, which can increase interest.

[Form 15-4]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image it is superimposed on to be recognized, and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result announcement performance (miss) is a transparent image that allows at least a part of the background image it is superimposed on to be recognized (see Figure 130), which allows for differences in the way the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed to increase interest.

[Form 15-5]
It is preferable that the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the small fragment image 006SG302A in the result notification performance (miss) are displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least a predetermined direction (e.g., X-axis direction) and a specific direction (e.g., Z-axis direction) in common (see, for example, Figs. 75 and 134). By doing so, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed in a related manner, which enhances interest.

[Form 15-6]
In the first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A changes from a cracked state to a broken state (display of the glass plate image 006SG301A) and in the second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the result notification performance (miss), a whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed over the entire display screen in the first timing, and may be displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery in the second timing (see FIG. 102(G) and FIG. 115(C)). In this way, the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be made different between the background change performance A and the result notification performance (miss), thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 16-1]
As shown in FIG. 120 and FIG. 128, the background change performance A and the result notification performance in this embodiment are different in execution timing in the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. In addition, during the crack display period in the background change performance A, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the background change performance A, and during the crack display period in the result notification performance of the failure pattern, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a manner corresponding to the result notification performance of the failure pattern. Furthermore, the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the background change performance A may continue until the display of the fragment image 006SG302 is started, while the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 in a manner corresponding to the result notification performance of the failure pattern may continue until a predetermined condition such as the stop of the variable display after the result notification performance of the failure pattern is finished or the start of the next variable display is satisfied. In this way, the player can be notified that the game is not appropriately controlled to an advantageous state.

[Form 17-1]
When the result notification effect notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a second cracked form, and the type of background image differs between before the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form in the background change effect A and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the broken effect (see Figures 102 (A) to 102 (F), 103 (I), and 103 (K)), and the display form of the background image differs between before the result notification effect notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state or not and when the fragment image 006SG302A is displayed when it is notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state (see Figures 115 (A) to 115 (B), and 115 (D)).

In this way, it is possible to execute background change presentation A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state, which can give a surprise to the player, and further, by using the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and changing the display mode of the background image before it is notified whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, it is possible to notify the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state appropriately.

[Form 18-1]
The background change performance A includes a first predetermined part displaying a character image 006SG305, a second predetermined part displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 in a first cracked state in response to the movement of the character image 006SG305, and a third predetermined part displaying a plurality of broken pieces images 006SG302 imitating at least a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. The pseudo consecutive performance includes a fourth predetermined part displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second cracked state, and a fourth predetermined part displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second cracked state in response to the movement of the movable body 32 starting to fall. This presentation includes a fifth specified part which begins with a fifth predetermined part in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 imitating at least a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, and a sixth specified part which displays a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 which imitate at least a portion of the glass plate image 006SG301A which are displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. The execution timing is different between the background change presentation A and the pseudo consecutive presentation. In the breaking presentation of the pseudo consecutive presentation, the movable body 32 begins a second action which is different from the first action, and the second action of the movable body 32 ends after the fragment images 006SG302 are no longer displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see Figures 102, 103 and 105).

By doing this, the background change effect A, which displays the glass plate image 006SG301A and the broken piece image 006SG302, and the pseudo consecutive effect can be executed at different times, so it is possible to surprise the player at various times, and furthermore, by displaying the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 and then operating the movable body 32 to display the broken piece image 006SG302, it is possible to provide a powerful effect.

[Form 18-2]
In addition, for the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance shown in Fig. 120 and Fig. 122, after the first stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301, the first stage crack may be changed to the second stage crack and displayed. In this case, the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack may be different in length from the period from when the first stage crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301 in the pseudo consecutive performance until the first stage crack changes to the second stage crack. In this way, the performance effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in the crack form can be improved.

[Form 18-3-1]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A changes from a cracked state to a broken state, and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the pseudo consecutive performance is displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different at the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen at the first timing, and is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the second timing (see Fig. 102 (G) and Fig. 105 (C)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance, thereby increasing interest.

[Form 18-3-2]
The first action is a falling action in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the performance position, and when the movable body 32 is placed at the performance position, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 105(C)). In this way, by linking the action of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form 18-3-3]
Also, as shown in FIG. 122, in the pseudo consecutive performance, the movable body falling period is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period). Here, the fragment image display period may be longer than the movable body falling period. In this way, the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance can be improved.

[Form 18-4]
Also, as an effect different from the pseudo consecutive performance shown in FIG. 122, a movable body suggestion effect may be executed that suggests that the movable body 32 is controlled to a jackpot game state by operating the movable body 32 during execution of the variable display. When the movable body suggestion effect is executed in this way, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 can be displayed in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed, while when the movable body operates as a pseudo consecutive performance, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. In this way, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 19-1]
120 and 128, the background change effect A and the result notification effect of this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 128, the result notification effect of the successful pattern is an effect in which cracks are displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 as the movable body 32 falls, and then the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the rise of the movable body 32 starts during the fragment image display period, and the rise ends before the end of the fragment image display period. Therefore, by operating the movable body 32 to display cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301, a powerful effect can be provided.

[Form 19-2]
120 and 128, the background change performance A and the result notification performance may be configured to display a first-stage crack in the glass plate image 006SG301, and then change the first-stage crack to a second-stage crack. In this case, the length of the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A until the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack may be different from the length of the period from when the first-stage crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 in the result notification performance until the first-stage crack changes to a second-stage crack. In this way, the performance effect when the crack precursor image is displayed in a cracked form can be improved.

[Form 19-3-1]
A whiteout image 006SG303 (a specific color effect image) can be displayed in common at a first timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 in the background change performance A changes from a cracked state to a broken state, and at a second timing when the fragment image 006SG302 in the result notification performance (jackpot) is displayed, and the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different at the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed over the entire display screen at the first timing, and is displayed so as to spread from the center of the display screen to the periphery at the second timing (see Fig. 102 (G) and Fig. 113 (E)), so that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 is different between the background change performance A and the result notification performance (jackpot), thereby increasing interest.

[Form 19-3-2]
The second action is an action in which the movable body 32 moves from the performance position toward the origin position, and when the second action starts, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 113(F)). In this way, by linking the action of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance can be enhanced.

[Form 19-3-3]
Furthermore, with regard to the result notification display shown in FIG. 128, the movable body rising period is longer than the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 (early whiteout display period and late whiteout display period), and the fragment image display period is longer than the movable body rising period, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the result notification display.

[Form 19-4]
Also, as an effect different from the result notification effect shown in FIG. 128, a movable body suggestion effect may be executed that suggests that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state by moving the movable body 32 during execution of the variable display. When the movable body suggestion effect is executed in this way, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may be displayed in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed, while when the movable body 32 moves as a result notification effect, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. In this way, it is possible to prevent the effect of the result notification effect from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 20-1]
120 and 125, the background change performance A and the strong development performance A of this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. Furthermore, the strong development performance A is a performance in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in response to the fall of the movable body 32, and the fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is shorter than the fragment image display period in the background change performance A. Furthermore, in the strong development performance A, the movable body 32 can rise toward the upper position of the image display device 5, which is the origin position, after the fall, and the movable body 32 starts to rise after the fragment image display period ends, so that a powerful performance can be provided.

[Form 20-2-1]
The first action is an action in which the movable body 32 moves from the origin position toward the performance position, and when the first action starts, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts (see FIG. 109(B)). In this way, by linking the action of the movable body 32 and the display of the whiteout image 006SG303, a sense of unity is created, and the performance effect of the strong development performance A can be enhanced.

[Form 20-2-2]
As shown in Fig. 125, in the strong development performance A, a whiteout early display period and a whiteout late display period are provided. Here, the length of the whiteout early display and the falling period of the movable body 32 (movable body falling period) may be approximately the same, and the fragment image display period may be longer than the movable body falling period. In this way, the performance effect of the strong development performance can be enhanced.

[Form 20-3]
Also, as a different effect from the strong development effect A shown in FIG. 125, a movable body suggestion effect may be executed that suggests that the movable body 32 is controlled to a jackpot game state by operating the movable body 32 during execution of the variable display. When the movable body suggestion effect is executed in this way, a movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 can be displayed in a display area that overlaps with the movable body 32 when the movable body suggestion effect is executed, while when the movable body 32 operates as the strong development effect A, the movable body emphasis image that emphasizes the movable body 32 may not be displayed in the display area that overlaps with the movable body 32. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect of the strong development effect A from being reduced by the movable body emphasis image.

[Form 21-1]
In background change performance A and background change performance B, even if the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the background image can be seen together with the glass plate image 006SG301. When the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed in a cracked state, the images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, are displayed with the first visibility. In background change performance A, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the first background image 006SG301 is displayed with the first visibility. 6SG081 is displayed with a second visibility lower than the first visibility, and images displayed in the layer 1 to 3 image drawing areas, which have a lower priority than the specified display layer when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state in background change performance B, are displayed with the second visibility over a specified range, and are displayed with the first visibility over a specific range different from the specified range (for example, the crack display area 006SG324) (see Figures 102 (E) and (F) and Figure 104 (C)).

By doing this, background change performance A and background change performance B, which display the glass plate image 006SG301 in different crack patterns, can be executed at different times, allowing the player to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, since the visibility of the background image that can be seen together with the glass plate image 006SG301 differs depending on the type of crack pattern, even performances that display the glass plate image 006SG301 in the same way can give different impressions in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 21-2]
The boundary between the specified range and the specific range can be displayed with a third visibility that is higher than the first visibility and the second visibility (see enlarged view of Figure 104 (C)), thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the background change presentation B.

[Form 21-3]
In the layer 9 image drawing area, which has a higher priority than the glass plate image 006SG301, it is possible to display a first pending display 006SG101 (second pending display) and an active display 006SG103 (corresponding image), which are compatible with variable display, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, the corresponding image is displayed superimposed in a specified range and not superimposed in a specific range (see Figure 104 (C)), so that the corresponding image can be displayed preferably even while the background change performance B is being executed.

[Form 21-4]
121, the second-stage crack display period may be longer than the first-stage crack display period. In this way, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed differently between the background change performance A and the background change performance B, thereby enhancing interest.

[Form 22-1]
Also, as shown in Fig. 119 and Fig. 120, the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance in this embodiment are different in execution timing during the variable display, so that the player can be surprised at various times during the variable display. The crack display period in the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance may have different visibility of the background image. Furthermore, the crack display period in the dialogue preview performance may be longer than the crack display period in the background change performance A, and multiple types of crack patterns may be provided in the dialogue preview performance (see Fig. 102 and Fig. 101), so that the proportion of the game being controlled to the big win game state is higher when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type of second crack pattern is displayed than when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type of second crack pattern is displayed. By doing this, the player will pay attention to the glass plate image 006SG301 in the dialogue preview performance, and even in a performance in which the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a different impression can be given in a suitable manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 22-2]
When the glass plate image 006SG301 of the first type having the second crack form is displayed, the visibility of the background image displayed below the predetermined display layer is different from that when the glass plate image 006SG301 of the second type having the second crack form is displayed (see Figs. 102 and 101). In this way, the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a different way, which can enhance interest.

[Form 22-3]
A whiteout image 006SG303 of a specific color can be displayed in common for the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance, and it is preferable that the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 be different between the background change performance A and the dialogue preview performance (see, for example, Figs. 102 and 101). In this way, the display pattern of the whiteout image 006SG303 can be differentiated to enhance interest.

[Form 23-1]
The image display device 5 is capable of displaying a corresponding image (e.g., a first hold display 006SG101 (second hold display) or an active display 006SG103) corresponding to a variable display in a special display layer (e.g., a layer 9 image drawing area), is capable of displaying a glass plate image 006SG301 in a first predetermined display layer (e.g., a layer 9-1 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the special display layer, and is capable of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301 in a second predetermined display layer (e.g., a layer 4 image drawing area) having a lower priority than the special display layer, Special information (e.g., small patterns) related to the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) which has a higher priority than the layer, and when a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the first specified display layer in background change performance A, the visibility of the corresponding image decreases, and when a glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed on the second specified display layer in background change performance B, the visibility of the corresponding image does not decrease, and when background change performance A is executed, a change performance is not executed, and when background change performance B is executed, a change performance can be executed (see FIG. 148).

By doing this, background change performance A and background change performance B can be executed at different times, which allows the player to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, even in the same performance in which glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, the display layer and whether or not the change performance is executed differ, so that different impressions can be given in an appropriate manner, which can increase interest in the game.

[Form 23-2-1]
The change effect is an effect in which a character image 006SG305 is displayed and the character image 006SG305 performs an action that acts on the corresponding image to change the display mode of the corresponding image, and the character image 006SG305 can be displayed in a display layer (e.g., layer 3 image drawing area) that has a lower priority than the predetermined display layer (see FIG. 148). In this way, the change effect can be executed without reducing the effect of the background change effect B to a minimum.

[Form 23-2-2]
In response to the operation of character image 006SG305, a change emphasis image (e.g., effect image 006SG330) can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the corresponding image in a display layer higher than the special display layer (see Figure 148), so that the change performance can be executed preferably even while the background change performance B is being executed.

[Form 24-1]
The display mode of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A are different, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A includes an image of a suggestive mode (e.g., fragment images 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N) that suggests that a strong S reach performance (special performance) will be executed, and the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A is longer than the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 in the background change performance A (see Figures 102, 149, and 150).

By doing this, background change performance A and strong development performance A can be executed at different times, which allows the player to be surprised at various times. Furthermore, the display manner of the fragment image 006SG302 differs between background change performance A and strong development performance A, and the correlation between the fragment image 006SG302 in strong development performance A and the performance executed thereafter can be increased, so that even performances in which the fragment image 006SG302 is similarly displayed can give a suitably different impression, thereby increasing interest in the game.

[Form 24-2]
The special effects include a first special effect (e.g., strong S reach effect J, N) and a second special effect (e.g., strong S reach effect A, B), and when the second special effect is executed, the expectation of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the first special effect is executed, and the suggestive mode includes a first suggestive mode suggesting that the first special effect will be executed and a second suggestive mode suggesting that the second special effect will be executed (see Fig. 149, Fig. 150, Fig. 151). By doing so, it is possible to increase the attention level to the fragment image 006SG302 (e.g., fragment image 006SG302, 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N) in the strong development effect A.

[Form 24-3-1]
The fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A includes a suggestive mode and a transparent mode in which at least a part of the background image displayed in a layer lower than the specific display layer is visible, and the fragment image 006SG302 in the transparent mode is displayed more than the fragment image 006SG302 in the suggestive mode (see FIG. 151). In this way, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A can be increased.

[Form 24-3-2]
The fragment image 006SG302 can rotate, and in the strong development performance A, the fragment image 006SG302 in the transparent state preferably rotates more than the fragment image 006SG302 in the suggestive state (see FIG. 151). In this way, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A can be increased.

[Form 24-4]
The strong development performance A includes a first predetermined part and a second predetermined part, in which a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a suggestive mode are displayed and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in the first predetermined part, and in which a single fragment image 006SG302 in a suggestive mode is displayed and a plurality of fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent mode are displayed in the second predetermined part (see FIG. 150). In this way, the degree of attention to the fragment image 006SG302 in the strong development performance A can be increased.

[Form 25]
In addition, the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 127 is an effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) is made invisible by the whiteout image 006SG303, and then the whiteout image 006SG303 is made transparent, and further, the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 is ended, thereby making it visible. The period during which the operation prompting effect is executed before the cut-in effect is longer than the early whiteout display period during which the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) is invisible in the cut-in effect, so that the operation prompting effect builds up to the broken effect, and a sense of speed is created during the fragment image display period, thereby realizing an ideal broken pattern.

[Form 26]
127, the cut-in effect is a effect in which the glass plate image 006SG301A (and the fragment image 006SG302) is made invisible by the white-out image 006SG303, and then the white-out image 006SG303 is made transparent, and further, the display of the white-out image 006SG303 is terminated, so that the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302 can be made visible. Note that the fragment image display period during which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cut-in effect may be longer than the operation prompt effect execution period. In this way, the crack pattern can be impressed.

[Form 27]
As shown in Fig. 118 to Fig. 128, in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, at least a part of the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap, and the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is a period shorter than the fragment image display period. In addition, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 is composed of an early whiteout display period and a late whiteout display period. In addition, the late whiteout display period may be a period longer than the early whiteout display period. In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 conceals the beginning of cracking of the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed, while preventing the whiteout image 006SG303 from being emphasized more than the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 28]
As shown in FIG. 118 to FIG. 128, in the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 starts to crack, and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed is hidden from the player by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303. Here, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be hidden on the condition that a predetermined time has passed since the start of display and the fragment image 006SG302 has moved sufficiently, so that the player can see the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable due to the start of displaying the fragment image 006SG302.

[Form 29]
118 to 128, in the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 in the early whiteout display period and the fragment image 006SG302 that has just started to be displayed are hidden from the player by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303, and the fragment image 006SG302 can be seen by the player in the later whiteout display period in which the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 is increased. Therefore, in the later whiteout display period, the effect of the fragment image 006SG302 that has been moved and displayed after a sufficient amount of time has passed since the start of display can be enhanced.

[Form 30]
In the background change performance A and the weak development performance shown in Fig. 120 and Fig. 124, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts from the execution timing of the crack performance, and these fragment images 006SG302 can be moved. Here, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different between the whiteout display later period in the background change performance A and the whiteout display later period in the weak development performance. In this way, the performance effect of the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved during the whiteout display later period of the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved during the whiteout display later period of the weak development performance can be improved.

[Form 31]
In addition, in the background change performance A and the weak development performance shown in FIG. 120 and FIG. 124, the display of the fragment image 006SG302 starts from the execution timing of the crack performance, and these fragment images 006SG302 can be moved. Here, the background change performance A may be a performance that can be executed when the game state is in the normal state, and the weak development performance may be a performance that can be executed when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability change state. Furthermore, the transmittance of the whiteout image 006SG303 may be different between the whiteout display later period in the background change performance A and the whiteout display later period in the weak development performance. In this way, the performance effect of the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved during the whiteout display later period of the background change performance A and the fragment image 006SG302 that is moved during the whiteout display later period of the weak development performance can be improved.

[Form 32]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 118 to 128, in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 using a light emission data table for the break effect over the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303, and from the timing when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends, controls the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 using a light emission data table corresponding to the background image of each effect, so that the light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 when the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 breaks can be performed appropriately.

[Form 33]
Furthermore, as shown in Figures 118 to 128, in the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect, the display period of the whiteout image 006SG303 and the fragment image display period overlap at least partially, and the speakers 8L, 8R output the breaking effect sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 from the timing when the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 starts, thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed.

[Form 34]
As shown in FIG. 118 to FIG. 128, the performance patterns (crack patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) of the crack performance in the first continuous crack performance, the second continuous crack performance, the dialogue notice performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo consecutive performance, the reach suggestion performance, the weak development performance, the strong development performance A, the strong development performance B, the cut-in performance, and the result notification performance include a first pattern in which the glass plate breaks after a crack is displayed, and a second pattern in which the glass plate breaks without being displayed. Here, whether or not a sound corresponding to the crack performance (a sound corresponding to the fragment image 006SG302 being displayed) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R may differ depending on whether or not the crack performance is performed in the first pattern and in the second pattern. In this way, it is possible to provide different impression patterns in each crack performance.

[Form 35]
As shown in FIG. 118 to FIG. 128, the performance patterns (the cracking patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) of the cracking performance in the first continuous cracking performance, the second continuous cracking performance, the dialogue notice performance, the background change performance A, the background change performance B, the pseudo consecutive performance, the reach suggestion performance, the weak development performance, the strong development performance A, the strong development performance B, the cut-in performance, and the result notification performance include a first pattern in which a crack is displayed once and then the glass plate breaks, and a second pattern in which the glass plate breaks without being displayed. Here, when the cracking performance of the result notification performance of the successful pattern can be actually executed in the second pattern, a sound corresponding to being controlled to a jackpot game state may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the cracking performance of the result notification performance of the successful pattern. In this way, it is possible to provide a pattern of the cracking performance with a different impression depending on the state.

[Form 36]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the presentation patterns of the cracking effects (cracked patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect include a first pattern in which a crack is first displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, and a second pattern in which no crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks. Here, when the breaking effect is executed in the above-mentioned first pattern, a breaking effect sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in response to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A and the fragment image 006SG302, which are images replacing the glass plate image 006SG301, whereas when the breaking effect is executed in the above-mentioned second pattern, the glass plate image 006SG301A, which is an image replacing the glass plate image 006SG301, is not displayed, and the breaking effect sound is not output from the speakers 8L, 8R in response to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, it is possible to provide breaking patterns with different impressions.

[Form 37]
118 to 128, for the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a sound effect (cracked sound effect) corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302 may be output at a volume louder than the sound effect corresponding to the display of the glass plate image 006SG301. In this way, the difference between when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed is made clear, and the cracking pattern is impressed.

[Form 38]
As shown in Fig. 145, as the cracking effect in the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a character voice can be output from the speakers 8L, 8R as a sound corresponding to the displayed character, and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, a cracking effect sound can be output from the speakers 8L, 8R as a sound corresponding to the display of the fragment image 006SG302. In this way, a difference is created between when a crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and the cracking pattern is impressed.

[Form 39]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., crack patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., crack patterns B and G). In the first pattern, the amount of fluctuation is a specific value (e.g., "30%), so that the movement speed of a first-sized fragment image 006SG302 in the first pattern is different from that of a second-sized fragment image 006SG302 smaller than the first size. In the second pattern, the amount of fluctuation is 0 (e.g., "0%), so that the movement speed of a third-sized fragment image 006SG302 in the second pattern is the same as that of a fourth-sized fragment image 006SG302 smaller than the third size (see Figures 130 and 131).

In this way, the first pattern is affected by the animation differently depending on the size, with small fragment images 006SG302 flying quickly and large fragment images 006SG302 being slightly slower and falling quickly, making it possible to use this cracking pattern when you want to show realistic movement, while the second pattern is affected by the animation in the same way for all fragments regardless of size, causing them to fly and fall in the same way, making it possible to select the appropriate cracking pattern depending on the scene.

[Form 40]
The fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in such a manner that it gradually falls after the display starts, and there are a first pattern (e.g., broken patterns A and C) and a second pattern (e.g., broken patterns D to F) as display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302, and by setting different gravity values between the first pattern and the second pattern, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls differs (see Figs. 130 and 131). In this way, by varying the parameters and varying the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 falls, a variety of patterns can be constructed, which increases interest.

[Form 41]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., broken patterns A, C to F) and a second pattern (e.g., broken patterns B, G), and the direction of gravity is set differently between the first and second patterns, so that the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves when displayed is different (see Figs. 130 and 131). In this way, by changing the parameters and changing the direction in which the fragment image 006SG302 moves, a variety of patterns can be constructed, improving interest.

[Form 42]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A), a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern B), and a third pattern (e.g., crack pattern C), and for example, the first parameter of "gravity" is common to the fragment pattern A, the crack pattern B, and the crack pattern C, and the second parameter of "strength" is different, being "5" for the fragment pattern A, "3" for the fragment pattern B, and "7" for the fragment pattern C (see Figs. 130 and 131). In this way, by fixing the first parameter and creating common parts for the fragment image 006SG302 while varying the second parameter to construct a variety of patterns, a stable and diverse display pattern for the fragment image 006SG302 can be constructed.

[Form 43]
The display patterns of the fragment image 006SG302 include a first pattern (e.g., a crack pattern E), a second pattern (e.g., a crack pattern F), and a third pattern (e.g., a crack pattern G). For example, the first parameter of "gravity" of the crack pattern E (first pattern) and the second pattern of "strength" of the crack pattern E (second pattern) are common to the crack pattern E (first pattern) and the crack pattern F (second pattern), and the second parameter of "strength" of the crack pattern F (second pattern) and the crack pattern G (third pattern) are common to the crack pattern E (second pattern) and the crack pattern F (third pattern), and the first parameter of "gravity" of the crack pattern E (second pattern) is common to the crack pattern F (second pattern) and the crack pattern F (third pattern), and the second parameter of "strength" of the crack pattern F (second pattern) is common to the crack pattern E (second pattern) and the crack pattern F (third pattern) (see FIG. 130 and FIG. 131). In this way, by creating a common part for the fragment image 006SG302 while being configured with different parameters, a stable and diverse display pattern of the fragment image 006SG302 can be constructed.

[Form 44]
As the display pattern of the cracked image (e.g., the fragment image 006SG302), there are a first pattern (e.g., the cracked pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., the cracked pattern A). The cracked image by the first pattern can be displayed in a normal state, and the cracked image by the second pattern can be displayed in a special state (e.g., a time-saving state, a probability change state) that is more advantageous than the normal state. Before the cracked image by the first pattern is displayed, and after the cracked image by the first pattern is displayed, the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer is different. Before the cracked image by the second pattern is displayed, and after the cracked image by the second pattern is displayed, the type of background image displayed in the display layer with a lower priority than the specific display layer is preferably different (e.g., see FIG. 102 and FIG. 103). By doing so, when the cracked patterns A to G are used in the normal state and when the cracked patterns A to G are used in the special state, different impressions are given, and interest can be enhanced.

[Form 45]
The background change performance A is a performance including changing a cracked image (e.g., a fragment image 006SG302) to a second mode after displaying the cracked image in a first mode, and the image display device 5 displays an effect image (e.g., a whiteout image 006SG303) when displaying the cracked image in the first mode in both the normal state and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state, a probability-changing state) that is more advantageous than the normal state, and makes the effect image non-displayable at the timing before displaying the cracked image in the second mode (e.g., see Figs. 102 and 103). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display part of the cracked image, thereby preventing the cracked image from giving an uncomfortable feeling.

[Form 46]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the presentation patterns of the cracking effects (cracked patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect include a first pattern in which a crack is first displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, and a second pattern in which no crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks. Here, the first pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in a normal state, and the second pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the cracking effect may be displayed in a manner that moves in a plurality of directions including at least the X-axis direction and the Z-axis direction in common. Furthermore, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the first pattern of the cracking effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed by the second pattern of the cracking effect may move at different speeds. In this way, the effect of the performance during the time-saving state or the probability-changing state can be enhanced by a cracking pattern that does not disrupt the tempo of the time-saving state or the probability-changing state.

[Form 47]
As shown in Figures 118 to 128, the presentation patterns of the cracking effects (cracked patterns of the glass plate image 006SG301A) in the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect include a first pattern in which a crack is first displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and then the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks, and a second pattern in which no crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 cracks. Here, the first pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in a normal state, and the second pattern of the cracking effect can be executed in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, and the proportion of the state controlled to the big win game state may be made different when the first pattern of the cracking effect is executed and when the second pattern of the cracking effect is executed. In this way, the proportion of the state controlled to the big win game state differs depending on the cracking pattern, so that the cracking pattern can be more noticeable.

[Form 48]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area) that has a higher priority than the predetermined display layer, and a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) that has a higher priority than the specific display layer. In the specific display layer, special information (e.g., small patterns) related to the variable display can be displayed, the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 at least partially overlap, the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is in a form in which a character is drawn, and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 is in a transparent form in which at least a part of a background image displayed in a display layer lower than the specific display layer can be recognized (see FIG. 151). In this way, by displaying the display periods of the two types of fragment images 006SG302 having different display forms overlapping each other, a memorable performance can be provided.

[Form 49]
A plurality of first type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., large fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a predetermined display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area), a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-2 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer, and a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302) can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer. In the image drawing area, special information (e.g., small patterns) related to the variable display can be displayed, the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 at least partially overlap, the display modes of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 and the second type of fragment image 006SG302 are different, and the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is longer than the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 (see FIG. 151 ). In this way, the display periods of the two types of fragment images 006SG302 having different display modes are overlapped to provide a memorable presentation.

[Form 50]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information (e.g., small patterns) related to variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer, the movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing on the image display device 5, the display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 overlap at least partially, and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1, which is a display area where the movable body 32 does not overlap, are displayed in a larger amount than the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2 where the movable body 32 overlaps (see FIG. 151). In this way, the fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed appropriately while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen.

[Form 51]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., a layer 5-1 image drawing area or a layer 5-1 image drawing area), and special information (e.g., small patterns) related to the variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., a layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer. The movable body 32 can perform an operation of being superimposed on the image display device 5, and the display period of the fragment images 006SG302 and the movement of the movable body 32 can be controlled by the user. The working period and the working period overlap at least partially, and a first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner moving from a first display area L1 where the movable body 32 does not overlap to a second display area L2 where the movable body 32 overlaps, and a second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner moving in the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2 (see FIG. 151). In this way, a dynamic performance can be provided by providing the fragment image 006SG302 that does not enter the area where the movable body 32 overlaps, while allowing the viewer to recognize that the movable body 32 has broken.

[Form 52]
A plurality of fragment images 006SG302 can be displayed in a specific display layer (e.g., layer 5-1 image drawing area or layer 5-1 image drawing area), special information (e.g., small patterns) related to variable display can be displayed in a special display layer (e.g., layer 10 image drawing area) having a higher priority than the specific display layer, the movable body 32 can perform an operation of superimposing on the image display device 5, the display period of the fragment image 006SG302 and the operation period of the movable body 32 overlap at least partially, and the fragment image 006SG302 continues to be displayed even after the movable body 32 superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5 moves to a position where it is not superimposed on the display screen (see FIG. 151). In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed suitably while the movable body 32 is superimposed on the display screen of the image display device 5 so that the fragment image 006SG302 is not overlooked.

[Form 53]
In the reach suggestion performance, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the image display device 5 can display a plurality of second type fragment images 006SG302 (e.g., small fragment images 006SG302A), and the second type fragment images 006SG302 take a shorter time to disappear from the display screen than the first type fragment images 006SG302 (see Figs. 106 and 107). In this way, the performance effect of the performance using the crack pattern A can be improved.

[Form 54]
There are a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern E) as display patterns for a broken image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302). The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of character image 006SG305. The type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the first type of broken image is displayed by the first pattern and after the first type of broken image is displayed by the first pattern, and the type of background image displayed in the display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the second type of broken image is displayed by the second pattern and after the second type of broken image is displayed by the second pattern (see Figures 102, 103, and 106 to 108). By doing this, a specific character (e.g., character image 006SG305) appears in common to multiple cracking patterns, thereby increasing the attention paid to the specific character.

[Form 55]
There are a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern A) and a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern E) as display patterns of a broken image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302). The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. When displaying a broken image according to the first pattern, the image display device 5 displays a When a cracked image is displayed according to the second pattern, the effect image is displayed in conjunction with the action of the character image 006SG305, and the effect image (e.g., the whiteout image 006SG303) is made non-displayable at a specific timing after the first type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed (see Figs. 102, 103, 106 to 108). In this way, the whiteout image 006SG303 hides the initial display portion of the fragment image 006SG302, thereby preventing the fragment image 006SG302 from giving an uncomfortable feeling.

[Form 56]
There are a first pattern (e.g., crack pattern E) and a second pattern (e.g., crack pattern A) as display patterns of a broken image (e.g., fragment image 006SG302). The first pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of broken images of a first type are displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The second pattern is a pattern in which a plurality of broken images of a second type are displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. The first type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner in which it moves at a speed that changes from a first speed to a second speed over the display period of the first type of fragment image 006SG302. The second type of fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a manner in which it moves without any change in speed over the display period of the second type of fragment image 006SG302 (see Figures 106, 107, 102, and 103). By doing this, the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves can be changed depending on the type of crack pattern, enhancing the presentation effect.

[Form 57]
As the display pattern of the broken image (for example, the fragment image 006SG302), there are a first pattern (for example, a broken pattern A) and a second pattern (for example, a broken pattern E). The first pattern is a pattern in which a first type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305, and the second pattern is a pattern in which a second type of broken image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the character image 006SG305. When a broken image is displayed by the first pattern, the expectation level controlled to the big win state is different from when a broken image is displayed by the second pattern (see Fig. 102, Fig. 103, Fig. 106, Fig. 107). In this way, the expectation for the character image 006SG305 is increased, and interest is increased by focusing on the type of the broken pattern after the character image 006SG305 is displayed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

(Variation 1)
For example, in the above embodiment, an example was given in which the speed of the fragment image 006SG302 after the whiteout display pre-period of each effect is all constant (V1 for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, result notification effect, and V0 for the strong development effect B and cut-in effect), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a first variant example, the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the crack effects of the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect may have different progression speeds (display speeds) in the left-right direction (also referred to as the X-axis direction), up-down direction (also referred to as the Y-axis direction) and forward direction (Z-axis direction) toward the player in the display area of the image display device 5.
The degrees may be different.

For example, as shown in FIG. 141(A), the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the fragment effects of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect may include a fragment image 006SG302A moving at a speed Vx1 in the X-axis direction, a speed 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed 0 in the Z-axis direction, a fragment image 006SG302B moving at a speed 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed Vy1 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed 0 in the Z-axis direction, and a fragment image 006SG302C moving at a speed 0 in the X-axis direction, a speed 0 in the Y-axis direction, and a speed Vz1 in the Z-axis direction, as well as a fragment image 006SG302 moving in two of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and a fragment image 006SG302 moving in three directions.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 141(B), the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the cracking effects of the strong development effect A, strong development effect B, and cut-in effect may include fragment images 006SG302A moving in the X-axis direction at a speed of Vx2, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 in the Z-axis direction, fragment images 006SG302B moving in the X-axis direction at a speed of 0, Vy2 in the Y-axis direction, and 0 in the Z-axis direction, and fragment images 006SG302C moving in the X-axis direction at a speed of 0, 0 in the Y-axis direction, and Vz2 in the Z-axis direction, as well as fragment images 006SG302 moving in two of the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions, and fragment images 006SG302 moving in three directions.

Note that moving the fragment image 006SG302 in the Z-axis direction means that the fragment image 006SG302 is enlarged and displayed, so the speed at which the fragment image 006SG302 moves in the Z-axis direction is also referred to as the enlargement display speed.

Comparing fragment image 006SG302A, which progresses only in the X-axis direction, fragment image 006SG302B, which progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and fragment image 006SG302C, which progresses only in the Z-axis direction in each performance, as shown in FIG. 141 (C), in this variant example 1, fragment image 006SG302C is simply enlarged and displayed toward the player, unlike fragment image 006SG302A and fragment image 006SG302B, and therefore the period from the start of display to the end of display is set longer than fragment image 006SG302A and fragment image 006SG302B. In other words, in the cracking effect of each effect, the enlarged fragment image 006SG302C is displayed, which creates a sense of three-dimensionality for the player, and the fragment image 006SG302A continues to create a sense of three-dimensionality even after the display of fragment image 006SG302B has ended, enhancing the presentation effect when fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a cracking effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 141 (D), the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect are grouped as effect group X, and the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, and the cut-in effect are grouped as effect group Y, and the fragment image 006SG302C displayed as the break effect of effect group X and the fragment image 006SG302C displayed as the break effect of effect group Y are grouped as follows: In comparison, in this variant example 1, the Z-axis direction progression speed Vz1 of fragment image 006SG302C in performance group X is set to be faster than the Z-axis direction progression speed Vz2 of fragment image 006SG302C in performance group Y (Vz1 > Vz2), and by doing so, the period from display start to display end of fragment image 006SG302C in performance group Y is set to be longer than the period from display start to display end of fragment image 006SG302C in performance group X. For this reason, in this variant example 1, the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect can be executed at different times as background change effect A and strong development effect B, so that the player can be drawn to these effects at various times and be surprised. Furthermore, because the period required for the fragment image 006SG302C to disappear differs between the effects included in effect group X and the effects included in effect group Y, even when the same break effect is executed and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, different impressions can be given to the player depending on the effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In particular, in this variant example 1, the effects included in effect group Y are set to have a longer period of time required for the fragment image 006SG302C to be hidden than the effects included in effect group X, so that when a cracked effect is executed as an effect included in effect group Y, the effect of the display of the fragment image 006SG302C can be enhanced more than when a cracked effect is executed as an effect included in effect group X.

In addition, in this modified example 1, the fragment images 006SG302 for the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect are illustrated as fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed and move toward the player (enlarged display). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 that are displayed and move toward the player (enlarged display) may change in visibility by being enlarged from the display start timing to the display end timing. In this way, the presentation effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be further enhanced.

In addition, in this modified example 1, in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302A that progresses only in the X-axis direction, the fragment image 006SG302B that progresses only in the Y-axis direction, and the fragment image 006SG302C that progresses only in the Z-axis direction, as shown in Figure 141 (C), the fragment image 006SG302C progresses from the start of display Although an example has been given in which the period from the start of display to the end of display is set longer than for fragment image 006SG302A or fragment image 006SG302B, the present invention is not limited to this, and the period from the start of display to the end of display of fragment image 006SG302C, which progresses only in the Z-axis direction in a specific performance (for example, a cut-in performance), may be longer than the period from the start of display to the end of display of fragment images 006SG302A and B, which move only in the X-axis direction or Y-axis direction in a predetermined performance (for example, a pseudo-consecutive performance) that is different from the specific performance. In this way, the display mode of fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the specific performance and the predetermined performance (cut-in performance and pseudo-consecutive performance in the above example) can be made different, thereby increasing the interest of these specific performance and predetermined performance.

In addition, in the above embodiment and this modified example 1, in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and these fragment images 006SG302 are hidden by moving the display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image displayed as a predetermined effect (for example, the pseudo consecutive effect and the background change effect A) may be displayed. As for the images 006SG302, all of the fragment images 006SG302 are made invisible by moving them completely outside the display area of the image display device 5, and as for the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a specific effect (for example, strong development effect B or cut-in effect), some of the fragment images 006SG302 may be made invisible by moving them completely outside the display area of the image display device 5, while other fragment images 006SG302 may be made invisible while moving outside the display area of the image display device 5. In this way, a difference can be made in the display mode of the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in a specific effect and in a specific effect, increasing the interest of these specific effects and the predetermined effects.

In addition, in this modified example 1, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as each of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the result notification effect is moved in multiple directions along the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive break effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the second consecutive break effect may start from different positions. In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed differently between the first consecutive break effect and the second consecutive break effect, which can increase interest.

(Variation 2)
In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a glass plate image 006SG301A is broken to display multiple fragment images 006SG302 as a broken effect for each effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of fragment images 006SG302 displayed as a broken effect for each effect may differ depending on the timing.

For example, as shown in FIG. 142(A), the early whiteout display period from the time when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks to the time when the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed is set to a length L1, and the late whiteout display period, which is a period following the early whiteout display period and in which the whiteout image 006SG303 with a higher transmittance than that in the early whiteout display period, is displayed, is set to a length L2 (L2>L1).

The fragment image display period is composed of a first fragment image display period of length L3 (L3>L1+L2), which is a period from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and is longer than the combined period of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period, and a second fragment image display period of length L4 (L3+L4>L1+L2), which is a period continuous with the first fragment image display period.

Here, as shown in FIG. 142 (B), during the second fragment image display period, a greater number of fragment images 006SG302 are displayed than during the first fragment image display period, thereby increasing the gaming interest of the broken effect. Furthermore, in this variant example 2, during the first fragment image display period that overlaps with the early whiteout display period, the player cannot see the fragment image 006SG302 because of the whiteout image 006SG303, whereas during the period that overlaps with the late whiteout display period, the player can see the fragment image 006SG302 through the whiteout image 006SG303. Since the length L3 of the first fragment image display period is longer than the total length (L1 + L2) of the early whiteout display period and the late whiteout display period, during the early whiteout display period, the fragment image 006SG302 is made invisible to the player, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable about the broken effect due to the breaking of the glass plate image 006SG301A, and during the late whiteout display period, the whiteout image 006SG303 is emphasized more than the fragment image 006SG302, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the broken effect.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the crack effects of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect have transparency, while the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the crack effects of the pseudo consecutive effects and the weak development effect do not have transparency. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the crack effects of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effects, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect may all have transparency, or may not all have transparency.

(Variation 3)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 143 as modified example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect changes according to the progress of the effect (in this modified example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 changes depending on the display timing of the fragment image 006SG302). It is also possible to set the time T1 (T1>0) at the end of the whiteout display first period, the time T2 (T2>T1) at the end of the whiteout display second period, and the time T3 (T3>T2) at the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302. By doing so, for example, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is sufficiently scattered over the display area of the image display device 5 just before the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302.

In particular, in this modified example 3, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, so the player can easily see the image displayed as the result of the broken effect through the fragment image 006SG302. This prevents a decrease in the effect of the effect from being caused by the image displayed as the result of the broken effect being blocked by the fragment image 006SG302 and becoming difficult to see.

In addition, in this modification example 3, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect has an increased transparency as the effect progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the cracking effect may have a decreased transparency as the effect progresses.

(Variation 4)
Furthermore, in the modified example 3, as the breaking effects of the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 increases as time passes from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A breaking, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 4, as shown in FIG. 144 (A) and FIG. 144 (B), The transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on whether the displayed effect is a first consecutive break effect, a second consecutive break effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, or a result notification effect, and even if the effect is the same, the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may differ depending on the game status (Figure 144 shows an example of the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 in a background change effect A and a weak development effect).

As shown in FIG. 144, in the background change effect A and the weak development effect, after the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks as a broken effect and the display of the fragment image 006SG302 begins, the whiteout display period ends and the fragment image 006SG302 becomes visible to the player. Here, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the background change effect A's cracked effect and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the weak development effect's cracked effect have different transmittances when visible to the player, so even if both effects involve the glass plate image 006SG301A being cracked, it is possible to create differences in the content of the effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect when the glass plate image 006SG301 is cracked and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the background change effect A's cracked effect, and when the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as the weak development effect's cracked effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 144, when comparing the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect as the background change effect A when executed in the normal state with the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect as the weak development effect when executed in the time-saving state or the probability change state, 302 have different transmittances when visible to the player, so even if both have effects in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, it is possible to create differences in the content of the effects, and this can enhance the effect of the effects when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a break effect of the background change effect A in the normal state, and when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks and the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a break effect of the weak development effect in the time-saving state or the probability bonus state.

(Variation 5)
In the above embodiment, as a result of the character acting on the glass plate image 006SG301A as the background change performance A or the reach suggestion performance, a cracking performance is executed as a performance within the background change performance A or the reach suggestion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301A as the background change performance A or the reach suggestion performance, a sound (for example, a character voice) corresponding to the displayed character may be output. In this way, it is possible to add a difference between when a crack is displayed on the glass plate image 006SG301A and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 145 as a modified example 5, in the case where a character voice corresponding to the character is output when the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 as the background change performance A or the reach suggestion performance, the character voice and the cracking sound may be output at the same volume (Vol 1 in the example of FIG. 145) so that at least a part of the output period of the character voice and the output period of the cracking sound overlap.

In addition, in this variant 5, as shown in FIG. 145, the cracking sound output when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed may be output at a louder volume (Vol 2 in the example of FIG. 145) than the cracking sound output when a crack is displayed. By doing this, it is possible to add contrast to the cracking effect when a crack is displayed in the glass plate image 006SG301 and when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed, and furthermore, it is possible to impress on the player that the cracking effect is executed as the background change effect A or the reach suggestion effect, i.e., that these background change effect A and the reach suggestion effect have been executed in a successful pattern, and the cracking pattern of these cracking effects.

(Variation 6)
In the above embodiment, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed from the timing of the glass plate image 006SG301A being broken is moved and displayed until the end of the display as the first continuous breaking effect, the second continuous breaking effect, the dialogue notice effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the breaking effect of these effects may be displayed in a rotating manner in addition to being moved during the period from the start of display to the end of display. Furthermore, the number of rotations of the fragment image 006SG302 from the start of display to the end of display may differ depending on which effect is executed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 146 as variant example 6, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the fragmentation effect of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, and the dialogue preview effect rotates R3 times from the start of display to the end of display, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the fragmentation effect of the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A rotates R2 times (R3>2) from the start of display to the end of display, which is less than R3, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as the fragmentation effect of the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect rotates R1 times (R2>R1) from the start of display to the end of display, which is less than R2.

In this way, in this variant example 6, even if the timing that may be executed during the variable display is different, by having the same number of rotations from the start to the end of the display of the fragment image 006SG302, the correlation within each combination of effects is increased, such as the combination of the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, and the dialogue preview effect, the combination of the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, and the strong development effect A, and the combination of the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result announcement effect, and the like, thereby enhancing the presentation effect within these combinations of effects.

Also, as mentioned above, in this variant 6, the number of rotations from the start of displaying the fragment image 006SG302 to the end of display varies depending on which type of break effect it is, and in particular, for example, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a pseudo consecutive break effect has a greater number of rotations from the start of displaying to the end of display than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cut-in effect break effect, so that it is possible to increase the variety of break effects executed as the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, and the performance effect when the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed can be enhanced.

In this modified example 6, the fragment images 006SG302 displayed as the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are rotated, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the rotation of the fragment images 006SG302, when the fragment images 006SG302 reach a first rotation angle, the player can see the background image through the fragment images 006SG302, and when the fragment images 006SG302 reach a second rotation angle, the player can not see at least a part of the background image through the fragment images 006SG302. By doing so, the presentation effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed can be enhanced. Furthermore, in the case where the transparency of the fragment images 006SG302 changes depending on the rotation angle of the fragment images 006SG302 as described above, rather than rotating all of the fragment images 006SG302 in synchronization, at least some of the fragment images 006SG302 may be rotated at an angle different from that of the other fragment images 006SG302. For example, when one fragment image 006SG302 is rotated at the first rotation angle, some of the other fragment images 006SG302 are rotated at the second rotation angle, thereby further enhancing the presentation effect when the fragment images 006SG302 are displayed.

(Variation 7)
In addition, as the pseudo consecutive performance of the above embodiment, a crack is displayed in the image display area of the image display device 5, and then a crack performance is executed according to the movement of the movable body 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Fig. 147 (A) as a modified example 7, the pseudo consecutive performance may be such that a crack is displayed as a crack display period after a pre-operation period in which a character acts on a glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the movable body 32 falls. Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 147 (B), the crack display period may be composed of a crack pre-stage display period and a crack post-stage display period, as in the background change performance A of the above embodiment, so that the crack is displayed in two stages and then the crack performance is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 147(B), the length of the pre-crack display period in the pseudo consecutive performance may be made different from the pre-crack display period in the background change performance A of the above embodiment. By doing this, even though the background change performance A of the above embodiment and the pseudo consecutive performance of this modification example 7 both have two stages of cracks in the glass plate image 006SG301, by making the period until the second stage of cracks is displayed different between the background change performance A and the pseudo consecutive performance, it is possible to increase the number of performance patterns until the crack performance is executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect when cracks appear in the glass plate image 006SG301.

Furthermore, in this modified example 7, the pseudo consecutive performance is exemplified as a performance in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the action of the character or the movement of the movable body 32 operates, as in the background change performance A in the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach suggestion performance may be a performance in which cracks are displayed in two stages in the display area of the image display device 5 after a preliminary operation period in which the action of the character or the movement of the movable body 32 operates, as in the background change performance A in the above embodiment. Even in this case, the crack display period in the reach suggestion performance may be composed of a preliminary crack display period and a latter crack display period, and the length of the preliminary crack display period in the reach suggestion performance may be different from the preliminary crack display period of the background change performance A in the above embodiment. By doing this, even though the background change performance A of the above embodiment and the reach suggestion performance of this variant example 7 both have two stages of cracks appearing in the glass plate image 006SG301, by differentiating the period until the second stage of cracks appears in the background change performance A and the reach suggestion performance, it is possible to increase the number of performance patterns until the cracking performance is executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect when cracks appear in the glass plate image 006SG301.

(Variation 8)
In the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A as crack precursor images are displayed in a layer 4 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image and the glass plate image 006SG301A as an image replacing the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed not only in the layer 4 image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, but also in a layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U.

For example, in this modified example 8, as shown in Fig. 148 (A1) to (A5), in background change performance A, the glass plate image 006SG301 can be displayed in a layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U. Also, in response to the character image 006SG305 kicking action toward the front, cracks are displayed to spread radially from a position slightly to the right of the approximate center of the glass plate image 006SG301, so that after the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a pre-crack state (see Fig. 148 (A2)), when the crack gradually spreads radially and changes to a crack state, a part of the crack can be displayed so as to be superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U (see Fig. 148 (A3)).

When a part of the crack is displayed so as to overlap the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U in this way, if the first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) or the active display 006SG103 is displayed, there is a risk that the visibility of the first reserved display 006SG101 (second reserved display) or the active display 006SG103 will decrease. Therefore, in this case, the execution of the active change effect in which the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes is restricted, so the display color of the active display 006SG103 does not change.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 148 (B1) to (B5), in the background change performance B, as described in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the character image 006SG305 can be displayed in a layer image drawing area lower than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U. Also, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 appearing in the upper right corner of the screen, a crack display area 006SG324 consisting of cracks including small cracked areas is displayed in the lower left position of the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Fig. 148 (B1)), and then, in response to the action of the character image 006SG305 starting to descend, two new crack display areas 006SG324 are displayed in the upper right position of the crack display area 006SG324, causing the crack pattern of the glass plate image 006SG301 to change stepwise (see Fig. 148 (B2)).

However, in this case, since the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in the layer 4 image drawing area, which is lower than the active display area 5F and the special drawing reserved memory display area 5U, even if the crack extends and is displayed so as to overlap the active display area 5F and the special drawing reserved memory display area 5U, the crack will not be displayed so as to overlap the active display area 5F and the special drawing reserved memory display area 5U.

In addition, even if the character image 006SG305 is displayed moving across the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, the effect image 006SG330 may be displayed in a layer image drawing area higher than the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U without the character image 006SG305 being displayed superimposed on the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U (see FIG. 148 (B3)). After that, the active change performance is executed, and the display color of the active display 006SG103 changes (see FIG. 148 (B4)).

In this way, the background change effect A, which may reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, has an execution period overlapping with the active change effect (action effect by a changed character), so the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103 is restricted, while the background change effect B, which does not reduce the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state, allows the execution of an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display 006SG103, so that even though the effect similarly displays a crack precursor image, the difference is in the display layer and whether or not the active change effect is executed, giving a different impression and increasing interest in the game. The target of the change effect may be the first reserved display 006SG101 or the second reserved display.

In addition, in background change performance A, a part of the crack is displayed so as to overlap with the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U, reducing the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U. However, if the display state of the reserved display or active display changes in such a situation, it becomes difficult to tell whether the change has occurred due to the change performance or the crack state, which causes distrust among the player. Therefore, it is preferable to be able to execute the change performance in background change performance B, in which the visibility of the active display area 5F and the special chart reserved memory display area 5U is not reduced even when the crack state occurs.

In addition, in this variant 8, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked state in the background change performance A, the execution of the active change performance is restricted, but for example, after that, the crack performance is executed, the fragment image 006SG302 scatters, and the whiteout image 006SG303 becomes invisible, and then the active change performance can be executed, that is, it may be executed at a timing different from the original execution timing (for example, at the start of the fluctuation or during a reach). Also, the active change performance may be executed in a simplified form (for example, a mode in which a changed character is not displayed and the active display mode is casually changed at the timing of FIG. 148 (A3)). In this way, by performing the change performance during a period that does not overlap with the period in which the active display is difficult to see due to the crack performance, the performance effects of both the crack performance and the change performance can be enhanced.

(Variation 9)
In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which when a strong development effect A is executed, it is determined that the effect will develop into a strong S reach effect A; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiple fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the crack effect may include fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N, etc., in a suggestive manner that suggests that one of multiple types of strong S reach effects A, B, J, N with different degrees of expectation will be executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 149 (A) to (F), when a crack effect is executed in the strong development effect A, and after the display of the whiteout image 006SG303 ends and before the display of the fragment image 006SG302 ends and becomes invisible, a fragment image 006SG342M indicating that a strong S reach effect A or a strong S reach effect B will be executed, a fragment image 006SG342J indicating that a strong S reach effect J will be executed, a fragment image 006SG342N indicating that a strong S reach effect N will be executed, and multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed (see Figure 149 (G)).

And, among the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, and 006SG342N, if the fragment image 006SG342M is displayed singly while the other fragment images 006SG342J and 006SG342N are hidden and multiple fragment images 006SG302 in a transparent state are displayed, it is notified that a strong S reach performance A or a strong S reach performance B will be executed (see Fig. 150 (A1), (A2), and (A2')), and the fragment image 006SG342J is displayed singly while the other fragment images 006SG If fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342N are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is announced that a strong S reach effect J will be executed (see Figures 150 (B1) and (B2)), and if a single fragment image 006SG342N is displayed while the other fragment images 006SG342M and 006SG342J are hidden and multiple transparent fragment images 006SG302 are displayed, it is announced that a strong S reach effect N will be executed (see Figures 150 (C1) and (C2)).

By doing this, it is possible to increase the correlation between the fragment image in the strong development performance A and the strong S reach performance that is executed afterwards, so that even if the performance also displays the fragment image 006SG302, it gives a suitably different impression and increases interest in the game.

In this modified example, the type of strong S reach performance to be executed is suggested by non-transparent fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N, which display the faces of the types of characters that appear in various strong S reach performances. However, the suggestion is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways as long as the fragment image is in a form that can identify the type of strong S reach performance to be executed. For example, the fragment image may display related information such as the reach title name or background image that can identify the type of strong S reach performance.

The type that has been decided to be executed is indicated by one of the multiple fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N remaining displayed while the others are hidden, but it may also be indicated by, for example, displaying one of the fragment images 006SG342M, 006SG342J, 006SG342N larger, in a different color, displaying an effect image, or displaying it in an emphasized manner. Also, the strong S reach performance may be executed ultimately while two or more fragment images are displayed.

(Variation 10)
In addition, in the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which multiple fragment images 006SG302 are displayed in one layer 5 image drawing area, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the images may be displayed in two or more layer image drawing areas.

For example, in this modified example 10, as shown in FIG. 151, of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 that can be displayed in the break pattern F used in the strong development performance A, the large fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a transparent manner in the layer 5-1 image drawing area, and the small fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in a non-transparent manner in the layer 5-2 image drawing area that is higher than the layer 5-1 image drawing area. In this case, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as a break precursor image is displayed in both the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area at the time of breakage. Note that one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area has the face of a character corresponding to the type of strong S reach performance depicted, as explained in modified example 9.

In this way, one of the large fragment images 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-1 image drawing area has a character drawn on it, and the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the layer 5-2 image drawing area has a transparent aspect that allows recognition of at least a portion of the background image displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area, which is lower than the layer 5-2 image drawing area. In this way, the display periods of two types of fragment images 006SG302 with different display aspects are overlapped to provide a memorable presentation.

Also, as shown in FIG. 151(B), the layer 5-1 image drawing area and the layer 5-2 image drawing area are composed of a first display area L1 that does not overlap the movable body 32 when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, and a second display area L2 that is surrounded by a two-dot chain line indicating the movable body 32. When the movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the first display area L1 has a larger display amount than the fragment image 006SG302 displayed in the second display area L2. In this way, the fragment image 006SG302 can be displayed preferably while the movable body 32 overlaps with the display area of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, a first fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves from the first display area L1 to enter the second display area L2, while a second fragment image 006SG302 of the multiple fragment images 006SG302 is displayed in a manner that moves in the first display area L1 so as not to enter the second display area L2. In this way, a fragment image 006SG302 that does not enter the second display area L2 makes the viewer aware that the image has broken, while a fragment image 006SG302 that passes through the first display area L1 is provided, providing a dynamic presentation.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a glass plate image 006SG301 that imitates a glass plate is applied as an example of a crack precursor image is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a crack precursor image that imitates an object other than glass, such as a panel, door, or rock, may also be applied. In addition, when displaying the glass plate image 006SG301, it may be displayed with a transmittance of 100% or less than 100%. In addition, the crack precursor image may be displayed in multiple layer image drawing areas so that the crack presentation can be performed individually.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as an example of a fragment image, a glass fragment image 006SG302 that imitates a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image is displayed as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as an image that imitates at least a part of the glass plate image 006SG301A that replaces the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed, a fragment image that imitates an image different from the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed in part. In addition, although the fragment image is displayed on a display layer higher than the crack precursor image, it may be displayed on a display layer lower than the crack precursor image.

In addition, in the above embodiment, cracking patterns A to G were set as the cracking patterns in the cracking effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute a cracking effect based on a cracking pattern of a type other than the above.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a cracking effect can be executed during the execution of an effect such as a preview effect that indicates the expected probability of a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cracking effect may be executed separately from other effects other than the preview effect. In this case, the expected probability of a jackpot may be made different depending on the state of the cracking pattern, so that the cracking effect may be executed as one of the preview effects, or may be executed as a change effect when the performance stage, performance mode, or game state changes.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed as the crack precursor image is cracked when some kind of impact (force) is applied from behind to approximately the center of the image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack may be initiated when some kind of impact (force) is applied from the front to a specified position on the crack precursor image. The force may also be applied to multiple points on the crack precursor image at a specified timing or at multiple timings.

In addition, in the above embodiment, depending on the type of preview performance, there is an example in which the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image changes to a cracked state and then the cracking starts, and there is also an example in which the cracking starts suddenly without changing to a cracked state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of the type of preview performance, all cracking performances may start after the glass plate image 006SG301 as a crack precursor image changes to a cracked state, or all cracking performances may start suddenly without changing to a cracked state.

In the above embodiment, when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the object images (characters, etc.), decorative patterns, and background images displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 are displayed with the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is not displayed, and are displayed with the second visibility lower than the first visibility when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed in a cracked form, the various images displayed in the layer image drawing area lower than the glass plate image 006SG301 may be displayed with the first visibility without reducing the visibility, and the cracks may be displayed so as to stand out, for example, by displaying a colored effect image or the like in the part representing the crack.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the character image 006SG305 is mainly used as an example of an object image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of character may be a type other than the above. Also, various changes can be made to the object image, such as a person, an object such as an iron ball or a rock, or a target, instead of a character.

In the above embodiment, the cracking effect is exemplified in the following cases: the cracking effect starts according to the movement of the object image, the cracking effect starts according to the movement of the movable body 32, and the cracking effect starts regardless of the movement of the object image or the movable body 32. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In all the effects, the cracking effect may start according to the movement of the object image, or in all the effects, the cracking effect may start according to the movement of the movable body 32, or in all the effects, the cracking effect may start regardless of the movement of the object image or the movable body 32. In addition, the movable body 32 as a logo role object is applied as an example of a movable body, but a board-side movable body provided in another location on the game board 2 may be applied, or a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 other than the game board 2 may be applied. Furthermore, the cracking effect may start according to the movement of a movable body such as the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the cracking of the cracking effect starts, a whiteout image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% is displayed as an effect image on a display layer higher than the glass plate image 006SG301, making it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302 in the period immediately after the start of the cracking effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to display the whiteout image 006SG303 at the start of the cracking effect to make it difficult to see the fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form was exemplified in which the fragment image 006SG302 is made difficult to see at the start of the cracking effect by displaying a whiteout image 006SG303 with a transmittance of 0% in a display layer above the glass plate image 006SG301, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance of the fragment image 006SG302 may be increased at the start of the cracking effect, in other words, the fragment image 006SG302 may be faded in to make it difficult to see at the start of the cracking effect.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying a crack is drawn and placed in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a glass plate image 006SG301A is drawn and placed in the layer 5 image drawing area as an image that will actually break (change into a fragment image 006SG302). However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to draw and place a glass plate image 006SG301 in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a fragment image 006SG302 as an image of the glass plate image 006SG301 broken in the layer 5 image drawing area, without drawing and placing the glass plate image 006SG301A.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 and the glass plate image 006SG301A are displayed in the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying in the cracked state may be different from the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying in the cracked state. For example, by making the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301A for displaying in the cracked state higher than the transmittance of the glass plate image 006SG301 for displaying in the cracked state (making the glass plate image 006SG301 a non-transparent image), the timing at which the cracks are displayed and the timing at which the cracking effect is executed can be made easier to understand than in the above embodiment.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example is given of a form in which the display of the glass plate image 006SG301A that changes to a cracked state in the layer 5 image drawing area is started at the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked state in the layer 4 image drawing area is made invisible, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display times of the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked state and the glass plate image 006SG301A that changes to a cracked state may at least partially overlap.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the glass plate image 006SG301 displayed in a cracked state is exemplified as a crack precursor image in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack precursor image may be an image other than the glass plate image 006SG301 in a cracked state, so long as it is an image that suggests that the glass plate image 006SG301A displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 will crack.

In addition, in the above embodiment, examples of the breaking effects of the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect are given in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick (see Figure 102), a hammer (see Figure 106), a punch (see Figure 108), etc., thereby breaking the glass plate image 006SG301A; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a form in which the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 to break the background change effect A, the reach suggestion effect, and the weak development effect, in addition to or instead of the kick, hammer, punch, etc. described above, the glass plate image 006SG301A may be broken by the action of a slash with a sword or the like. In particular, as background change effects in this embodiment, in addition to background change effect A in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a kick to break the glass plate image 006SG301A (breaking due to the impact of the kick), and background change effect B in which the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks without the action of the character or the movable body 32 (see FIG. 87), background change effect C in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 with a sword to break the glass plate image 006SG301A (breaking due to a sword slash) can be executed, as described above, and the proportion of the big win game state may be varied depending on whether the character acts on the glass plate 006SG301 or the manner in which the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301. In this way, it is possible to increase the number of glass plate 006SG301A breaking effect patterns that can be executed as a breaking effect, and to further increase the player's attention to the breaking effect.

In addition, in the above embodiment, in the first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, a form was exemplified in which a whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible not to display the whiteout image 006SG303 from the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 (the timing when the glass plate image 006SG301A starts to break). This increases the sense of speed from when the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 is displayed until the glass plate image 006SG301A breaks, providing a powerful and memorable effect of the breakage.

Furthermore, when the whiteout image 006SG303 is not displayed as a cracked effect as described above, instead of displaying the glass plate image 006SG301A in place of the cracked glass plate image 006SG301, the cracked glass plate image 006SG301 itself may be displayed as cracked. By doing this, the glass plate image 006SG301A is not displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the glass plate image 006SG301A is displayed in place of the glass plate image 006SG301 when the cracked effect is executed.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form in which a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change performance A or background change performance B is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a non-transparent fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change performance A or background change performance B. In particular, if a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed when a cracking effect is executed as background change performance A or background change performance B in this manner, a part of the background image that was displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until immediately before the execution of the cracking effect may be displayed in the fragment image 006SG302.

In addition, in the above embodiment, examples have been given of forms in which the breaking effects can be executed as a first consecutive breaking effect, a second consecutive breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the breaking effects may be executed as effects other than these first consecutive breaking effect, second consecutive breaking effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, a strong development effect A, a strong development effect B, a cut-in effect, and a result notification effect. For example, during the variable display, after it has been notified that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state with a low advantage for the player (for example, a non-variable jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, or a jackpot game state of variable jackpot C with two rounds), or in the jackpot game state after the variable display ends, a promotion effect may be executed to notify the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state with a high advantage for the player (for example, a jackpot game state of variable jackpot A with 10 rounds that is controlled to a variable state after the jackpot game ends), or a break effect may be executed as a revival effect to notify the player that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state after it has been notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state during the variable display.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when performing the cracking effects as the first continuous cracking effect, the second continuous cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, the character or the movable body 32 acts, the crack is displayed, etc., and then the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as these cracking effects, there may be cases where the whiteout image 006SG303 is displayed and the glass plate image 006SG301A is cracked without the character or the movable body 32 acting, or the crack is displayed. In this way, the execution of the cracking effect can give the player a sense of surprise, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the first consecutive breaking effect, the second consecutive breaking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect are exemplified as being formed by breaking the glass plate image 006SG301 (and the glass plate image 006SG301A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and these breaking effects may also be formed by breaking images other than the glass plate image 006SG301 or the glass plate image 006SG301A (for example, the operation prompt image 006SG310 for the dialogue preview effect or the cut-in effect).

In addition, in the above embodiment, in the first consecutive break effect, second consecutive break effect, dialogue preview effect, background change effect A, background change effect B, pseudo consecutive effect, reach suggestion effect, weak development effect, strong development effect A, strong development effect B, cut-in effect, and result notification effect, a form was exemplified in which the glass plate image 006SG301A, the fragment image 006SG302, and at least a part of the background image are temporarily made invisible to the player by displaying the whiteout image 006SG303 as an image above the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a break effect, the whiteout image 006SG303 may be displayed as an image between the glass plate image 006SG301A and the background image.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as the background change effect A and the breaking effect of the reach suggestion effect, a form in which a character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the back side to the front side of the display area of the image display device 5 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as these breaking effects, the image of the character may be drawn and positioned in a drawing area higher than the glass plate image 006SG301 (see Figures 3 and 4), so that the character acts on the glass plate image 006SG301 from the front side to the back side of the display area of the image display device 5.

In the above embodiment, the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed as a normal flat image in the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of a break effect in an effect that suggests that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when other effects are executed, such as the strong development effect and the cut-in effect, the fragment image 006SG302 may be displayed as a 3D image that can be viewed stereoscopically. In this way, when the strong development effect and the cut-in effect are executed, the display of the 3D fragment image 006SG302 as the break effect allows the player to recognize that the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which the fragment image 006SG302 is displayed in the cracking effects of the first consecutive cracking effect, the second consecutive cracking effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the pseudo consecutive effect, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 may be made different between the cracking effects in effects such as the strong development effect and the cut-in effect, which, by being executed, suggest that the probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state is higher than when other effects are executed, and the cracking effects in effects other than these strong development effect and cut-in effect. By doing this, for example, the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in a strong development effect or a cut-in effect can be made slower than the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed as a cracking effect in a first consecutive crack effect, a second consecutive crack effect, a dialogue preview effect, a background change effect A, a background change effect B, a pseudo consecutive effect, a reach suggestion effect, a weak development effect, or a result notification effect, so that when a strong development effect or a cut-in effect is being executed, the movement display speed of the fragment image 006SG302 can make the player recognize that there is a high probability that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 116 and 117, a transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for the cracking effects of the first consecutive break effect, the second consecutive break effect, the dialogue preview effect, the background change effect A, the background change effect B, the reach suggestion effect, the weak development effect, the strong development effect A, the strong development effect B, the cut-in effect, and the result notification effect, while a non-transparent fragment image 006SG302 is displayed for the cracking effects of the pseudo consecutive break effect and the weak development effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 may be differentiated between the cracking effects in effects such as the strong development effect and the cut-in effect, which suggest that the probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state is higher than when other effects are executed, and the cracking effects in effects other than these strong development effect and cut-in effect. In this way, the player can recognize whether or not there is a high probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state based on the transparency of the fragment image 006SG302 displayed when the crack effect is executed.

As described above, the present invention provides
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information, comprising:
A game control means;
A performance control means;
A display means,
The game control means includes:
variably displaying the specific identification information based on a plurality of types of variable display patterns;
The control is possible between a normal state and a special state in which the variable display is more easily performed than in the normal state and the average variable display period is shorter;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform variable display of a plurality of types of decorative identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information,
It is possible to display a hold display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information that has not yet started,
A corresponding display corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information being executed can be displayed in a corresponding display area,
When the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display can be performed to switch a reserved display corresponding to the variable display to the corresponding display,
As the variable display of the decoration identification information, a moving display for moving the decoration identification information and a pre-operation display for operating the decoration identification information in a manner different from the moving display before starting the moving display can be performed,
In the normal state, when the switching display is being performed, the pre-operation display is performed;
executing variable display of the decoration identification information based on variable display pattern information corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display patterns transmitted from the game control means;
When the variable display is performed based on the first type of variable display pattern information and when the variable display is performed based on the second type of variable display pattern information, the switching display can be performed in common,
A predetermined effect that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state can be executed.
A specific effect that is different from the predetermined effect and suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state can be executed.
The display means is capable of displaying a crack precursor image in a predetermined display layer,
A fragment image can be displayed on a specific display layer having a higher priority than the predetermined display layer,
A special display layer having a higher priority than the specific display layer can display special information related to the variable display,
The predetermined effect includes a first predetermined part that displays the crack precursor image, and a second predetermined part that displays a plurality of fragment images corresponding to the crack precursor image,
The specific effect is an effect in which a plurality of fragment images are displayed in a period shorter than a period from when the crack precursor image is displayed in the predetermined effect to when a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image is displayed,
The execution timing of the predetermined effect and the specific effect is different,
a type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the predetermined display layer is different before the first predetermined part is executed and after the fragment image in the second predetermined part is displayed;
The type of background image displayed in a display layer having a lower priority than the specific display layer is different before the specific performance is executed and after the fragment image in the specific performance is displayed.
It is characterized by:
According to the present invention, when the variable display of the specific identification information starts, a switching display is performed to switch the reserved display corresponding to the variable display to an active display, and when the switching display is performed, a pre-operation display is performed to operate the decorative identification information in a manner different from the scroll display before the scroll display of the decorative identification information starts, thereby making effective use of the period required for the switching display. Furthermore, since the pre-operation display is performed when the switching display is performed in the normal state, the average variable display period is longer than in the special state, and the interest when the variable display of the decorative identification information starts in the normal state, which tends to be monotonous, can be increased. Furthermore, since a common switching display is performed even when variable display based on different types of variable display patterns is performed, the switching display patterns can be reduced. Furthermore, since the predetermined performance in which a crack precursor image and a fragment image are displayed and the specific performance in which a fragment image is displayed without displaying a crack precursor image can be performed at different times, the player can be surprised at various times, and further, since the types of background images are different before and after the fragment image is displayed in common in the predetermined performance and the specific performance, even if the performance in which the fragment image is displayed is similar, different impressions can be given and the interest in the game can be increased. That is, in a production in which the display screen is likened to glass, a crack (a glass plate as a crack precursor image) is displayed on the display screen, and then a number of fragment images are displayed as if the display screen had been broken, the production effect can be enhanced and interest can be increased. In this way, the present invention prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the unnatural display of the decorative identification information and the reserved display, and can attract the player's interest from the start to the end of the variable display, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Therefore, it has high marketability.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine was used as an example of a game machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of a slot machine, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to the big bonus, regular bonus, and assist time (AT), and the special state corresponds to assist time (AT), etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a jackpot game state in which game balls can enter the jackpot winning port and more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the start winning port or the normal winning port is considered to be an advantageous state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a time-saving state or a probability-changing state may also be considered to be an advantageous state as long as it is a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as making it easier for game balls to enter the winning port than in a normal state or making it easier to control the game into a jackpot game state.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. A gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can variably display identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A predetermined effect that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state can be executed.
The predetermined effect is an effect of displaying a fragment image corresponding to the crack precursor image after displaying the crack precursor image,
A special background image can be displayed as a background image before the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance,
As a background image after the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance, any one of a plurality of background images including a first predetermined background image and a second predetermined background image which is different from the special background image and suggests that there is a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first predetermined background image can be displayed;
When the special background image is displayed before the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance, the object image in any one of a plurality of object images can be displayed;
According to a state of the object image, it is possible to suggest which of the plurality of background images will be displayed after the fragment image is displayed in the predetermined performance,
The object image of the same type as the object image displayed before the fragment image is displayed can be displayed after the predetermined effect is executed,
In one rendering mode, a plurality of types of specific background images including a first specific background image and a second specific background image can be switched and displayed;
When the specific background image is switched from the first specific background image to the second specific background image, a background fade-out display is executed by gradually increasing the transparency of the first specific background image, and a background fade-in display is executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the second specific background image,
When starting the variable display of the identification information, a fade-out display of the identification information can be executed by gradually increasing the transparency of the identification information,
When the variable display of the identification information is terminated, a fade-in display of the identification information can be executed by gradually decreasing the transparency of the identification information,
The identification information fade-out display and the background fade-out display can be executed at the same time,
The identification information fade-in display and the background fade-in display can be executed at a common time,
a period during which the background fade-out display is executed is longer than a period during which the identification information fade-out display is executed,
an execution period of the fade-in display of the background is longer than an execution period of the fade-in display of the identification information;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images